PacT Series

MasterPacT™ MTZ
with MicroLogic X

Catalog 2025
Air circuit breakers
and switch-disconnectors

January, 2025

se.com
Legal
Information The information provided in this Catalog contains description of
Schneider Electric products, solutions and services (“Offer”) with
technical specifications and technical characteristics of the performance
of the corresponding Offer.

The content of this document is subject to revision at any time

without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design
and manufacturing.

To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability

is assumed by Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any type
of damages arising out of or in connection with (i) informational
content of this Catalog not conforming with or exceeding the technical
specifications, or (ii) any error contained in this Catalog, or (iii) any use,
decision, act or omission made or taken on basis of or in reliance on any
information contained or referred to in this Catalog.

SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC MAKES NO WARRANTY OR

REPRESENTATION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, AS TO WHETHER THIS CATALOG OR ANY INFORMATION
CONTAINED THEREIN SUCH AS PRODUCTS AND SERVICES WILL
MEET REQUIREMENTS, EXPECTATIONS OR PURPOSE OF ANY
PERSON MAKING USE THEREOF.

Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric and

its subsidiaries referred to in this Catalog are property of Schneider
Electric or its subsidiaries. All other brands are trademarks of their
respective owners.

This Catalog and its content are protected under applicable copyright
laws and provided for informative use only. No part of this Catalog may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), for any purpose,
without the prior written permission of Schneider Electric.

Copyright, intellectual, and all other proprietary rights in the content of

this Catalog (including but not limited to software, audio, video, text, and
photographs) rests with Schneider Electric or its licensors. All rights in
such content not expressly granted herein are reserved. No rights of
any kind are licensed or assigned or shall otherwise pass to persons
accessing this information.

Trademarks QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in

Japan and other countries.
Same technology, same offer, simpler names
We’re making it easier for you to navigate across the wide range of our world-class digital offerings
and select with confidence the offers that are right for you and your needs.

EcoStruxure Architecture
To enable brand consistency, relevance and impact, we are reinforcing our EcoStruxure architecture
TM

and digital customer lifecycle tools to ensure a seamless experience from the CAPEX to OPEX phases
of each project, bridging our entire ecosystem of partners, services providers and end users.

EcoStruxure is our IoT-enabled open and interoperable system architecture and platform. EcoStruxure
delivers enhanced values around safety, reliability, efficiency, sustainability and connectivity for our
customers. EcoStruxure leverages advancements in IoT, mobility, sensing, cloud, analytics, and
cybersecurity technologies to deliver Innovation At Every Level from Connected Products; Edge
Control; and Apps, Analytics & Services: our IoT technology Levels.

Old names New names

Ecodial EcoStruxure Power Design
Ecoreal EcoStruxure Power Build
Ecoreach EcoStruxure Power Commission
Masterpact MTZ mobile App EcoStruxure Power Device App

MasterPacT MTZ and the Pact Series

Future-proof your installation with Schneider Electric’s low and medium voltage Pact Series.
Built on legendary Schneider Electric innovation, the Pact Series comprises world-class circuit
breakers, switches, residual current devices and fuses, for all standard and specific applications.
Experience robust performance with this comprehensive range of EcoStruxure-ready switchgear, for
all applications from 16 to 6300 A in low-voltage and up to 40.5 kV in medium-voltage.

Building on the strengths of the Pact Series, MasterPacT MTZ is the next generation of high power low
voltage circuit breakers, designed to protect electrical systems from damage caused by overloads,
short circuits and equipment ground faults. MasterPacT MTZ embeds advanced digital technologies
and MicroLogic X control units helping to contribute to safety and energy efficiency, and keeping you
future-ready.

Old names New names

Compact ComPact
Masterpact MasterPacT
Micrologic MicroLogic
Transferpact TransferPact
Fupact FuPact
 Bringing IoT innovation
to power distribution

For the Internet of Things era, EcoStruxure Power is the trusted and secure platform for developing
™

safe, highly available, energy-efficient electrical distribution systems. And MasterPacT MTZ air circuit ™

breakers have EcoStruxure innovation built in. Scalability, durability, and connectivity come together
to create a seamless and flexible circuit breaker that actively helps you save time, increase efficiency,
and improve energy consumption.

Since 1987, MasterPacT circuit breakers have established a legendary reputation. And now,
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers build upon that legacy with the innovation you need today to build
the power distribution systems of tomorrow.

Buildings, industry, and energy

AMOUNT OF AVAILABLE LEVEL OF INCREASE

40% ENERGY CONSUMED

BY BUILDINGS
1
+ 50% IN GLOBAL INDUSTRY
ENERGY DEMAND
WORLDWIDE BY 2050 2

50
NUMBER OF SMART, EXPECTED UPTIME

BILLION
CONNECTED DEVICES
BY 2020
3

100% FOR BUILDINGS

WORLDWIDE

1 UN Report: World Urbanization Prospects, 2014

2 UN Report: Global Industrial Energy Efficiency Benchmarking, 2010
3 Cisco White Paper: The Internet of Things: How the Next Evolution of the Internet Is Changing Everything, 2011

II se.com
Help to improve safety, offer greater
cybersecurity, and make your power distribution
system more reliable, efficient, and sustainable.

Building investors want • Short but reliable project lead times

• Flexible and scalable investments
• Valuable energy labels and ratings
• Compliance to building codes and regulations

Building tenants want • Full power availability

• Energy expense optimization
• Tight control of maintenance costs
• Occupant comfort and productivity

Facility managers want • To provide high-quality service

• To keep electrical system efficient
• To stay connected and act remotely
• To restore power quickly in case of an outage

Life Is On | Schneider Electric III

 Built on the legendary performance and
reliability of the MasterPacT range.

MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers prepare you for the future of power distribution with smart connectivity,
remote monitoring, and easy customization via digital modules.

• Intuitive EcoStruxure Power Device • Intuitive MicroLogic X control unit

TM

App smartphone app for easy • Easy installation using established architectures
operation and maintenance
• Seamless integration with building and energy
• Precise Class 1 power meter built in management systems with EcoStruxure architectures
for energy-saving capabilities
• Designed and tested to applicable standards for
• Easy customization with digital modules ANSI, UL, and IEC
• Low migration cost from MasterPacT NT/NW
to MasterPacT MTZ

With MasterPacT MTZ breakers,

enhanced performance and
connectivity equip you for the
future of power distribution.
Available from 630 A to 6300 A.

IV se.com
Stay connected and avoid downtime with the
Ecostruxure Power Device App app and EcoStruxure
software.

One unified smartphone app Notifications and

• Within the palm of your hand you can be connected collaboration remotely
to your:
• Receive maintenance reminders and real-time
• MasterPacT MTZ air circuit breakers
alerts wherever you are: periodic inspection
• TeSys GV4 monitor circuit breakers
and alarms
• Easergy P3 protection relays
• Access saved details of events: data and
• ...and more.
documents, self-diagnosis, event type, severity
• With Ecostruxure Power Device App app you have
level, time stamp
access to your devices’ information and can perform
• Supervise remotely and collaborate in real-time with
control operations right from your smartphone.
your coworkers using EcoStruxure Power software
and services:

Secure wireless notifications locally • EcoStruxure Energy Hub

• EcoStruxure Power Monitoring Expert
• Perform control operations with your smartphone
• Power SCADA Operation
• Monitor electrical data: currents and voltages,
• Building Operation
energy consumption, power quality, phase
balance and harmonics • Share circuit breaker data remotely with experts
and management systems
• Restore power quickly and easily using guidance
from digital modules; Power Restoration Assistant
and MasterPacT Operation Assistant

Android iOS

Life Is On | Schneider Electric V

Access new energy-saving capabilities —
A certified Class 1 power meter gives you precise
power measurements for greater efficiency.

• First air circuit breaker with built-in, third- • Instant access to power consumption
party-certified Class 1 active power meter data — no need to wait for software or
(IEC 61557-12) run analytics
• Instant and comprehensive views of your • View energy usage analysis, trends, and energy
building’s power consumption costs allocation
• An easy, time-saving way to add energy • Compliant with international energy-efficiency
measurement to your system regulations: ISO 50001 and IEC 60364-8

Class 1 accuracy for active power and energy management.

VI se.com
Customize MicroLogic X control unit anytime —
Digital modules make it easy to upgrade and
tailor your system.

• Upload additional digital modules • Update at any stage of the life cycle
for advanced functions: system protection,
(configuration or operation)
measurement, maintenance and diagnostics.
• Digital modules can be ordered by contacting
• Enhance energy management, power
your Schneider Electric Services representative or
quality management, and power
Schneider Electric Customer Care Center
outage management
• Upload modules without interrupting power, using
EcoStruxure Power Commission software and a
USB cable

Digital modules
• Protection: Energy Reduction Maintenance MICROLOGIC

Settings, Ground-fault alarm, IDMT Ground Home

Quickview

Fault Protection, Under/Over voltage protection,

Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

Under/Over frequency protection, Reverse active

OK

power protection, IDTML overcurrent protection,

Directional overcurrent protection
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

• Measurement: Energy per phase, 7.0 X

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

Individual harmonics analysis DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A
Maintenance
• Maintenance & Diagnostics: Power restoration Protection Measurement
& diagnostics
assistant, MasterPacT operation assistant, Wave
form capture on trip event, Modbus legacy
dataset, IEC 61850 for MasterPacT MTZ

Customize your MicroLogic 24/7 with optional

digital modules

Life Is On | Schneider Electric VII

Streamline configuration and commissioning.
Retrofit seamlessly Configure quickly Commission easily
• Updating from MasterPacT • Designing your • Ecoreach
EcoStruxure software
Power
NT/NW breakers is easy MasterPacT MTZ breaker reduces commissioning
Commission software
and cost-efficient to fit your needs is simple time and commissioning
reduces simplifies
maintenance:
time and simplifies
• MasterPacT MTZ circuit • MyPact
Product software
Selector makes
online
maintenance:
breakers have the same configuration
tool makes configuration
and ordering • Set up and test
electrical performance, quickordering
and and convenient
quick and • Set
switchboards
up and test
breaking capacity, convenient equipped with smart
switchboards
thermal properties, power devices with smart
equipped
connection in the same devices
• Install digital modules
frame size
• Install digital modules
• Speed up FAT and
• No recertification
• Speed
SAT delivery
up FAT and
is required
SAT delivery
• Improve preventive
• Improve
maintenance
preventive
with
alerts and easy
maintenance with
accessand
alerts to data
easy
access to data

Installation and updates are

seamless, quick, and easy.

VIII se.com
Simplify your switchboard operation — MasterPacT
MTZ circuit breakers are adaptable to different
systems because of their digital capabilities.
• Integrate seamlessly with • Embedded Ethernet connection • Fully customizable MicroLogic
EcoStruxure Power architectures (EIFE module) with drawout cradle X control units for all types
(chassis) status management and of protection
• Monitor and control remotely
embedded web pages
using any supervision system
• Breaker data displays locally
on switchboard and remotely
on EcoStruxure Power
supervision systems

EcoStruxure Power
software and services
• EcoStruxure Energy Hub
• EcoStruxure Power Monitoring Expert
• Power SCADA Operation
• Building Operation

Life Is On | Schneider Electric IX

 EcoStruxure
MasterPacT MTZ X circuit breakers are part of the Active Panel solution made
possible by Schneider Electric’s EcoStruxure Power architecture.

By connecting cutting-edge hardware with innovative software, Active Panels provide

real-time information that enables users to pinpoint overloads and inefficiencies, make
informed decisions to improve operational efficiency, and keep track of a building’s
electrical system status.

MasterPacT MTZ X circuit breakers combine with Active Panels to allow:

• Connection to EcoStruxure software to • Asset life-cycle management and
unlock electrical system potential condition-based maintenance via
equipment monitoring
• Remote monitoring and control with any
supervision system to carry out predictive • Asset and alarm management
and preventive maintenance
• Energy efficiency and power
• Remote notifications and maintenance quality management
planning
• Compliance with the latest regulations
• Proactive facility management with Power for energy-efficient buildings
Monitoring Expert, Power Operation and
Building Operation software

EcoStruxure™ Architecture

Apps,
Services
Analytics &
Services
End-to-end Cybersecurity

Cloud and/or On Premise

EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure

Energy Hub Asset Advisor Power Advisor Resource Advisor Microgrid Advisor Service Plan

Edge
Control
EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure
Panel Server Power Monitoring Expert Power Operation Microgrid Operation Power Automation System

Acti9 Series PacTSeries PowerLogic SeTSeries Galaxy ASCO

Connected
Products
Final level of protection World Class Breakers Power Quality, Uptime Comprehensive, robust portfolio of power Uninterruptable 3-Phase Power for IT Automatic Transfer Switch
in electrical distribution & Switches & Efficiency distribution and motor control centers and Industrial applications

X se.com
A new digital
user experience
With the MasterPacT MTZ active circuit breaker, every stage of the project - from
designing and configuring to operating and maintaining - is streamlined using its
digital capabilities.
DESIGN
EcoStruxture Power EcoStruxture Design with 3 rd

Design Software Power Party Software

Single-line diagram design Build Software Completely integrated
software that calculates Quick configuration with thrid party design
and sizes your electrical and quotation tool software to enhance
installation. for switchboards. your work effieciency.

CONFIGURE AND ORDER

Product Selector
Configure MasterPacT MTZ
to save time and ensure
accuracy

BUILD AND COMMISSION

EcoStruxure Power
Commision software
Commission and upgrade
easily with protection setting
and factory-acceptance
test.

OPERATE AND MAINTAIN

Monitor with EcoStruxture Energy Operate with

Hub Software your
smartphone
Locally in the
Operate with MicroLogic X facility room
control unit EcoStruxture
Power Device
Locally in the facility room App

EcoStruxture Power Status “at a glance” Android iOS

Monitoring Software
Power Monitoring Expert
Power Operation Remote, continuous
Building Operation notifications
Facility Advisor Track facility data, receive alerts
in case of power events and
se.com schedule maintenance.

se.com

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XI

Keep your electrical system online even in harsh
environments — MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers
give you proven reliability by going beyond standards.
Built to endure:
• Voltage fluctuations • Vibrations and mechanical shocks
• Electromagnetic disturbances • Corrosive and chemical atmospheres
• Severe temperatures

XII se.com
Contribute to a better world — with MasterPacT MTZ
circuit breakers you can enhance sustainability.
Build superior sustainable and efficient properties by reducing CO2 emissions, utility and operating costs as
well as improving the well-being of property occupants for both new construction and renovation projects.

Achieve Green Building

certification with MasterPacT
MTZ:
In compliance with ISO 14025 PEP Ecopassport
program, Schneider Electric publishes a
comprehensive Life Cycle Analysis of our product,
providing the environmental data you need to
achieve Green Building certifications.

For example, MasterPacT MTZ contributes to 4

LEED points:
TM

• Building Product Disclosure and Optimization

• Advanced Energy Metering

Circular Resource Well-being

performance performance performance
With the addition of digital modules, the circuit breaker can be
upgraded and modernized at any time after installation without
disrupting electrical service.

Better durability with improved mechanical and electrical

performance along with remote monitoring to help facilitate
predictive maintenance.

The embedded class 1 metering allows active power and

Experience the energy to be monitored, helping facility managers reduce
difference today at their CO2 emissions and energy costs when connected to any
schneider-electric. building and energy management system.
com/green-premium
MasterPacT MTZ is fully RoHS and REACH compliant.
Life Is On | Schneider Electric XIII
 Innovation
at every level
Whether you’re a panel builder,
OEM, contractor, or facility manager,
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers offer the
innovative features you need to streamline
system design, construction, and operation.

I design Win more projects

Digital modules give you the ability to add functions
based on one standard MicroLogic X control unit,
helping to reduce your initial investment in a project
and making MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers
scalable to future needs.

Design durable and

compliant systems
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers are compliant
with electrical distribution and energy efficiency
standards and regulations. Plus, they are tested
and proven to withstand harsh conditions.

Create smart, flexible systems

MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers integrate
seamlessly with EcoStruxure Power architectures.
The embedded Ethernet connection and a Class 1
power meter help to increase energy efficiency by
providing comprehensive data on any building or
power management system.

XIV se.com
I build Install and retrofit easily
The transition from MasterPacT NT/NW to
MasterPacT MTZ air circuit breakers merges
installation ready design with future ready
evolutions in smart connectivity, remote
monitoring and easy customization. It doesn’t
require switchboard modification or IEC
61439-1 and -2 recertification.

Commission quickly
With EcoStruxure Power Commission
software, you can integrate smart devices,
commission connected switchboards, and
generate comprehensive reports as part of
factory and site acceptance tests.

Provide better service

Our partner programs offer tools, software,
support, and loyalty awards to help you grow
your business and meet your customers’
needs with high-quality pre- and
post-sale services.

I operate Improve customer loyalty

MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers allow you
to provide commissioning and maintenance
reports to demonstrate your reliability and
value to your customers or employer.

Make maintenance easier

MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers send alerts
to your smartphone, helping you to diagnose
problems quickly and avoid downtime.
In case of a power outage, the Power
Restoration Assistant digital module guides
you to the root cause and helps you restore
power quickly.

Increase safety
Because MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers
can be operated remotely via Bluetooth,
operations can occur outside of the arc flash
zone. Plus, NFC allows access to stored
breaker data even when the power is off.

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XV

XVI se.com
Offer more services and
get experienced support

With smart connectivity, MasterPacT MTZ circuit

breakers give you the ability to offer better
service and insights. And our Services team is
always ready with experienced support when
you need it.

Digital Services Services

Data analysis and reporting assists you with We’re here to help with new projects,
network and cost management. Remote monitoring retrofitting, maintenance, spare parts kits,
helps to increase operational efficiency and uptime. and trainings. Manage your MasterPacT MTZ
Plus, when combined with EcoStruxure Power circuit breaker throughout its entire life cycle
architectures, MasterPacT MTZ air circuit breakers with Schneider Electric Services.
can generate remote data collection, enabling:
Our professional engineers and qualified
services representatives are committed
• Facility management with EcoStruxure Energy to providing you with innovative solutions,
Hub advanced customer service, and
technical support.
• Permanent equipment monitoring
• Asset and alarm management
• Energy efficiency and power quality management

Get peace of mind

MasterPacT MTZ associated services are

available when purchasing your circuit
breaker, such as assistance in commissioning
and start-up, warranty extension, and an
e-learning program.

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XVII

 The MasterPacT MTZ
range covers your
protection needs.

Five performance levels

N1 | H1 | H2 | H3 | L1

Icu (kA rms) at 415 V AC

kA rms
Type H2 – 150
kA rms
Type H1 – 100

MTZ3
kA rms
Type L1 – 150 kA rms
Type H3 – 150

= 100 kA 1s
0 kA rms, Icw
Type H2V - 10
85 kA 1s
kA rms, Icw =
MTZ2 Type H2 - 100
kA rms
Type H1 – 66
kA rms
Type N1 – 42

kA rms
Type L1 – 150
kA rms
Type H3 – 66
MTZ1 kA rms
Type H2 – 50 In (A)
5000 6300
kA rms 4000
Type H1 – 42 2500 3200
1600 2000
1000 1250
630 800

XVIII se.com
With MasterPacT MTZ air circuit breakers, you’re ready for all the ways
power distribution is changing. Smart connectivity gives you real-time
data to help avoid downtime. Digital modules allow you to customize the
circuit breaker to your specific needs. And proven durability gives you
the assurance that you’re placing your power distribution on a reliable
foundation.
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers are available in three sizes:

MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3

From 630 to 1600 A From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A

Digital modules to
customize MicroLogic X
control units
2.0 X (LI) | 5.0 X (LSI) | 6.0 X (LSIG) | 7.0 X (LSIV)
Downloadable digital modules provide enhanced:
• Protection: Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings,
Ground-fault alarm, IDMT Ground Fault Protection,
Under/Over voltage protection, Under/Over frequency
protection, Reverse active power protection, IDTML
overcurrent protection, Directional overcurrent protection
• Measurement: Energy per phase, Individual harmonics
analysis
• Maintenance & Diagnostics: Power restoration assistant,
MasterPacT operation assistant, Wave form capture
on trip event, Modbus legacy dataset, IEC 61850 for
MasterPacT MTZ
Life Is On | Schneider Electric XIX
 Same technology, same offer, simpler names
We’re making it easier for you to navigate across the wide range of our world-class digital offerings
and select with confidence the offers that are right for you and your needs.

EcoStruxure Architecture
To enable brand consistency, relevance and impact, we are reinforcing our EcoStruxure architecture
TM

and digital customer lifecycle tools to ensure a seamless experience from the CAPEX to OPEX phases
of each project, bridging our entire ecosystem of partners, services providers and end users.

EcoStruxure is our IoT-enabled open and interoperable system architecture and platform. EcoStruxure
delivers enhanced values around safety, reliability, efficiency, sustainability and connectivity for our
customers. EcoStruxure leverages advancements in IoT, mobility, sensing, cloud, analytics, and
cybersecurity technologies to deliver Innovation At Every Level from Connected Products; Edge
Control; and Apps, Analytics & Services: our IoT technology Levels.

Old names New names

Ecodial EcoStruxure Power Design
Ecoreal EcoStruxure Power Build
Ecoreach EcoStruxure Power Commission
Masterpact MTZ mobile App Ecostruxure Power Device App

MasterPacT MTZ and the Pact Series

Future-proof your installation with Schneider Electric’s low and medium voltage PacT Series. Built
on legendary Schneider Electric innovation, the PacT Series comprises world-class circuit breakers,
switches, residual current devices and fuses, for all standard and specific applications. Experience
robust performance with this comprehensive range of EcoStruxure-ready switchgear, for all
applications from 16 to 6300A in low-voltage and up to 40.5 kV in medium-voltage.

Building on the strengths of the PacT Series, MasterPacT MTZ is the next generation of high power low
voltage circuit breakers, designed to protect electrical systems from damage caused by overloads,
short circuits and equipment ground faults. MasterPacT MTZ embeds advanced digital technologies
and MicroLogic X control units helping to contribute to safety and energy efficiency, and keeping you
future-ready.

Old names New names

Compact ComPacT
Masterpact MasterPacT
Micrologic MicroLogic
Transferpact TransferPacT
Fupact FuPacT

XX se.com
General contents
MasterPacT™ MTZ

Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

Characteristics and performances A

Select your MicroLogic X control unit

Overview of functions B

Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules

Overview of digital modules C

Customize your circuit breaker with accessories

Overview, Installation simplification, Signalling, Controlling, Interlocking, Circuit protection, D
Operation protection, Mechanical protection, Power availability and reliability

Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems

Architecture overview, Components, Customer engineering tool E

Integrate in switchboard
Operating conditions, Installation rules, Temperature derating, Busbar sizing, F
Derating in switchboards, Dimensions, Electrical diagrams

Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems

G

Services
Services Overview, Associated Services, Life Cycle Services, Digital Services H

Order your circuit breaker

Catalog numbers, Spare parts & Product selector I

1
 www.se.com

2
www.se.com

Select your Circuit Breakers

and Switch-disconnectors

Selection guide A
Circuit breakers................................................................................. A-2
Switch-disconnectors....................................................................... A-4

Characteristics and performance

Circuit breakers................................................................................. A-6
Switch-disconnectors....................................................................... A-8

Utilisation category............................................................... A-10

Other chapters
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

A-1
 Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors www.se.com

Selection guide
Circuit breakers

A Selection criteria
Safety of operation
MasterPacT MTZ front face provides reinforced

PB115935_50.eps
insulation (Class 2) according to IEC 60664-1.
It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control
from outside.

MasterPacT MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Type H1 H2 H3 [8] L1
Rated current (A) at 40/50 °C [1]
MTZ1 06 630 630 630 630
MTZ1 08 800 800 800 800
MTZ1 10 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ1 12 1250 1250 1250
MTZ1 16 1600 1600 1600

Selectivity category [2] B B B A

Ultimate breaking capacity Icu at 440 V 42 50 66 130
V AC 50/60 Hz (kA rms)
at 1150 V - - - -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics at 440 V 42 50 50 130
(kA rms) at 1150 V - - - -
Rated short-time withstand Icw 0.5 s 42 42 50 10
current V AC 50/60 Hz (kA rms) 1 s 42 42 50 -
3s 24 24 30 -
Compliant with IEC /EN 60947-2 Annex H Yes Yes Yes Yes
Position of neutral (Left: L, Right: R) L L L L
Type of control unit: MicroLogic X

Installation characteristics
Type H1 H2 H3 L1
Connection
Drawout, front
Drawout, rear
Fixed, front
Fixed, rear
Dimensions (mm) H x W x D
Drawout 3P 322 x 288 x 291
Drawout 4P 322 x 358 x 291
Fixed 3P 301 x 276 x 209
Fixed 4P 301 x 346 x 209
Weight (kg) approximate
Drawout 3P/4P 30/39
Fixed 3P/4P 14/18
[1] 5
 0 °C for rear vertical connected only, refer to temperature derating [6] MTZ2-H10 dedicated to 1150 V systems.
tables for other connection types. [7] For MasterPacT MTZ2-H10 circuit breaker the MicroLogic X control
[2] For details on selectivity category A and B, see page A-10. unit cannot be directly connected to the internal voltage pick-up on the
[3] No front connection for 4000 A. downstream terminal. The external voltage pick-up option PTE associated
[4] No horizontal rear connection for 6300 A. with external voltage transformer shall be used (See page B-28).
[5] To be specified when ordering. [8] For MasterPacT MTZ1 H3 and MTZ2 H2V the rated operational voltage is
limited to 440 V AC - 50/60 Hz.
A-2
www.se.com
Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors
Selection guide
Circuit breakers

PB115951_80.eps
PB115943_85.eps

MasterPacT MTZ2 MasterPacT MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A
Type N1 H1 H2 H2V [8] H3 L1 H10 [6] Type H1 H2

MTZ2 08 800 800 800 800 800 800

MTZ2 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ2 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
MTZ2 16 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
MTZ2 20 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
MTZ2 25 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
MTZ2 32 3200 3200 3200 3200 3200
MTZ2 40 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 MTZ3 40 4000 4000
MTZ3 50 5000 5000
MTZ3 63 6300 6300
B B B B B B B B B
42 66 100 100 150 150 - 100 150
- - - - - - 50 - -
42 66 100 100 150 150 - 100 150
- - - - - - 50 - -
42 66 66 85 85 100 65 30 50 100 100
42 66 66 85 85 100 65 30 50 100 100
22 36 66 50 75 75 65 30 50 100 100
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
[5] [5] [5] [5] [5]
L L or R L or R L or R L L L L or R L or R
[7]

N1 H1 H2 H2V H3 L1 H10 H1 H2

[3] [3] [3] [3]

[4] [4]

[3] [3] [3]

[4] [4]

439 x 441 x 403 479 x 786 x 403

439 x 556 x 403 479 x 1016 x 403
352 x 422 x 300 352 x 767 x 300
352 x 537 x 300 352 x 997 x 300

90/120 225/300
50/65 120/160

A-3
 Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors www.se.com

Selection guide
Switch-disconnectors

A Selection criteria
Safety of operation
MasterPacT MTZ front face provides reinforced insulation (Class 2)

PB115672.eps
according to IEC 60664-1.
It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control from outside.

MasterPacT MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Type Type HA
Rated current (A) at 40/50 °C [1] MTZ1 06 630
MTZ1 08 800
MTZ1 10 1000
MTZ1 12 1250
MTZ1 16 1600

Switch-disconnector (as per IEC/EN 60947-3)

Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) at 440 V 75
at 690 V 75
at 1150 V -
Rated short-time withstand current V AC 50/60 Hz Icw (kA rms) 1 s 36
Utilisation category [2] AC-23A
Unprotected circuit breaker (tripping by shunt trip as per IEC/EN 60947-2)
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 400 ms [2]
Ultimate breaking capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icu (kA rms) at 440 V -
at 690 V -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu -
Rated short-time withstand current V AC 50/60 Hz Icw (kA rms) 1 s -
3s -
Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) at 440 V
at 690 V
Position of neutral (Left: L, Right: R) L or R

Installation characteristics
Type HA
Connection
Drawout, front
Drawout, rear
Fixed, front
Fixed, rear
Dimensions (mm) H x W x D
Drawout 3P 322 x 288 x 291
Drawout 4P 322 x 358 x 291
Fixed 3P 301 x 276 x 209
Fixed 4P 301 x 346 x 209
Weight (kg) approximate
Drawout 3P/4P 30/39
Fixed 3P/4P 14/18
[1] 5
 0 °C for rear vertical connected only, refer to temperature derating tables [3] No front connection for 4000 A.
for other connection types. [4] No horizontal rear connection for 6300 A.
[2] F
 or details on unprotected circuit breaker and utilisation category AC-23A, [5] MTZ2 HA10 dedicated to 1150 V systems.
see page A-10. [6] F
 or MaterPact MTZ2 HH the rated operational voltage is
limited to 440 V AC - 50/60 Hz.

A-4
www.se.com
Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors
Selection guide
Switch-disconnectors

PB115674.eps
PB115673.eps

MasterPacT MTZ2 MasterPacT MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A
Type NA HA HF HH [6] HA10 [5] Type HA

MTZ2 08 800 800 800 800

MTZ2 10 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ2 12 1250 1250 1250 1250
MTZ2 16 1600 1600 1600 1600
MTZ2 20 2000 2000 2000 2000
MTZ2 25 2500 2500 2500 2500
MTZ2 32 3200 3200 3200 3200
MTZ2 40 4000 4000 4000 4000 MTZ3 40 4000
MTZ3 50 5000
MTZ3 63 6300

88 145 187 220 -

88 145 187 - - 187
- - - - 105 -
42 66 85 100 50 85
AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A

- 66 85 100 - 85
- 66 85 - - 85
- 100 % 100 % 100 % - 100 %
- 66 85 100 - 85
- 36 75 75 - 85
- 145 187 220 - 187
- 145 187 - - 187
L or R L or R L or R L or R L or R L

NA HA HF HH HA10 HA

[3] [3] [3]

[4]

[3] [3] [3]

[4]

439 x 441 x 403 479 x 786 x 403

439 x 556 x 403 479 x 1016 x 403
352 x 422 x 300 352 x 767 x 300
352 x 537 x 300 352 x 997 x 300

90/120 225/300
50/65 120/160

A-5
 Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors www.se.com

Characteristics and performance

Circuit breakers

A Common characteristics MTZ1 MTZ2 & MTZ3 MTZ2 H10 MTZ2 H2V
Number of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1250 1000
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC 50/60 Hz) 690 [7] 690 1150 440
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-2
Degree of pollution IEC/EN 60947-1 3 3 3 3

Characteristics
MasterPacT MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A

Circuit breaker as per IEC/EN 60947-2

MasterPacT 06 08 10 12 16
Rated current at 40/50 °C [1] In (A) 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Sensor ratings (A) 400 400 400 630 800
to 630 to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600
MasterPacT 06 to 10 12 to 16
Type H1 H2 H3 [7] L1 [2] H1 H2 H3 [7]
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) 220/415 V 42 50 66 150 42 50 66
V AC 50/60 Hz 440 V 42 50 66 130 42 50 66
500/525 V 42 42 - 100 42 42 -
660/690 V 42 42 - - 42 42 -
1150 V - - - - - - -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu 100 100 75 [4] 100 100 100 75 [4]
Selectivity category [3] B B B A B B B
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 0.5 s 42 42 50 10 42 42 50
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s 42 42 50 - 42 42 50
3s 24 24 30 - 24 24 30
Rated making capacity Icm (kÂ) 220/415 V 88 105 145 330 88 105 145
V AC 50/60 Hz 440 V 88 105 145 286 88 105 145
500/525 V 88 88 - 220 88 88 -
660/690 V 88 88 - 52 88 88 -
1150 V - - - - - - -
Integrated instantaneous protection (DIN kA instantaneous ±10 %) [3] - 90 110 10 x In - 90 105
Break time between tripping order and arc extinction (ms) 25 25 25 9 25 25 25
Closing time (ms) < 50 < 50

Durability as per IEC/EN 60947-2/3

Mechanical durability [6] MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
Mechanical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 with periodic preventive 12.5 12.5 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 10
maintenance
Electrical durability [6] at rated current In MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
630 to 1000 A 1250 to 1600 A
Type of MasterPacT H1 H2 H3 [7] L1 H1 H2 H3 [7]
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6 3 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-2 690 V 3 3 - 2 3 3 -
1150 V - - - - - -
Electrical durability [6] at rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 12 MTZ1 16
Ie in AC-23A [3] 630 to 1250 A 1600 A
Type of MasterPacT H1 H2 H3 [7] H1 H2 H3 [7]
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 690 V 3 3 - 3 3 -
1150 V - - - - - -
Electrical durability [6] at rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 10
Ie in AC-3 [3] 500 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A
Type of MasterPacT H1/H2/H3
Motor power (kW) 380/415 V y 250 250 to 335 335 to 450 450 to 560
440 V y 300 300 to 400 400 to 500 500 to 630
690 V - - - -
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 690 V -
[1] 5
 0 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for [2] See the current-limiting curves in the [4] Ics: 50 kA for 415-440 V.
other connection types. “additional characteristics” section. [5] MTZ2 H10 dedicated to 1150 V
[3] F
 or details on selectivity category A, B, systems.
A-6 AC-3, AC-23A, DIN-DINF,
see page A-10.
www.se.com
Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors
Characteristics and performance
Circuit breakers

Sensor selection A
Sensor rating In (A) 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
Ir threshold 160 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
setting(A) to 400 to 630 to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300

MasterPacT MTZ2 MasterPacT

From 800 to 4000 A
MTZ3
From 4000 to 6300 A

08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
400 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200
to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300
08 to 16 20 25 to 40 40 to 63
N1 H1 H2 H2V [7] L1 [2] H10 [5] N1 H1 H2 H2V [7] H3 L1 [2] H10 [5] H1 H2 H2V [7] H3 H10 [5] H1 H2
42 66 100 100 150 - 42 66 100 100 150 150 - 66 100 100 150 - 100 150
42 66 100 100 150 - 42 66 100 100 150 150 - 66 100 100 150 - 100 150
42 66 85 - 130 - 42 66 85 - 130 130 - 66 85 - 130 - 100 130
42 66 85 - 100 - 42 66 85 - 100 100 - 66 85 - 100 - 100 100
- - - - - 50 - - - - - - 50 - - - - 50 - -
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
42 66 85 100 30 50 42 66 85 100 65 30 50 66 85 100 65 50 100 100
42 66 85 100 30 50 42 66 85 100 65 30 50 66 85 100 65 50 100 100
22 36 50 75 30 50 22 36 75 75 65 30 50 66 75 75 65 50 100 100
88 145 220 220 330 - 88 145 220 220 330 330 - 145 220 220 330 - 220 330
88 145 220 220 330 - 88 145 220 220 330 330 - 145 220 220 330 - 220 330
88 145 187 - 286 - 88 145 187 - 286 286 - 145 187 - 286 - 220 286
88 145 187 - 220 - 88 145 187 - 220 220 - 145 187 - 220 - 220 220
- - - - - 105 - - - - - - 105 - - - - 105 - -
- - 190 - 80 - - - 190 - 150 80 - - 190 - 150 - - 270
25 25 25 25 10 25 25 25 25 25 25 10 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
< 70 < 70 < 70 < 80

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

25 (15 for H2V) 20 (15 for H2V) 20 (15 for H2V) 10

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
N1/H1/H2 H2V[7] L1 H10 N1/H1/H2 H2V[7] H3 L1 H10 H1/H2 H2V H3 H10 H1 H2
10 10 3 - 8 8 2 3 - 5 5 1.25 - 1.5 1.5
10 - 3 - 6 - 2 3 - 2.5 - 1.25 - 1.5 1.5
- - - 0.5 - - - - 0.5 - - - 0.5 - -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63
800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
H1/H2 H2V[7] H10 H1/H2/H3 H2V[7] H10 H1/H2/H3 H2V H10 H1 H2
10 10 - 8 8 - 5 5 - 1.5 1.5
10 - - 6 - - 2.5 - - 1.5 1.5
- - 0.5 - - 0.5 - - 0.5 - -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20
800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A
H1/H2/H2V[7] H1/H2/H3 H2V[7]
335 to 450 450 to 560 560 to 670 670 to 900 900 to 1150 - -
400 to 500 500 to 630 500 to 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1300 - -
y 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1250 1250 to 1600 1600 to 2000 - -
6 6 6 - -
6 for H1/H2 (not available for H2V) 6 - - -
[6] The term "durability" is used to express the expectancy of the number of the operating
cycles which can be performed by the device.
[7] F or MTZ1 H3 and MTZ2 H2V the rated operational voltage Ue is limited to 440 V AC -
50/60 Hz.
A-7
 Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors www.se.com

Characteristics and performance

Switch-disconnectors

A Common characteristics MTZ1 MTZ2 & MTZ3 MTZ2 HA10 MTZ2 HH

Number of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1250 1000
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC 50/60 Hz) 690 690 1150 440
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-3
Degree of pollution IEC/EN 60947-1 3 3 3 3

Characteristics
MasterPacT MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A

Switch-disconnector as per IEC/EN 60947-3

MasterPacT 06 08 10 12 16
Rated current at 40/50 °C [1] In (A) 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Type of MasterPacT HA HA
Rated making capacity Icm (kÂ) 440 V 75 75
AC-23A/AC-3 category V AC 50/60 Hz 690 V - -
1150 V - -
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 0.5 s 36
AC-23A/AC-3 category V AC 50/60 Hz 1s 36
3s 20
Unprotected circuit breaker - Tripping by shunt trip as per IEC/EN 60947-2
Type of MasterPacT
Ultimate breaking capacity AC 50/60 Hz Icu (kA rms) 440 V -
690 V -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 1 s -
3s -
Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) 440 V -
690 V -
Overload and short-circuit protection -
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 400 ms [2]

Durability as per IEC/EN 60947-2/3

Mechanical durability [4] MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
Mechanical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 with periodic preventive 12.5 12.5
maintenance
Electrical durability [4] at Rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 12 MTZ1 16
Ie in AC-23A [3] 630 to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A
Type of MasterPacT HA
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 690 V 3 3 3
1150 V - - -
Electrical durability [4] at Rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 10
Ie in AC-3 [3] 500 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A
Type of MasterPacT HA
Motor power (kW) 380/415 V y 250 250 to 335 335 to 450 450 to 560
440 V y 300 300 to 400 400 to 500 500 to 630
690 V - - - -
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 Annex A and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 690 V -
[1] 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types.
[2] External
 protection must comply with permissible thermal constraints of the circuit breaker (please consult us).
No fault-trip indication by the SDE or the reset button.
[3] For details on utilisation category AC-3 and AC-23A, see page A-10.
[4] The term "durability" is used to express the expectancy of the number of the operating cycles which can be performed by the device.
[5] MTZ2 HA10 dedicated to 1150 V systems.
[6] For MasterPacT MTZ2 HH the rated operational voltage is limited to 440 V AC - 50/60 Hz.
[7] MTZ2-HH available only from 2000 A (MTZ2 20).

A-8
www.se.com
Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors
Characteristics and performance
Switch-disconnectors

MasterPacT MTZ2 MasterPacT

From 800 to 4000 A
MTZ3
From 4000 to 6300 A

08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
NA HA HF HH [6] [7] HA10[5] HA HF HH[6] HA10[5] HA
88 145 187 220 - 145 187 220 - 187
88 154 187 - - 145 187 - - 187
- - - - 105 - - - 105 -
-
42 66 85 100 50 66 85 100 50 85
- 36 75 75 50 55 75 75 50 85

HA HF HH [6] [7] HA10 HA HF HH[6] HA10 HA

66 85 100 - 66 85 100 - 85
66 85 - - 66 85 - - 85
100 % 100 % 100 % - 100 % 100 % 100 % - 100 %
66 85 100 - 66 85 100 - 85
36 75 75 - 55 75 75 - 85
145 187 220 - 145 187 220 - 187
145 187 - - 145 187 - - 187
- - - - - - - - -

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

25 20 (15 for HH) 20 (15 for HH) 10

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
NA HA HF HA10 HA HF HH[6] HA10 HA HF HH[6] HA10 HA
10 10 10 - 8 8 8 - 5 5 5 - 1.5
10 10 10 - 6 8 - - 2.5 5 - - 1.5
- - - 0.5 - - - 0.5 - - - 0.5 -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20
800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A
NA/HA/HF HA/HF HH [6]
335 to 450 450 to 560 560 to 670 670 to 900 900 to 1150 - -
400 to 500 500 to 630 500 to 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1300 - -
y 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1250 1250 to 1600 1600 to 2000 - -
6 6 6 - -
6 6 - - -

A-9
 Select your Circuit Breakers and Switch-disconnectors www.se.com

Utilisation category

A
Selectivity category A and B (IEC/EN 60947-2)
The Selectivity category is defined by the IEC/EN 60947-2 : 2013 standard:
b Selectivity category A:
Circuit breakers not specifically intended for selectivity under short-circuit conditions with
respect to other short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side, i.e. without an
intentional short-circuit delay provided for selectivity under short-circuit conditions, and
therefore without a short-circuit withstand current rating according to 4.3.5.4.
b Selectivity category B:
Circuit breakers specifically intended for selectivity under short-circuit conditions with
respect to other short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side, i.e. with an
intentional short-circuit delay (which may be adjustable), provided for selectivity under
short-circuit conditions. Such circuit breakers have a short-circuit withstand current rating
according to 4.3.5.4.
The selectivity between MasterPacT MTZ category B circuit breakers is certified up to the
rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
When Icu > Icw, the circuit breakers integrate an instantaneous override protection (DIN)
which operates above Icw.
On top of the selectivity category, the selectivity performance between 2 circuit breakers
depends on the MicroLogic X control units type and on their settings. Please refer to the
selectivity tables in the Complementary Technical Guide or to the Schneider Electric
calculation tools.

DIN-DINF
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers integrate two types of instantaneous short-circuit
protection :
1: A “DIN” (Instantaneous override protection) active when the circuit breaker is closed.
The DIN is activated above Icw. It operates on the instantaneous value of the current.
2: A “DINF”(Instantaneous making over-current voltage release) intended to
instantaneously trip the circuit breaker in case of closing on a short-circuit current higher
than its threshold. The DINF operates on the instantaneous value of the current. The
DINF is disabled around 50 ms after the circuit breaker closing.

Unprotected circuit breaker

Circuit breaker without integrated protection control unit. The protection is ensured by
an external protection relay which trips the circuit breaker MX or MN voltage release.
The rated short-time withstand current (Icw) of the circuit breaker shall be higher than
the maximum expected short-circuit current on the protected circuit.

Utilisation category AC-23A

Defined in standard for Switches (IEC/EN 60947-3); applies to devices specifically
intended for the switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads.
Utilization categories with suffix A (e.g. "AC-23A") designate devices which are intended
for frequent operation. The corresponding number of operating cycles with the associated
operational currents are specified in Table 4 of IEC/EN 60947-3.

Utilisation category AC-3

Defined in standard for Contactors and motor starters (IEC/EN 60947-4-1) and for
switches-disconnectors (IEC/EN 60947-3 Annex A); applies to devices specifically
intended for the switching of asynchronous squirrel-cage motors.

A-10
www.se.com

Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit

Overview of functions.............................................................B-2
Protections
Functions of protections................................................................... B-8
Tripping curves............................................................................... B-12
Limitation curves............................................................................. B-13 B
Measurement.......................................................................... B-14
Maintenance & diagnostics............................................... B-22
Event Management .............................................................. B-26
Power supply.......................................................................... B-28

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

B-1
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Overview of functions

Measurement Maintenance
Energy management is & Diagnostics
the challenge of present
Optimal continuity of
& future generations.
services as well as
B To meet this requirement
MicroLogic X incorporates
extended life of equipment
is one of customers
all the measuring functions
main concerns. For that
of a power meter including
purpose MicroLogic X
Energy Class 1 accuracy
integrates new extended
third-party certified.
diagnosis and assistance
to maintenance.
- e.eps
PB116185_35Copi

Protection
Improvement of the
reliability of MicroLogic X,
dual settings and
additional facilities
increase the
performance and the
flexibility of low voltage
systems of protection.

15  Optional digital
modules dedicated
to upgrading MicroLogic X
Communication
p It is now common practice to
make available most of the
p Energy per phase p Energy Reduction information processed by a
p Undervoltage and Maintenance Settings
Protection Control Unit, locally
overvoltage p Individual harmonics for network operation and
p Underfrequency and analysis
maintenance, as well as remotely
overfrequency p Power restoration for higher functions of control,
p Reverse active power assistant
monitoring, energy efficiency and
p IDMTL overcurrent p MasterPacT operation assets management.
protection assistant
p Waveform capture on p To comply with this requirement,
p Directional
overcurrent trip event MicroLogic X control units
p IEC 61850 for incorporate several channels
p Ground-fault alarm
MasterPacT MTZ of communication, including
p IDMT Ground fault
p Modbus legacy Ethernet, Modbus SL and
protection
dataset wireless communication
facilities.

B-2
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Overview of functions

> Protection for ...

> Additional features
... MicroLogic 2.0 X of protections (page B-8)

PB116185_35.eps
Along with the LSIGV protections, new additional
DB419726.ai

features and facilities allow to improve the

LI: Long-time
+ Instantaneous protection performance of a system when B
difficulties are met such as low values of the
short-circuit current or the need to limit the
thermal constraints to the equipment: dual
settings, fine settings, zone selective interlock,
tripping mode (Standard/Fast).

> Measurement (page B-14)

MicroLogic X measures all electrical parameters
... MicroLogic 5.0 X of an electrical network: currents, voltages,
PB116185_35.eps

LSI: L
 ong-time frequency, power, energy, power factor, current
DB419727.ai

+ Short-time and power demand.

+ Instantaneous Min/Max and average values are calculated for
most of the parameters.
Optional digital modules allow the measurement
of energy per phase, and to perform Waveform
capture.

> Maintenance & Diagnostics

(page B-22)
... MicroLogic 6.0 X Diagnostic features are intended to limit the risk of
power interruptions and to re-energize the
LSIG: Long-time
installation as quickly as possible after a trip.
PB116185_35.eps

+ Short-time
They provide alarms and messages to help the
+ Instantaneous
user in scheduling both preventive and predictive
+ Earth fault
DB419727.ai

maintenance, and device replacement.

DB419728.ai

> Communication (page E-1)

New generation MicroLogic X control units
incorporate wireless technology (Bluetooth and
NFC) that allows the transfer of a wide selection
of critical information (protection, measurements,
Maintenance & diagnostics) to your mobile
device, by means of Ecostruxure Power Device
... MicroLogic 7.0 X App app. Alternatively, MasterPacT MTZ can be
PB116185_35.eps

equipped with ETHERNET communication

LSIV: Long-time through either the IFE module or the new
+ Short-time embedded EIFE that includes webpages.
+ Instantaneous Modbus SL communication is available through
+ Earth leakage the IFM interface module.
DB419727.ai

> Optional digital modules (chapter C)

Optional digital modules can be purchased
DB419729.ai

and downloaded to extend the performance of

MicroLogic X control units. They are dedicated
to Protection, Measurement, and Maintenance &
diagnostics, and are available through Go Digital
on the Schneider Electric website, open 24/7.

B-3
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Overview of functions

MasterPacT MTZ
> Makes power available and reliable in a range of
application and operating conditions.
B > Incorporates the lastest technology to enhance
both performance and safety.

B-4
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Overview of functions

As standard As options
PB116185_35.eps

on MasterPacT MTZ with digital modules mainly

with MicroLogic X through Ecostruxure Power
Device App
(and more coming soon)
B

p Undervoltage
and overvoltage
p LSIGV protection [1] p Underfrequency
+ Dual settings, ZSI, and overfrequency
Trip history, Settings p Reverse active power
Protection traceability p Ground fault alarm
and more pE  nergy Reduction
Maintenance Settings (ERMS)
[1] Depending on MicroLogic X
p IDTML overload protection
model.
p IDMT Ground Fault Protection
p Directional overcurrent

> See page B-8 > See page C-5 to C-12

p New full Power meter p Energy per Phase

Measurement embedded p Individual harmonics
IEC/EN 61557-12 certified Class 1
(Power & Energy) analysis

> See page B-14 > See page C-13 and C-14

p Power restoration assistant

pM  asterPacT operation
assistant
Maintenance p New MasterPacT MTZ pW  aveform capture
& diagnostics embedded diagnostics on trip event
pM  odbus legacy dataset
p IEC 61850 for
MasterPacT MTZ

> See page B-22 > See page C-15 to C-19

B-5
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Overview of functions

All MasterPacT circuit breakers are equipped with a MicroLogic X control unit which can be upgraded digital
modules.

B
A
The functions B
DB419567.ai

of protection... MICROLOGIC
C
...included in the control Home
All the information
unit are designed to Quickview
processed and stored by
comply with electrical D MicroLogic X control unit
Measures
installation rules is accessible by means
! Alarms & H...
providing overcurrent E
of ergonomic Human
Maintenan...
and short-circuit Machine Interfaces:
protection. OK F
b Embedded HMI with
MicroLogic 6.0 X provides G coloured backlight,
earth-fault protection.
b Smartphones via
MicroLogic 7.0 X H Bluetooth and NFC
provides earth-leakage
I communication,
protection. An embedded
Power meter complying J
b External PC through
with IEC/EN 61557-12 a USB connection.
K
offers the measurement Connection to Ethernet is
parameters required L achieved with dedicated
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.

to optimise energy Ii I n
interface modules: EIFE
M
management. and IFE.
The optional digital N
7.0 X Connection to
modules allow you to ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 O Modbus SL is achieved
upgrade the functions of with the IFM interface
Protection, Measurement P
module.
and Maintenance DISCONNECT BEFORE Q
& diagnostics. DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

U T S R

A Ready LED (Green) I Bluetooth LED P VPS voltage power supply module (optional)
B Service LED (Orange/red) J Bluetooth activation button Q VPS LED to indicate that the VPS
C ERMS LED (Blue) K  is energyzing the control unit
Test button for earth fault and earth leakage
D Graphic display screen protection (MicroLogic 6.0 X and 7.0 X) R QR code to product information
E Escape button ESC L 
Test/Reset button for trip cause LEDs and S Control unit identification number
alarms T Control unit type
F Three contextual buttons
M Mini-USB port under rubber cover U Sensor rating In (A)
G Home button
N Overload and trip cause LEDs (Please refer to page A-7)
H NFC wireless communication zone
O Cover for battery

Note: Certain functions of the MicroLogic X control unit require additional accessories and interface modules as described in the chapter D.

B-6
 www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Overview of functions

MicroLogic X ensures a high degree of reliability and immunity to conducted and radiated disturbances with its
enhanced internal architecture including a dedicated ASIC electronic component for the protection functions.
A high level of diagnostics allows to follow the health of the circuit breaker in real time.
With its embedded backlight HMI, MicroLogic X allows the quick identification of alarm messages.
The information processed by the MicroLogic X may be displayed on the embedded backlight HMI, a smartphone
through Bluetooth or NFC and a PC through the USB connection.
The connection to Ethernet is achieved with the EIFE and IFE interface modules.
B
The connection to Modbus SL is achieved with the IFM interface module.
A wide range of accessories allows to improve the functions of control and monitoring.

Menus Alarm
DB430618.ai

MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

Home
Home
Quickview
Quickview
Measures
Protection
! Measures
Alarms & H...
Alarms
Maintenan...
OK
OK

MICROLOGIC
Embedded
HMI

TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

Home 7.0 X 7.0 X

Quickview
ID: ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 1989421527520002LV847604

MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

Measures DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

! Alarms & H... In 1600 A In 1600 A

Maintenan...
OK

ERMS Alarm
Engaged
TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op. Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X

NFC ID:
1989421527520002LV847604
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A In 1600 A

Ethernet
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n
TRIP CAUSE

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

FDM128 Note: Maximum length of the cord between the PC

and the MicroLogic X USB port:
b 1 m with a 26/28 AWG cord
b 2 m with a 24 AWG cord.

Or EIFE Module
for drawout
circuit breaker

PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission

IFE Module

B-7
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Protections
Functions of protections

The MicroLogic X control unit is suitable for different systems of voltage, three or four wires up to 690 V AC, 50/60 Hz
and for all earthing systems as defined per IEC or North American standards (TNC, TNS, TT, IT, HRG).

MicroLogic 2.0 X
Long-time ANSI 49RMS/51
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Ir = 0.4 In to In, step 1 A
B
DB419088.eps

Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir

Time setting tr = 0.5 s to 24 s, step 0.5 s for 6 Ir
Time setting exemple: Accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.5 [1] 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.34 [2] 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory After tripping
Instantaneous ANSI 50
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Isd = 1.5 to 10 Ir, step 0.5 Ir [4]
Accuracy: ±10 %
Operating time (ms) Non tripping time: 20
Max breaking time: 80

MicroLogic 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Long-time ANSI 49RMS/51
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Ir = 0.4 In to In, step 1 A
DB419089.eps

Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir

Time setting tr = 0.5 s to 24 s, step 0.5 s for 6 Ir
Time setting exemple: Accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.5 [1] 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.34 [2] 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory After tripping
Short-time ANSI 50TD/51
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Isd = 1.5 Ir to 10 Ir, step 0.5 Ir [4]
Accuracy: ±10 %
Time setting tsd (s) Settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Operating time at 10 x Ir non tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
I2t Off or I2t On max breaking time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous ANSI 50
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … Ii = 2 In to 15 In, step 0.5 In [4] and OFF protection
Accuracy: ±10 %
Ii tripping mode Standard Fast
Operating time non tripping time (ms) 20 0
max breaking time (ms) 50 30

MicroLogic 6.0 X
Earth fault ANSI 50N-TD/51N
Pick-up (A) Ig = In x … Ig = 0.2 [3] In to In, step 0.1 In [4] and OFF protection
DB419090.eps

Accuracy: ±10 %
Time setting tg (s) Settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Operating time non tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
max breaking time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500

MicroLogic 7.0 X
Residual earth ANSI 50G-TD
leakage (Vigi)
Sensitivity (A) IΔn 0.5 A to 30 A, step 0.1 A
DB419091.eps

Accuracy complies with IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex B

Time delay Δt (ms) Settings 60 150 230 350 800
non tripping time (ms) 60 150 230 350 800
max breaking time (ms) 140 230 320 500 1000
[1] 0 to -40 % [4] F
 iner resolution settings are possible with EcoStruxure Power Commission
[2] 0 to -60 % software and Ecostruxure Power Device App app.
[3] 0.3 In to In for In y 400 A

B-8
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Protections
Functions of protections

The characteristics of the protection offers a full selectivity for the majority of the applications with all the types of
ComPact circuit breakers and between MasterPacT as well, even for a high level of short-circuit currents. Fine setting,
dual settings and zone selective interlocking allow to improve the performance of the low voltage protection systems.

Functions of protection b When I2t is ON, an inverse time characteristic is selected.

The following functions of protection are available, depending of The protection operates with an inverse time characteristic up
the type of MicroLogic X selected: Long-time overload protection,
Short-time short-circuit protection, Instantaneous short-circuit
to In and above with a definite time characteristic.
[1] for SGR option please consult us. B
protection, Earth fault protection, Earth leakage protection.
All these protections operate without auxiliary supply. Earth leakage protection (ANSI 50G-TD)
They are powered by the currents flowing throught the circuit Earth leakage or "Vigi" protection is based on true leakage
breaker. current measured by a rectangular sensor encompassing the 3
In MicroLogic 7.0 X the earth leakage protection is powered by phases or the 3 phases and the neutral. The protection operates
the system voltage via the voltage power supply module (VPS). with a definite time characteristic. It trips with the time delay Δt as
soon as the leakage current exceeds IΔn.
Long-time overload protection (ANSI 49RMS/51) The earth leakage protection complies with IEC/EN 60947-2
The long-time protection protects cables, busbars, and busbar Annex B.
trunkings against overload. It is based on the true RMS current.
It is implemented independently for each phase and the neutral. Neutral overload protection
This protection is an overcurrent time dependent protection with For a four-pole circuit breakers, the neutral protection may be set
thermal memory. It operates as a thermal image using the from the MicroLogic control unit to one of the 3 following options:
heating and cooling model of a conductor. b Neutral unprotected (4P 3d),
After tripping the protection continues to reproduce the cooling of b Neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2),
the conductors. b Neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Neutral protection greater than
The long-time protection can also be used for transformer or Ir, but lower than In, limited at 1.6 Ir phase.
generator protection thanks to the wide range of the proposed For a three-pole circuit breaker the protection of the neutral
settings. requires an additional external neutral CT (ENCT). A long-time
overcurrent characteristic is dedicated to the neutral protection.
Short-time short-circuit protection (ANSI 50TD/51)
The short-time protection protects the installation against Tripping voltage releases supervision (ANSI 74)
short-circuits for phase to phase, phase to neutral and phase to The MicroLogic X control unit continously checks the electrical
earth short-circuits with total selectivity. It is based on the true continuity of the circuit breaker tripping voltage release (MITOP).
RMS current. It includes two characteristics depending on the It generates an alarms in case of failure.
status of the I2t setting:
b When I2t is OFF, a definite time characteristic is selected. Lock-out function (ANSI 86)
The protection trips with the time delay tsd as soon as the Any operation of the above protection trips and locks the circuit
setting current Isd is exceeded. breaker in the open position until it is reset either manually or
b When I2t is ON, an inverse time characteristic is selected. electrically (see page D-21).
The protection operates with an inverse time characteristic up
to 10 x Ir and above with a definite time characteristic.
Fault trip indication and inter-trip (ANSI 94)
Any operation of the above protection activates SDE auxiliary
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (ANSI 50) contacts for signalling or inter-trip to other device. SDE contact(s)
The instantaneous protection protects the installation against stay close until the circuit breaker is reset either manually or
phase to phase, phase to neutral and phase to earth short- electrically (see page D-9 and D-21).
circuits.
The protection operates with a definite time characteristic.
Trip history
All trip events with the relevant information for their analysis are
It trips without additional time delay as soon as the setting current
recorded in the trip history.
Ii is exceeded. The protection offers two selectable Ii trippng
For each trip inside the trip history (except the last one) it
mode (Standard/Fast):
includes:
b Standard max breaking time: 50 ms for applications requiring
b The type of protection that causes the trips: Long time
selectivity. Full selectivity can be ensured with any
overload, Short time short-circuit, Instantaneous short-circuit,
ComPact NSX circuit breaker installed downstream of
Earth fault, Earth leakage,
a MasterPacT.
b The date and time of the fault,
b Fast max breaking time: 30 ms typically used for applications
The last 50 trip events can be retrieved by means of a PC
where the thermal constraints to the equipment need to be
running EcoStruxure Power Commission or through Bluetooth.
limited and when selectivity is not required.
These last 50 trips are also accessible from the embedded
display.
Earth fault protection (ANSI 50N-TD/51N)
In addition, MicroLogic X logs also:
The earth fault protection can be achieved in two ways:
v The last electrical values measured before the fault
b By performing the summation of the three phases and neutral
(voltages, currents, frequency, unbalance current and
currents
voltage),
b By means of an external sensor (SGR [1]) installed around the
v The tripping currents during the fault just before
cable performing the connection of the transformer neutral
MasterPacT MTZ tripping (phase, neutral and ground
point to the earth. The connection of the SGR sensor to
currents).
MicroLogic 6.0 X is made through a MDGF interface module.
v The setting of the protection.
The protection includes two characteristics depending on the The last trip may be retrieved through the NFC powerless
status of the I2t setting: wireless communication while the circuit breaker is open and the
b When I2t is OFF, a definite time characteristic is selected. MicroLogic X is not energized.
The protection trips with the time delay tg as soon as the
setting current Ig is exceeded.
B-9
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Protections
Functions of protections
DB421316.ai

Dual settings
This function includes two sets of settings for every function of protection (LSIG)
according to the type of MicroLogic X except for the earth leakage. User may switch
B from one set of settings to the other to comply with special conditions of operation.
A typical application is to adjust the short-circuit protection when an installation can
be supplied by two sources (grid / generator set) with very different levels of
short-circuit current. The settings can be selected by one of the following means:
b By a digital input through the I/O module,
b Via Ethernet,
b From the HMI.

Overcurrent and trip cause indications

Five LEDs are available on the front of the MicroLogic X Control unit.
b The first LED it is a bicolor LED with 2 functionalities, Prewarn/Warn LED :
v Alarm PreWarn LED that becomes orange when I > 0.9 Ir
v Alarm Warn LED that becomes red when I > 1.05 Ir
b The second LED Ir is dedicated to the long time overload protection. It becomes
DB419569.ai

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig red when the protection trips.

Op.
Ii I n b The third LED Isd/Ii is dedicated to the short-time and instantaneous short-circuit
protection. It becomes red when the protection trips.
b The fourth LED Ig/IΔn is dedicated to the ground/earth fault and the earth leakage
protection. It becomes red when the protection trips.
b The fifth LED Op. is dedicated to the optional protections provided by the optional
digital modules. It becomes red when any of the optional protections trip.
The fault indication LEDs remain ON for 4 hours after trip if not reset by test/reset
push button. After 4 hours without reset it is possible to reactivate the trip indication
en attente LEDs by pushing the test/reset push button. It is continuously monitored.

Protection settings and checking

The protections can be set by means of the embedded display, a smartphone via
Bluetooth or with a PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission, and additionally via
Ethernet and Modbus SL communication.
EcoStruxure Power Commission allows:
b To set and check the protections,
b To download current settings and upload new settings,
b To check the breaker operation,
b To retrieve and display all the information processed by the MicroLogic X:
Measurements, alarms, diagnostics,
b To generate and store reports.
Additionally, for MicroLogic 6.0 X and MicroLogic 7.0 X, the operation of earth-fault
and earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing the test button located
above the USB connector.
A B
DB421319.ai

MICROLOGIC Setting change traceability

Any setting change is recorded in a dedicated protection history including:
Home
Quickview
Measures

!
b The date and the time of the last setting change,
Alarms & H...
Maintenan...
C
b The previous settings and the new settings,
OK

The settings corresponding to the active trip curve and the date of the last setting
change can be retrieved through NFC powerless wireless communication while the
D circuit breaker is open and the MicroLogic X is not energized.
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

In 1600 A
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST Setting change locking
The general configuration menu of MicroLogic X embedded display allows:
b To enable or disable the protection setting change from the embedded display
b To enable or disable the protection setting change from external access:
A PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission v A smartphone via Bluetooth
B USB cable v A PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission,
v Ethernet and Modbus SL communication.
C MicroLogic X Control unit
In addition the setting change from external access is password protected.
D USB connector in front

B-10
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Protections
Functions of protections

Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)

ZSI is a system designed to reduce the stress on electrical distribution equipment
during short-circuit or earth fault conditions. It works with a previously coordinated
protection by reducing the fault tripping time while maintaining the selectivity. Each
version of the control unit MicroLogic X includes the ZSI function.
B
The ZSI function is associated with short-time short-circuit protection and earth fault
protection. A single ZSI input is provided for earth fault and short-time short-circuit

DB421320.ai
protections.
The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and checks for a signal
arriving from downstream. If there is a signal from downstream, the circuit breaker
remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from
downstream, the circuit breaker trips with no intentional delay, regardless of the
tripping-delay setting.
Zone selective interlocking can be implemented between any types of MasterPacT MTZ.
When ZSI connects circuit breakers other than MasterPacT MTZ, it may be necessary to
use a Restraint Interface Module (RIM).

DB419093R.eps
Fault 1
Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no restraint signal from
downstream, it trips with no intentional delay, regardless of its tripping delay set to 0.3.
Fault 2
Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A receives a restraint signal
from B and remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3.
Circuit breaker B does not receive a restraint signal from downstream and opens
immediately, despite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.
Limits to device interconnection:
b A maximum of 15 upstreams devices may be connected to the ZSI input (Z1-Z2).
b A maximum of 15 downstream devices may be connected to the ZSI input (Z3-Z4).
If additional units are needed, a Restraint Interface Module (RIM) is required.

Restraint Interface Module - RIM (ANSI 78)

The Restraint Interface Module (RIM) serves three purposes in a ZSI system with
MasterPacT MTZ equipped with MicroLogic X:
b It boosts the voltage level of the restraint signal

DB425288.ai
b It converts the restraint signal to be compatible with other types of Schneider Electric
circuit breaker (MasterPacT NT/NW, ComPact) and Square D circuit breaker as well
b When combining different generations of devices between upstream/downstream
(MasterPacT MTZ, MasterPacT NT/NW, ComPact) it provides Double insulation ~ ~

to meet requirements of IEC standards. 3 4

5 6
max
Within a ZSI system , the voltage level of the restraint signal must be maintained at 120
V
60 H
6mA
z 41
max
mA

a certain level in order to activate the time delay of electronic trip devices. 1 2
24 V

OUT
ZSI
If the restraint signal is too weak to activate the time delay feature, all devices that dule
8892 e Mo ZSI ZSI
IN
LV84 terfacnterfacez ZSI Upst
ream

sense the fault will trip with no intentional delay. ZSI In

Modulo de
’i
ule d interf
a
s h -t
st
o-te Downst
ream

Mód Pu
The voltage level of the restraint signal can be ineffective due to: 9 10

b Restraint wire length exceeding 300 m S1

b One device sending a restraint signal to too many devices c.

CB Ac .52H4
Ctrl. No

b Differing signal levels between different electronic trip systems.

If the restraint wire length exceeds 300 m, the voltage drop along the control wire will
weaken the restraint signal until it can no longer activate the time delay on the
upstream device. If wire length exceeds 300 m, a RIM module must be placed in the
circuit to boost the voltage level of the restraint signal.
In addition, if the number of upstream circuit breakers exceeds 15, then a RIM is
required.
For further details on allowable RIM combinations, please refer to instruction sheet
of ZSI interface module.
RIM module is operational for electrical systems with rated operational voltage [Ue]
up to =690 V AC 50/60 Hz only.
Characteristics
b Power supply DC: 24 V DC +25 % -20 % ,6 mA.
b Maximum operating temperature surrounding the module when installed inside
a switchboard: -35 °C to 75 °C.
b Standards compliance: IEC 60950-1 , CISPR 22, CISPR 24, UL 489, UL 489SE.
b CE Marked according to LVD (Low Voltage Directive) / IEC 60950-1.
Connection & Installation
b Terminal Strips, jumpers and 35 mm DIN mounting rail (IEC/EN 60715).
b Twisted wire with a braided shield, 300 V AC, 14 AWG - 2.5 mm2 / 22 AWG - 0.4 mm2.
B-11
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Protections
Tripping curves

MicroLogic 2.0 X MicroLogic 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

DB419094.eps

DB419095.eps
B

Earth fault protection (MicroLogic 6.0 X) IDMTL

DB432934.ai
DB419096.eps

B-12
 www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Protections
Limitation curves

Voltage 380/415/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Limited short-circuit current (k peak) Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
Masterpact
DB419098.eps

DB419099.eps
MTZ2 H3 Masterpact
Masterpact MTZ2 H3

B
MTZ2 H2 MTZ3 H1
MTZ3 H1 MTZ3 H2
Masterpact Masterpact
Masterpact MTZ2 H2
MTZ1 H3 Masterpact
MTZ2 L1 Masterpact
MTZ2 H1 MTZ2 H1
MTZ2 L1
Masterpact
MTZ1 H2
Masterpact Masterpact
MTZ1 H1 Masterpact MTZ1 H1
MTZ2 N1 MTZ1 L1 MTZ1 H2
MTZ2 N1

Masterpact
MTZ1 L1

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms) Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Voltage 380/415/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Limited energy Limited energy
DB419100.eps

DB419101.eps

Masterpact Masterpact
MTZ2 H3 MTZ2 H3

Masterpact
Masterpact
MTZ2 L1
MTZ2 L1

Masterpact
MTZ1 L1 Masterpact
MTZ1 L1

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms) Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

B-13
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Measurement

MasterPacT MTZ with its embedded current sensors and MicroLogic X is a PMD-DD Power Meter Device complying
with IEC/EN 61557-12, Class 0.5 for voltage and current and Class 1 for active power and energy measurements.
For each measurement the accuracy is certified within a temperature range of -25 °C to 70 °C and takes into account
all the individual errors of the components included in the measuring chain.

B
DB421322.ai

Measures and electrical parameters calculated

by the MicroLogic X control unit
Based on the measurement of line currents, neutral current, phase-to-phase voltages
DB421321.ai

and phase-to-neutral voltages, MicroLogic X control unit calculates (according to IEC

61557-12, Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures - Part
12: Performance measuring and monitoring devices (PMD)) and displays all the
parameters required to monitor any AC electrical power system, including power quality,
power management and energy efficiency:
b RMS values of currents and voltages,
b Active, reactive and apparent powers,
b Active, reactive and apparent energies,
b Power factor,
b W.A.G.E.S (Water, Air, Gas, Electricity, Steam) through digital inputs of I/O module,
b Frequency,
b Phase sequence,
b Voltage unbalances, Current unbalances,
b Current demands,
Current
Thermal demand
DB430727.ai

b Total active, reactive and apparent power demands,

100 % b THD of voltages, THD of currents.
90 % The calculation of current and power demands are performed in compliance with
IEC/EN 61557-12.
The current demand is calculated using the thermal method. The time constant of
0% integration is adjustable between 1 and 60 minutes, in steps of 1 minute.
Time The power demand is calculated using arithmetical integration of power RMS values
Time constant
of integration during a period of time divided by the length of the period. In MicroLogic X the power
demand is calculated according to the sliding block method, with a sliding block of
Thermal demand calculation adjustable between 1 and 60 minutes, in steps of 1 minute.
Note: as defined by IEC 61557-12:
b A demand is the average value of a quantity over a specified period of time.
b Thermal current demand calculates the demand based on a thermal response, which mimics the
analog-type thermal demand meters.
b Power demands are calculated using arithmetical integration of power values during a period of
Demand value time divided by the length of the period. The result is equivalent to the energy accumulated during
DB430638.ai

Calculation updates is the average the period of time divided by the length of the period. The period of calculation can be fixed or
for last sliding.
completed Electrical values calculated by MicroLogic X control units can be displayed on the
interval embedded HMI, a smartphone via Bluetooth, a PC running EcoStruxure Power
15 minute interval
Commission software and on the FDM128 display unit. They are refreshed every 2
seconds.The display on the embedded HMI is accessed by means of a contextual menu
allowing easy navigation through the electrical values. Alternatively a Quickview option
Time allows the main basic values to be displayed.
(s) MicroLogic X control units log and time stamp minimum and maximum values since last
reset of all relevant measurements (currents, voltages, frequency, active power, reactive
Sliding bock
power, apparent power, THDI, THDV...). For the complete list of measurements and min /
Demand calculated with a sliding block interval max values, see MicroLogic X User guide. The maximum and minimum values are
resettable from the embedded display, a smartphone via Bluetooth or a PC running
EcoStruxure Power Commission software.
An optional external 24 V DC power supply or VPS module is required to process and
display measurements, including energy counters, for currents below 20 % of the rated
current .
The phase-to-neutral voltages are available for 4-pole and 3-pole circuit breaker as well
providing the connection of the VN terminal of MicroLogic X to the neutral. To ensure the
accuracy for the active power measurement the connection of the VN terminal of
MicroLogic X to the neutral is mandatory. Please refer to the user manual for more
details concerning the wiring and configuration of MicroLogic X.

B-14
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Measurement

B
MasterPacT MTZ for energy management functions
Active Power and Energy metering in MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X has been
designed and tested to provide excellent accuracy: Class 1 according to
IEC/EN 61557-12. This standard specifies requirements for combined performance
of measuring and monitoring devices that measure and monitor the electrical
parameters within electrical distribution systems. It covers both devices with external
sensors such as current and/or voltage transformers like stand alone power meter
(PMD-S) and devices with embedded sensors (PMD-D) like circuit breakers.
In addition a list of available performance class for all relevant measurement
functions is specified in IEC/EN 61557-12, in opposition to most other standards
such as IEC 62053-2x series that are dealing only with active and reactive energy.
MasterPacT MTZ equipped with MicroLogic X and its own embedded sensors
is a Class 1 full chain measurement PMD-DD device for active power and energy
metering according to IEC/EN 61557-12. It complies with the requirements of K70
temperature class according to Table 6 of IEC/EN 61557-12.
PMD-DD offer the benefit of avoiding uncertainty and variation due to external
sensors and wiring.
IEC/EN 61557-12 standard defines three levels of uncertainty (intrinsic uncertainty,
operating uncertainty, overall system uncertainty) that need to be checked to ensure
accuracy class.
The uncertainty is the estimated amount or percentage by which a measured value
may differ from the true value. According to IEC/EN 61557-12, the total uncertainty of
a measurement, in general, depends on the instrument, the environment, and other
elements to be considered.
Note: Requirements for Class 1 active power and energy in IEC/EN 61557-12 regarding limits
of uncertainty due to variation of the current for different power factor, and limits of uncertainty
due to influence quantities such as temperature are equivalent to IEC 62053-2x standards.

PMD-D - Embedded sensors

Intrinsic uncertainty Operating Overall system
PB115943_85.eps

Uncertainty under uncertainty uncertainty :

reference conditions + measurement No additional error
uncertainty for PMD-D
according to

+
0
IEC 61000-4-30
Variations due to
influence quantities
> More information, > More information,
see page B-16 see page B-17 PMD-D - Embedded sensors

PMD-S - External sensors

Intrinsic uncertainty Operating Overall system
PB112459_15.eps

Uncertainty under uncertainty uncertainty

PB111768_17.eps

+ measurement
+
reference conditions Uncertainty and
uncertainty variations due to
according to external sensors

+ +
IEC 61000-4-30 accuracy and to
impedance of wires
Variations due to PMD-S - External sensors
influence quantities

B-15
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Measurement

Intrinsic uncertainty under reference condition

IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Intrinsic uncertainty is uncertainty of a measuring instrument when used under reference conditions.

B In this standard, it is a percentage of the measured value defined in its rated range and with the other influence
quantities under reference conditions.
For MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X the main influence quantities are the current and the power factor.
The effect of all other influence quantities are less significant.
MasterPacT MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3
Lowest value of the current at which the MTZ starts Ist = 0.4 %Ib 1.6 A 1.6 A 3.2 A
and continues to register
Lowest value of the current to ensure 5 %Ib 20 A 20 A 40 A
accuracy for Active Power and Energy y 1,5 %
Lowest value of the current to ensure accuracy for Active 10 %Ib 40 A 40 A 80 A
Power and Energy y 1 % with PF = 1
Lowest value of the current to ensure accuracy for Active 20 %Ib 80 A 80 A 160 A
Power and Energy y 1 % with PF = 0.5 Ind to 0.8 Cap
Value of the current for which the relevant performances Ib 400 A 400 A 800 A
of a direct connected PMD (PMD Dp) are fixed
Highest value of current at which the MTZ meets Imax 1600 A 4000 A 6300 A
the uncertainty requirements of this standard x1.2 x1.2 x1.2

Intrinsic uncertainty for Active Power and Energy versus current

DB419711.ai

No
load

Ist

1.5 %

1%

1.6 20 40 4000 Current (A)

MasterPacT MTZ2 Standard Out of standard

Example: graph for MasterPacT MTZ2

B-16
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Measurement

Operating uncertainty
IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Operating uncertainty is uncertainty under the rated operating conditions.
IEC/EN 61557-12 specifies tests and uncertainty maximum variation according to various disturbances such as:
b Ambient temperature T°,
b Frequency, unbalance, harmonics and EMC.
B
For MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X the main influence quantity is the temperature T°, as MasterPacT MTZ is
designed to carry high current, the self heating combined with the ambient temperature induces a wide range of
operating temperature.
In MasterPacT MTZ the measurement has been designed to offer high stability, within this range of temperature.

Effect of T° on MasterPacT MTZ measurement performance

The variation of the temperature around the internal current transformer and MicroLogic X processing the
measures is a challenge regardless of the ambient temperature, as the internal temperature variation between
the minimum current and the nominal current load could be around 90 °K. So the effect of the temperature on
accuracy of the measurement has been carefully managed to ensure an operating temperature between -25 and
70 °C.

DB419712.ai
Accuracy (%)

5
Uncertainty
4 min/max PF 1
3
Uncertainty
2 min/max PF 0.5
1
MasterPacT MTZ
0 Masterpact MTZ
-1 Standard
-2
Out of standard
-3
-4
-5 Temperature (°C)
-25 -15 -5 0 5 15 25 35 45 55 65

Overall system uncertainty

IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Overall system uncertainty is uncertainty including the instrumental uncertainty of several separated instruments,
external sensors, external wiring between devices, etc. under the rated operating conditions.

For MasterPacT MTZ the overall system uncertainty is non-existent thanks to PMD-DD design with the
embedded sensors.

B-17
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Measurement

Effect of EMC and other disturbances on MasterPacT MTZ measurement

performances
Thanks to other functions such as protection functions, MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X offers by design a high
level of immunity to disturbances. Operating uncertainty is very low ensuring a Class 1 in a wide range of
B operating conditions. The table below summarizes standard requirements and MasterPacT MTZ performance
regarding these influence quantities :
Influence quantity Table 9 IEC/EN 61557-12 PMD DD Cl 1 MasterPacT
Additional uncertainty variation tolerance MTZ
Ambiant Temperature PF 1 0.05 % / °K < 0.01 % / °K
PF 0.5 Ind 0.07 %/°K < 0.01 % / °K
Auxiliary voltage power supply 24 V DC ±15 % 0.1 % 0%
Voltage PF 1: 80 % / 120 % Un 0.7 % 0%
PF 0,5 Ind: 80 % / 120 % Un 1% 0%
Frequency 49 Hz 51 Hz / 59 Hz 61 Hz PF 1 0.5 % 0%
49 Hz 51 Hz / 59 Hz 61 Hz PF 0.5 0.7 % 0%
Reversed phase sequence 1.5 % 0%
Voltage unbalance 0 to 10 % 2% 0%
Phase missing 1 or 2 phase missing 2% 0%
Harmonic in current and voltage Un: 10 % harmonic 5 0.8 % < 0.1 %
Imax: 20 % harmonic 5
Odd harmonic in current 3% < 0.1 %
Sub harmonic in current 3% < 0.1 %
Common mode voltage rejection 0 to 690 V / earth 0.5 % 0%
Permanent a.c magnetic induction, 0.5 mT IEC 61326 2% 0%
Electromagnetic RF fields IEC 61326 2% <1%
Conducted disturbances induced by RF fields IEC 61326 2% <1%

B-18
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Measurement

Compliance with ISO 50001: Reliability and repeatability

over time of energy measurement
Scope and main requirements of ISO 50001:
ISO 50001 specifies requirements for systems and organization dedicated to energy management.
This international standard defines rules and gives recommendations to achieve continual improvement of energy
performance, including energy efficiency, energy use and consumption, measurements, documentation and
B
reporting. Energy performance shall be monitored and significant deviations shall be investigated. It implies that
the accuracy of the instruments used for this purpose remains stable thoughout their entire operating life which
ensures the repeatability of the measurements (ISO 50001, clause 4.6 and 4.6.1 Checking, monitoring,
measurement and analysis).

In MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X , the metering and protection functions are designed to perform accurate
and repeatable measurements during MicroLogic X life time, provided it's used in the specified environmental
conditions as defined in MasterPacT Maintenance Guide. Current sensors and MicroLogic X are calibrated
during circuit breaker manufacturing and are not supposed to be re-calibrated during this life time. In general,
electronic instrument measuring electric parameters don’t request any specific maintenance provided they are
working within environmental specifications. Accuracy can be reduced in case of operation under exceptional
conditions, lightning strikes, high temperature, high degree of humidity, this is why a periodic verification is
recommended (please refer to the annex I of the AFNOR Document FD X30-147: Metrological maintenance
recommendations, applicable to electrical and fluidic measurements).

Compliance with IEC 60364-8-1 Sub-clause 8.3.1.1 Requirement

on accuracy and measuring range
Scope and main requirements of IEC 60364-8-1:
IEC 60364-8-1 provides requirements and recommendations for the design, erection and verification of low
voltage electrical installations including local production and storage of energy for optimizing the overall efficient
use of electricity. It introduces recommendations for the design of an electrical installation within the framework of
an energy efficiency management approach in order to get low electrical energy consumption and acceptable
energy availability. It also specifies the accuracies of the measuring instruments involved in the functions of
energy management such as:
b Energy usage analysis and optimization
b Contract optimization
b Cost allocation
b Efficiency assessment
b Energy usage trends assessment.
MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X complies with the requirements of IEC 60364-8-1 dedicated to the
optimization of energy efficiency. It provides a range of measurements with accuracies required for complex
energy efficiency approaches.
The table below from IEC 60364-8-1:2014 Sub-clause 8.3.1.1 "Requirement on accuracy and measuring range"
specifies the accuracies required for the measurements dedicated to cost management

MasterPacT MTZ main applications Intermediate Final distribution

Incomer Main LV distribution board
switchboard boards
Measurement b Revenue metering b Cost allocation b Cost allocation b Energy usage
objectives for cost b Bill checking b Energy usage b Energy usage analysis and
management b Energy usage analysis and analysis and optimization
analysis and optimization optimization b Energy usage
optimization b Efficiency b Efficiency trends
b Contract assessment assessment assessment
optimization b Contract b Contract
b Regulatory optimization optimization
compliance b Regulatory b Regulatory
compliance compliance
Overall system In general, In general, In general, In general, reliable
accuracy of active excellent accuracy, good accuracy, medium accuracy, indication should be
energy e.g. Class 0.2 e.g. Class 0.5 e.g. Class 1 more important than
measurement to Class 1 to Class 2 to Class 3 accuracy

B-19
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Measurement

Appendix: abstract of IEC/EN 61557-12

Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC, equipment testing,
measuring or monitoring of protective measures - Part 12: Performance measuring and monitoring devices
(PMD).
B According to this standard a PMD is a combination in one or more devices of several functional modules dedicated
to measuring and monitoring electrical parameters in energy distribution systems or electrical installations.
A PMD can be used in connection with sensors.

Current measurement Sensor operated PMD -  irect connected PMD -

D
Current sensors out of PMD Current sensors in PMD
Voltage measurement > PMD Sp > PMD Dp

Direct connected PMD - PMD-SD PMD-DD

> PMD pD Direct insertion:
Voltage sensors in PMD Semi-direct insertion
MasterPacT MTZ
Sensor operated PMD - PMD-SS PMD-DS
> PMD pS
Voltage sensors out of PMD Indirect insertion Semi-direct insertion

PMD-DD: MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X and embedded sensors

DB419713.ai

U
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

NW40

Ue
Icw
Icm
rpact
Maste HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Uimp
12kV

690/100
50kA/1s
105kA
0V

peak
z
50/60H NEMA
I
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
z
AC23A 50/60H
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Class of temperature: Table 6 of IEC/EN 61557-12

MasterPacT MTZ
K55 temperature K70 temperature Kx [1] temperature
Class of PMD Class of PMD Class of PMD
Rated operating range -5 °C to +55 °C -25 °C to +70 °C Above +70 °C
(with specified uncertainty) and/or under -25 °C [2]
Limit range of operation -5 °C to +55 °C -25 °C to +70 °C Above +70 °C
(no hardware failures) and/or under -25 °C [2]
Limit range for storage and -25 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +85 °C Acc. to manufacturer
shipping specification [2]
[1] Kx stands for extended conditions.
[2] Limits are to be defined by manufacturer according to the application.

B-20
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Measurement

Smartphone
EcoStruxure
Range Range FDM Power
Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Unit EHMI
min acc max acc 128 Commission,
EIFE
IFE, IFM
Currents
RMS current of phases I1, I2, I3, Iavg ±0.5 % 40 [6] 4 000 x 1.2 [6] A
B
Voltages
V12,V23,V31,
RMS phase-to-phase voltage ±0.5 % 208 690 x 1.2 V
VLL average
V1N, V2N, V3N, VLN
RMS phase-to-neutral voltage ±0.5 % 120 400 x 1.2 V
average [2]
Power and energy
Active power P1, P2, P3, Ptot ±1 % 5 10 000 (±) kW
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3, Qtot ±2 % 5 10 000 (±) kVAR
Apparent power S1, S2, S3, Stot ±1 % 5 10 000 kVA
Power factor PF ±0.02 -1 1
Power factor / Phase PF1, PF2, PF3 ±0.02 -1 1
Fundamental power factor
Cos φ ±0.02 -1 1
(cos φ or DPF)
Fundamental power factor Cos φ1, Cos φ2,
±0.02 -1 1
(cos φ or DPF) / Phase Cos φ3
Active Energy resetable [7]
Ep IN / OUT / total [3]
±1 % 0 10 000 000 kWh
Reactive Energy resetable [7] Eq IN / OUT / total [3] ±2 % 0 10 000 000 kVARh
Apparent Energy resetable [7] Es ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kVAh
Active Energy not resetable [8] Ep IN / OUT / total [3] ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kWh
Reactive Energy not resetable [8] Eq IN / OUT / total [3] ±2 % 0 10 000 000 kVARh
arent Energy not resetable [8]
Es ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kVAh
W.A.G.E.S (Water, Air, Gaz, Electricity, Steam) with digital inputs of I/O module
Current and power demands
Current demands I1, I2, I3, IN, Iavg ±0.5 % 40 [6] 4 000 x 1.2 [6] A
Total active power demand Ptot ±1 % 5 10 000 (±) kW
Total reactive power demand Qtot ±2 % 5 10 000 (±) kVAR
Total apparent power demand Stot ±1 % 5 10 000 kVA
Power quality
Frequency F ±0.005 Hz 40 70 Hz
Phase sequence
Phase sequence NA 123 132 0-1
(0: a,b,c /1,2,3 - 1: a,c,b /1,3,2)
RMS current on neutral IN [1] ±1 % 40 [6] 4 000 [6] A
RMS current on ground current Ig ±5 % 40 [6] 4 000 [6] A
IΔ (with
RMS current on earth leakage ±10 % 0.1 30 A
MicroLogic 7.0 X)
THDI Current phase ITHD I1, I2, I3, Iavg Cl 5 [9]
0% 100 % [4]
% [4] [5]

THDI I neutral ITHD IN [1] Cl 5 [9] 0% 100 % [4] % [4] [5]

THDV Phase to phase voltage VTHD V12,23,31, LLavg Cl 2 [9] 0% 20 % [4] % [4] [5]

THDV phase-N voltages VTHD V1N,2N,3N, LNavg [2]

Cl 2 [9]
0% 20 % [4]
% [4] [5]

Current unbalance vs average

I_unbal 1,2,3, Iunbal (worst) +5 % 0% 100 % %
3 phase RMS currents
Phase to phase voltage
VLL_Unbal 12 23 31 unbal Cl 0.5 0% 10 % %
unbalance
Phase to Neutral voltage VLN_Unbal 1N, 2N 3N,
Cl 0.5 0% 10 % %
unbalance unbal [2]
[1] Neutral current available only with 4 poles circuit breakers or 3 poles circuit breakers with External Neutral Current Transformer (ENCT).
[2] Phase to neutral voltage available only with 4 poles circuit breakers or 3 poles with VN terminal connected to Neutral.
[3] IN+OUT or IN-OUT according to setting.
[4] THD is calculated refering to fundamental or RMS value.
Available
[5] Detail per phase is not displayed on EHMI. Not available
[6] 40 to 1600 A x1.2 for MTZ1, 40 to 4000 A x1.2 for MTZ2, 80 to 6300 A x1.2 for MTZ3.
[7] With reset.
[8] Without reset.
[9] According IEC/EN 61557-12.
Note: MicroLogic X log and time stamp minimum and maximum values since last reset of all relevant measurements. Main max values may be read on
embedded HMI (Currents, Voltages, Frequence, Ptotal, Qtotal, THDIavg, THDVavg,THDIN ...). For complete list of measurements and min / max values,
see MicroLogic X control unit User guide.
B-21
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Maintenance & diagnostics

Electrical power supply availability and reliability are the main critical issues affecting profitability and competitiveness.
Outage management focuses on preventing, detecting, locating and clearing of faults.
Operation and maintenance are mandatory to keep performance of electrical installations at the highest level and
to ensure that the system users are prepared to manage any crisis that may arise.

B
The MicroLogic X control units perform in real time a high level of diagnostics on MasterPacT MTZ circuit
breakers. They generate and store appropriate alarms and messages to help the users with maintenance and
DB421333.ai

power restoration.
This function complies with the following end user values:
b Prevent power shutdown to optimize uptime
b Restart quickly after a trip to reduce downtime
b Repair to recover performance of the breaker.
b Edit maintenance reports to record status of the equipment.

Prevent power shutdown

Prevention of unscheduled power shutdown requires to:
b Carry-out a preventive maintenance plan
b Be alerted of the health of the circuit breaker
b Anticipate components/device replacement

Carry-out a preventive maintenance plan

DB421884.ai

b As standard, MicroLogic X periodically reminds the End-Users to schedule either basic End-User maintenance
program or standard End-User maintenance program or manufacturer maintenance program.
b Basic End-User maintenance can be performed by Services Provider. The frequency of this program is every year or
it can be extended to two years if the device operate in favourable enviromental conditions. The scope is Visual
inspection and functional testing (push to trip).
b Standard End-User maintenance can be performed by Services Providers. The frequency of this program is every
2 years or it can be extended to four years if the device operate in favourable enviromental conditions. The scope is
in addition of basic program: automatic protection curve testing, operational servicing and sub-assembly test.
b Manufacturer maintenance can be performed by a Schneider Electric Services representative on request.
The frequency of this program is per default every 5 years (within normal operating and environmental conditions,
and low criticality of user application). The scope is in addition of standard program: complete evaluation of the
device performance and data diagnostic (Measure of the insulation resistance, opening/closing time…) and
diagnostic.
MicroLogic X and Ecostruxure Power Device App display the last and the next maintenance program to be
performed. Details of the maintenance program are described in the MasterPacT MTZ Maintenance Guide
(DOCA0099EN). Basic and standard End-User maintenance program can be performed by Services Provider.
Maintenance program can be performed by a Schneider Electric Services representative on request.
Be alerted of the health of the circuit breaker
As standard, the MicroLogic X control unit is equipped with a "Service" LED to alert the user to the overall health of
the circuit breaker and when to perform maintenance. This LED, represented by a "wrench / spanner", can have 3
states:
b Unlit LED: the circuit breaker is in good working order,
b Orange LED: non-urgent intervention required (contact wear above 60 %, Voltage release (MN, MX, XF)
operations is above alarm threshold, Remaining service life of MicroLogic is below alarm threshold, schedule
standard maintenance within one month…),
b Red LED: alarm message that requires immediate intervention (contact wear above 100 %, Voltage release
(MN, MX, XF) reached the max number of operations, MicroLogic has reached the max service life, failure of
the tripping chain, malfunction of the control unit…).
The associated alarms are displayed on the embedded HMI. The alarms requiring non-urgent intervention are
DB421332.ai

displayed with an orange backlight, the alarms requiring immediate intervention and trip with a red backlight.
The information is also accessible from a smartphone with Bluetooth or NFC wireless communication,
a PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission software.
When the MicroLogic X control unit is not energized only the trip alarms with their associated messages remain
accessible with a smartphone through NFC.
The various possibilities to display alarms and messages concerning the management of maintenance and the
health of the circuit breaker are summarized in the following table (on the next page):

B-22
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Maintenance & diagnostics

B
MicroLogic X control unit energized MicroLogic X

DB419581.ai
MICROLOGIC

control unit
not energized
Display Display Display on EcoStruxure Display IFE/EIFE Display trip
on EHMI on EHMI smartphone Power on web alarm on
Alarm Alarm with Commission FDM128 pages smartphone
Bluetooth software USB with NFC
connection
Orange

TRIP CAUSE
Alarms
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

BACKLIGHT 7.0 X

Red
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

Alarms
BACKLIGHT DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

Anticipate components/device replacement

In 1600 A

As standard, MicroLogic X monitors most of the active mechanical components (circuit breaker, chassis and MCH gear
motor to charge the spring mechanism) as well as the electrical ones (MN, MX1, MX2, XF voltage release) and the
MicroLogic control unit itself. In addition, MicroLogic X calculates contact wear ratio based on number of operation and
tripping current. MicroLogic X and Ecostruxure Power Device App app display the remaining service life of the circuit

DB419582.ai
breaker and the MicroLogic X control unit. It displays as well, the number of operations of the actuators (MCH, XF, MN, MICROLOGIC

MX1, MX2) and the contact wear. Alarms helps the users to anticipate the replacement of these circuit breaker
components. Mechanical and electrical components of the breaker can be replaced by Services Provider. MicroLogic
control unit can be replaced by a Schneider Electric Services representative on request.

Restart Quickly after a trip

As standard, the LEDs on the front of the MicroLogic X control unit allow to quickly identify the tripping cause
(short-circuit, earth fault or overload). MicroLogic X and Ecostruxure Power Device App app display all the relevant
information related to the trip (tripping cause, date and time, tripping current, settings of the protection).
TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

As option:
b Power restoration assistant digital module assists the maintenance operator on power restoration procedure.
7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

b MasterPacT operation assistant digital module allows the maintenance operator to close and open the circuit
breaker from a distance of few meters.
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

b Wave form capture digital module automatically logs current and voltage cycles in case of trip. At a glance, it
In 1600 A

helps to understand the nature and the gravity of the trip event.

Repair
Repair of circuit breaker components requires:
b The right level of assistance
b The precise identification of the circuit breaker and its associated spare parts

Assistance
As standard, MicroLogic X and Ecostruxure Power Device App app display the name and phone number of the
Services Provider who performed the last maintenance.

Identification
By scanning the QR code displayed on the front face of the MicroLogic X control unit, users will have access to:
b Serial number of the MicroLogic X control unit
b Bill Of Material (as built) of the circuit breaker and the optional accessories installed on the circuit breaker
b Product code in order to be able to reorder the identical circuit breaker.
b References of the spare parts
b Link to download user guides and Instruction Service.
In addition, to ensure the level of performance of the circuit breaker, Schneider Electric proposes the three
following services: warranty on components, extension of warranty, maintenance on demand or advanced service
plans. For more information, please refer to Services (section H).

Edit maintenance reports

As standard, MicroLogic X control unit provides all the relevant information (product ID, protection settings,
configuration parameters, logs, trip context) in order for EcoStruxure Power Commission software to edit
maintenance report. To plan, edit report and track maintenance intervention, you may use EcoStruxure Facility
Expert App.

B-23
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Maintenance & diagnostics

Prevent power shutdown with conditional checks

Monitored functions & Logs Circuit breaker operation

B Elect. Closing
function
Elect.
Opening
Tripping
function
function
b Invalid self-test XF b Invalid self-test b Tripping chain
voltage release MX2 voltage continuity (Ready
b XF voltage release release LED)
not detected b MX2 voltage b Trip counter by
b Closing inhibited release not Mitop (SDE)
by communication detected b Time stamped
b Closing inhibited b Invalid self-test tripping log
through IO module MX1 voltage b Trip counter for Ir,
b Closing counter by release Isd, Ii, Ig, IΔn
MN b MX1 voltage
release not
detected
b Invalid self-test
MN voltage release
b MN voltage release
not detected
b Voltage loss on MN
undervoltage
release
b Opening counter
by MN, MX1 or
MX2

Monitored functions & logs Fault detection on MicroLogic X

Sensors MicroLogic X External

Disconnection internal failure Communication
failure
b Internal current b ASIC over temp b invalid NFC
sensor b ASIC internal communication
disconnected failure b invalid Bluetooth
b External current b Unable to read communication
sensor sensor plug b invalid IEEE
disconnected b Internal battery 802.15.4
b Earth leakage b Tripping voltage communication
(Vigi) Sensor release (Mitop) not b Ethernet Error
disconnected detected communication
(IFE)
b I/O module
B-24
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Maintenance & diagnostics

Preventive maintenance
Maintenance alarm

Closing
function
Opening
function
Maintenance
program
B
reminder
b XF operations is b MX1 operations is b Schedule Basic
above alarm above alarm maintenance within
threshold threshold one month
b XF reached the b MX1 reached the b Schedule Standard
max number of max number of maintenance within
operations operations one month
b MCH charging b MX2 operations is b Schedule
operations is above alarm Manufact.
above alarm threshold maintenance within
threshold b MX2 reached the three months
b MCH has reached max number of
the max number of operations
operations b MN operations is
above alarm
threshold
b MN reached the
max number of
operations

Circuit MicroLogic X
breaker
b Remaining service b Remaining service
life of circuit life of MicroLogic is
breaker is below below alarm
alarm threshold threshold
b Circuit breaker b MicroLogic has
reached the max reached the max
number of service life
operations b Protection settings
b Contact wear >60% still set on factory
Check contacts default settings 6
b Contact wear >95% months after
Plan replacement commisionning
b Contact wear >100%
Replace circuit
breaker

B-25
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Event Management

From all the functions processed by MicroLogic X a list of predefined events has been selected for user notification
of alarms, and traceability. All these events are time stamped and logged in non volatile memory.
For ease of use these events have been classified in seven histories: Trip, protection, diagnostic, metering,
configuration, operation, and communication.

B
Definition and categories of events
In addition to their main action of tripping, measuring, and counting, MicroLogic X
functions produce events available for alarm notification and history logging.
Event Maximum
Event characteristics
history number
All events are time stamped and logged in non-volatile memory.
of events
Trip 50 Event history
Protection 100 All events are logged in one of the histories of the Microligc X control unit:
Diagnostic 300 b Trip : Long-time trip, short-time trip, trip on internal failure ...
Metering 300 b Protection : Setting change, I > 90 % Ir Long time, change from set A to set B ...
Configuration 100 b Diagnostic : Voltage release failure, low battery ...
b Metering : reset min/max, reset energy counters…
Operation 300
b Configuration : Digital module license …
Communication 100 b Operation : Opening, closing, alarm reset...
b Communication : Bluetooth enable ...
All events are logged regardless of their severity, including low-level events. Each
DB421335.ai

history has a predefined maximum size. When a history is full each new event
overwrites the oldest event, and other histories are left unchanged (FIFO).
For the complete list of events see MicroLogic X user guide.

Event notification
b High severity events generate pop-ups on embedded HMI with a red backlight
b Medium severity events generate pop-ups on embedded HMI with an orange backlight.
b On the FDM128 display unit they change the related pictogram colour to orange.
b All events can be addressed individually or by group to digital output (M2C or I/O
module)
b All events can trigger an email through EIFE or IFE communication interfaces.
b High and medium severity active events can be read on the embedded HMI, a PC
or a smartphone
b All the events logged in histories can be displayed on a PC with EcoStruxure Power
Commission, a smartphone or on the FDM128 display unit. They are displayed in
chronological order. They can be sorted according to the following selections: date
and time, severity, or history.
b Additionally, all the events logged in histories are accessible via Ethernet and
DB421336.ai

Modbus SL through the EIFE, IFE and IFM interfaces.

Event type and latch mode

They are two types of events:
b Occurence / Completion events: These events have a beginning and an end
(for example Long-time pick-up and dropout).
b Instantaneous events: These events have no duration (for example reception of
an opening order, breaker tripping or settings changes).
An event may be latched or unlatched:
b A latched event does not reset automatically. It remains in held position after its
cause has disappeared until it is reset by the user.
b An unlatched event is active while its cause is present and returns to inactive as
soon as its cause disappears or is resolved.
For latched events a reset action can be made from:
b The test/reset button on the front face of the MicroLogic X.
b From a PC
b From a smartphone
b Via Ethernet and Modbus SL through the EIFE, IFE and IFM interfaces
A command from test/reset button, a PC, a Smartphone, Ethernet and Modbus SL
resets all the held events managed by MicroLogic X.

B-26
 www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Event Management
DB445882.ai

Time Date
stamp Time

COM
UC1
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

B
ed -20 H3
Discharg MTZ2

High
Event log Severity
ed
harg
Disc

Medium
Non volatile memory Level
Isd
Ig
I n
Op.

Low
TRIP CAUSE

Ir
Ii

7.0 X

0002LV847604
ID:
198942152752

A
In 1600

Trip
NFC
Protection
Metering
History Diagnostic
Operation
Configuration
Communication

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

ed -20 H3
Discharg MTZ2

Event
ed
harg
Disc

Isd
Ig
I n
Op.

notification
TRIP CAUSE

Ir
Ii

7.0 X
4

ID: 20002LV84760
19894215275

A
In 1600

Switchboard or
Device Remote
technical room
IFE
lin'X
Ener

02 Test
LV4340

Embedded Display IFE EIFE IFM

or
MICROLOGIC
Modbus SL
Home
Quickview
MICROLOGIC

Home
Home
MICROLOGIC
FDM128
Quickview
Quickview
Measures Measures
Protection
! Measures
Alarms & H...
! Alarms & H... Alarms
Maintenan...

Maintenan... OK
OK

Ethernet
OK

Internet
TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X

ID: ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 1989421527520002LV847604
Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu.

@
MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

@
DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu. 00 00 00 00

123 123 123 123

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op. In 1600 A In 1600 A 456 456 456 456

Ii I n 00 00 00 00

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 789

123 123 123 123

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 456

c
24V
Power
1
456 456 456 789
2

Inputs I1
Digital I1C 3
I2 4
I2C 5
6

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

ID:
MAC N°:
serial

Server
Panel L
PAS600
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig
TRIP CAUSE

Op. Ir Isd Ig
Ii I n Test Reset Op.
Ii I n Test Reset
Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu.

In 1600 A 7.0 X

@
7.0 X

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 ID: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

1989421527520002LV847604

Micrologic X
123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123

PAS600
456 456 456 456 Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 456

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 789 456 456 456 789
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

Digital Output
In 1600 A
In 1600 A

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

A1

O1
I1

NFC
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

063
LV434

IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

M2C IO Module

EcoStruxure Power Device App

B-27
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

Power supply

MicroLogic X is a self-powered protection control unit. The basic functions of protection (LSIG)do not require any power
supply. Below 20 % of the rated current a 24 V dc supply or the VPS module is needed to ensure the proper operation and
all the specified performances of MicroLogic X for the measurement, diagnosis, display and communication functions.

B MicroLogic X is equipped with a robust internal power supply as well as various alternative external power
supplies to cover the needs in any situation.
MicroLogic X control unit combines five possible sources of supply:
b The internal currents provided by the embedded current transformers,
b The internal voltages through the VPS module, up to 600 V AC,
b An external 24 V DC power supply,
b A PC supply via the mini USB port,
b An external portable battery connected to the mini USB port.
When the currents are higher than 20 % of the rated current, the internal current supply ensures the proper
operation of the MicroLogic X control unit.
This includes:
b The accurate performance of the protection functions, i.e. Long-time overload protection, Short-time short
circuit protection, Instantaneous short circuit protection, Earth fault protection
b All the measures with the accuracies specified page B-21 of this catalog
b The diagnosis
b The HMI (Embedded display and key pad)
b The wireless features (Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity).
When the currents fall below 20 % of the rated current, the internal current supply is not enough to ensure the
proper operation of the MicroLogic X control unit.
The internal voltage supply through the VPS module or an external 24 V DC power supply is required to ensure
the operation of all the functions processed by MicroLogic X with the specified performances.
The following 24 V DC supplies are recommended
b The external 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply with or without an additional battery module
b The Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 (24 V DC, 5 A , 120 W) or ABL8 RPS 24030 (24 V DC, 3 A, 72 W)
power supplies.
The input voltage of the VPS module is limited to 600 V. The module is directly connected to the internal pick up
voltage on the bottom side of the circuit breaker. For voltage above 600 V the VPS module shall be supplied from
an external voltage by means of the PTE option and voltage transformers.
The external voltage can be picked up either from the top or the bottom side of the circuit breaker.
The MicroLogic X voltage inputs used for the voltage and power measurements are limited to 690 V, taking into
account the maximum input voltage of the VPS module. The PTE option with external voltage transformers shall
consequently be selected for the following situations:
b Applications > 690 V without VPS module
b Applications >600 V with VPS module.
To maintain the operation of the earth leakage protection for any load situations, the MicroLogic 7.0 X is delivered
with the VPS power supply module.
When the circuit breaker is open or not energized after tripping or during setting, commissioning, testing or
maintenance, the VPS module is not supplied. The possible solutions to supply power to the MicroLogic X are
the following:
b An external 24 V DC
b A PC through the mini USB port
b An external mobile portable battery connected on the mini USB port .
MicroLogic X is also equipped with an internal unit battery dedicated to the supply of the trip cause LEDs and the
internal real-time clock. It allows the user to read and identify the trip cause when the breaker trips. The battery is
lithium type. Its condition can be checked by pressing the test button on the front of the MicroLogic X control unit.
An alarm is issued when the voltage of the battery reaches its low level.
When EIFE, IFE or IFM communication modules, I/O modules or FDM128 display unit are installed, an external
24 V DC power supply is mandatory to supply power to these devices.
The XF, MX, MN, XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag voltage release and the electric motor MCH require a
power supply separate from the MicroLogic X power supply.
The optional protections provided by the optional digital modules require the MicroLogic X control unit to be
supplied by an external 24 V DC power supply.

B-28
www.se.com
Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit
Power supply

Recommended selection of alternative power sources B

in different situations
Situation Purpose VPS External PC Portable
24 V DC supply Battery
power
supply
When the circuit Ensure the performance
breaker is of protections,
energized, but the measurements,
current is below communication,
20 % of the rated diagnosis, HMI, wireless
current features
When the circuit Retrieve information
breaker is opened through MicroLogic HMI
or not energized Retrieve information
through Bluetooth
During setting, Perform all relevant
commissioning, actions
testing and
maintenance
When IFE/EIFE, Power these devices
I/O, IFM or
FDM128
are installed
Note: Please refer to accessory chapter for more details concerning VPS module,
external 24 V DC supply, portable battery
MicroLogic X EIFE IFE I/O module FDM128
without with
M2C/ M2C/
ESM ESM Circuit breaker

DB421352.ai
top side
Power 250 300 100 150 165 283
comsumption Voltage
(mA) 24 V DC transformer

Voltage measurement inputs PTE

option
The PTE option can be connected either on the top side or on the bottom side of the
circuit breaker.
The power source can indifferently be connected on the top side or on the bottom
side of the circuit breaker.
Consequently, when the power source and the PTE option are connected on the or Micrologic X

same side of the circuit breaker, the MicroLogic X control unit is energized as soon as
the power source is live, whatever the position of the circuit breaker (open or closed).
Internal
bottom VPS
The possible VT ratios are the following: connection
b Primary range:
v Min value: 100 V
v Max value 1250 V
b Secondary range: Circuit breaker
bottom side
v Min value: 100 V
v Max value: 690 V. Note: PTE option connected on the top side of the circuit
v Recommended values: 220-400 V breaker. It can also be connected on the bottom side.
b Power u 10 VA.

B-29
 Select your MicroLogic X Control Unit www.se.com

B-30
www.se.com

Customize your MicroLogic X

with Digital Modules

Overview of digital modules................................................C-2

Optional protections................................................................C-4
ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection ................C-5
ANSI 81 - Under/over frequency protection...................C-6
ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection.................C-7
ANSI 51 - IDMTL overcurrent protection ........................C-8
ANSI 67 - Directional overcurrent protection.................C-9 C
ANSI 51N/51G - Ground Fault Alarm ............................ C-10
ANSI 51N/51G - IDMT Ground Fault Protection ........ C-11
ERMS - Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings..... C-12
Energy per phase.................................................................. C-13
Individual harmonics analysis ......................................... C-14
Power restoration assistant .............................................. C-15
MasterPacT operation assistant ..................................... C-16
Waveform capture on trip event ..................................... C-17
IEC 61850 for MasterPacT MTZ...................................... C-18
Modbus legacy dataset....................................................... C-19

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

C-1
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

Overview of digital modules

15 optional digital modules to digitally customize MicroLogic X.

Optional digital modules can be ordered by contacting your
Schneider Electric representative or Schneider Electric Customer
Care Center.

C Optional digital modules can be purchased to customize your MicroLogic X control

units that have already been installed in MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers. The
proposed digital modules are dedicated to optional protections, measurement and
Maintenance & diagnostics functionalities.
Electrical contractors and facility managers can upgrade the install base during
operational phase of product life cycle, according to new requirements, anytime,
without changing the hardware or disrupting operations.
The MicroLogic X control unit firmware greater than or equal V004.000.XXX is
compatible with the 15 proposed digital modules.

MicroLogic X control unit firmware and digital modules compatibility

Firmware MicroLogic Commercial

Digital Module
compatibility 2.0 X 5.0 X 6.0 X 7.0 X Reference
Energy per Phase for MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850002
Wave form capture on trip event MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850003
Power restoration assistant for MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850004
MasterPacT operation assistant for MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850005
Individual harmonics analysis for MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850006
ANSI 51N/51G - Ground Fault Alarm MicroLogic X V004.000.XXX LV850007
ERMS - Energy reduction maintenance settings MicroLogic X V004.000.XXX LV850009
ANSI 32P - Reverse power protection MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850011
ANSI 27/59 - Under/over voltage MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850012
ANSI 81- Under/over frequency protection V004.000.XXX LV850013
ANSI 67 - Directional overcurrent V004.000.XXX LV850015
ANSI 51 - IDMTL - DT/SIT/VIT/EIT/HVF V004.000.XXX LV850037
ANSI 50N-TD/51G - IDMT Ground Fault overcurrent protection V005.000.XXX - - LV850038
Legacy dataset MicroLogic X V003.012.XXX LV850045
IEC 61850 data model V004.000.XXX LV850046

Compatible

C-2
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
Overview of digital modules
DB421338.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK

C
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A Maintenance
Protection Measurement
& diagnostics

Maintenance
Protection Measurement
& diagnostics

Secure uptime,
Increase people Monitor energy
plan maintenance and
& property protection & power quality reduce downtime

Optional protections Cost Management Power outage

 NSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage

A  nergy per Phase
E  ower restoration assistant
P
> see page C-5 > see page C-13 > see page C-15

ANSI 81 - Under/Over frequency Power Quality  asterPacT operation assistant

M
> see page C-6 > see page C-16
Individual harmonics analysis
 NSI 32P - Reverse active power
A > see page C-14  ave form capture on trip event
W
> see page C-7 > see page C-17

ANSI 51 - IDMTL overcurrent Communication

protection
IEC 61850 for MasterPacT MTZ
> see page C-8
> see page C-18
ANSI 67 - Directional overcurrent
 odbus legacy dataset
M
> see page C-9
> see page C-19
 NSI 51N/51G - Ground Fault
A
Alarm
> see page C-10

ANSI 51N/51G - IDMT Ground

Fault Protection
> see page C-11

ERMS - Energy Reduction

Maintenance Settings
> see page C-12
C-3
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

Optional protections

The MicroLogic X control unit can be customized with optional protections without operation disruption and without
additional hardware.
The optional protections: undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, overfrequency, reverse active power, ground-
fault alarm and, ground fault protection. Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings allow to improve the monitoring and
the operation of electrical networks. They are generally used in abnormal or critical situations to initiate appropriate
actions to safeguard the operation of electrical installations.

Optional protections are available whatever the type of MicroLogic X control unit
PB119220.eps

selected. These protections require the MicroLogic X control unit to be supplied by

an external 24 V DC power supply.
C Each of the optional protections has an adjustable time-delay. The time-delay starts
as soon as the protection picks up. Each of the optional protections has the following
protection settings parameters:
b Mode
ON: Protection is enabled
OFF: Protection is disabled
b Action
Trip : tripping order shall be sent to the tripping voltage release in order to open
the breaker
Alarm: no tripping order, alarm only
b Inhib
Inhibition disable: optional protection cannot be inhibited
Inhibition enable: optional protection can be inhibited by using an input of the IO
module. The inhibition inhibits all the optional protections that have the inhibition
setting enabled and therefore the operate event shall not be generated.
Each of the optional protections generates the following events:
b When set in “alarm” mode:
v Start event when the protection picks up
v Operate event when its associated time-delay elapses
b When set in “trip” mode:
v Start event when the protection picks up
v Operate event when its associated time-delay elapses
v Trip order event when the circuit breaker tripping voltage release (MITOP) activates.
The start event is generated even if the protection is inhibited. The operate event and
the trip order event are generated only when the protection is not inhibited.
Each of the optional protections can be set as follows:
b Smartphone running ExcoStruxure Power device via Bluetooth
b From a PC running EcoStruxure Power Commission.

C-4
 www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection

The voltage in electrical installations must be maintained within accepted operating levels to minimize the risk of
damage to motor loads, sensitive electronics, and to ensure the proper operation and performance of all loads.
Generally the allowed rated operating range of voltage is ±10 %. The ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection
digital module allow the system voltage to be permanently monitored. If the voltage level of an installation goes out
of its acceptable limits, the information delivered by this digital module can be used to initiate appropriate action to
restore good operating conditions in the installation.

Description
The ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection digital module is used to generate either an alarm or a trip. For each
undervoltage protection, ANSI 27 and overvoltage protection, ANSI 59, we can choose to monitor either the three
phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31, or the three phase-to-neutral voltages V1N, V2N, V3N. C
The selection applies for both under and overvoltage protections. It is not possible to select phase-to-phase voltages for
undervoltage monitoring and phase-to-neutral voltages for overvoltage monitoring and vice versa. There are four
independant protections : 27-1, 27-2 and 59-1, 59-2. For 27-1 and 59-1 the protection picks up when one of the three
monitored voltages reaches its upper or lower limit. For 27-2 and 59-2 the protection picks up when the three monitored
voltages have reached their upper or lower limit. Under and overvoltage protections operate according to a definite time
characteristic. One adjustable time-delay is associated to each of the four protections 27-1, 27-2, 59-1, 59-2.
The time-delay starts as soon as the protection picks up. Each protection generates the start, operate and trip events as
described page C-4 . When the undervoltage protection is set in tripping mode, the voltage measurement must be
performed on the power source side to allow the circuit breaker closing. As standard, the MicroLogic X voltage input is
directly connected to the internal pickup voltage on the bottom side of the circuit breaker.
Details of required power connections :
b If the circuit breaker is bottom-fed, the internal pickup voltage is suitable for undervoltage protection and circuit
breaker closing.
b If the circuit breaker is top-fed, an external voltage input is required. The PTE option must be selected to perform the
voltage measurement on the power source side.
The protection trips if all below conditions are met:
b The value of voltage exceeds the setting
b The associated timer is elapsed.

Benefits
The undervoltage and overvoltage protections are suitable for generator use.
The permanent monitoring of phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltages enables appropriate action to be initiated to
safeguard the operation of the installation during abnormal or critical situations, for example: load shedding, source
change-over, and emergency generator starting.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Under Voltage ANSI 27
27-1 Voltage setting (Vmin1) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V
V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when one of the three monitored voltages reaches the setting
Time setting (tVmin1) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %
DB430643.eps

V 27-2 Voltage setting (Vmin2) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when the three monitored voltages have reached the setting
Time setting (tVmin2) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Over Voltage ANSI 59
59-1 Voltage setting (Vmax1) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V
DB430644.eps

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when one of the three monitored voltages reaches the setting
Time setting (tVmax1) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01 s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

V 59-2 Voltage setting (Vmax2) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when the three monitored voltages have reached the setting
Time setting (tVmax2) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01 s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

C-5
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

ANSI 81 - Under/over frequency protection

The frequency in electrical installations must be maintained within accepted operating levels to minimize the risk
of damage to motor loads, sensitive electronics, and to ensure the proper operation and performance of all loads.
Generally, the allowed rated operating range of frequency is ±10 %. The ANSI 81- Under/Over frequency protection
digital module allows the frequency to be continuously monitored. If the frequency level of an installation goes out
of its acceptable limits, the information delivered by this digital module can be used to initiate appropriate action to
restore good operating conditions in the installation.

Description
PB119271.eps

C
The ANSI 81 – Under/Over frequency protection digital module is used to generate
either an alarm or a trip. There are two independent protections: underfrequency
(ANSI 81U) and overfrequency (ANSI 81O). The protection picks up when the
frequency reaches its upper or lower limit. Underfrequency and overfrequency
protections operate according to a definite time characteristic. One adjustable
time-delay is associated to each protection. The time-delay starts as soon as the
protection picks up. Each protection generates the start, operate and trip events as
described page C-4. When the underfrequency protection is set in trip action, the
voltage measurement must be performed on the power source side to allow the
circuit breaker closing. As standard, the MicroLogic X voltage input is directly
connected to the internal pickup voltage on the bottom side of the circuit breaker.
Details of required power connections:
b If the circuit breaker is bottom-fed, the internal pickup voltage is suitable for
underfrequency protection and circuit breaker closing.
b If the circuit breaker is top-fed, an external voltage input is required. The PTE
option must be selected to perform the voltage measurement on the power
source side.
The protection trips if all below conditions are met:
b The value of frequency exceeds the setting
b The associated timer is elapsed.

Benefits
Underfrequency and overfrequency protections are suitable for generator use.
The continuous monitoring of frequency enables appropriate action to be initiated to
safeguard the operation of the installation during abnormal or critical situations, for
example: load shedding, source change-over, and emergency generator starting.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Underfrequency ANSI 81U
Frequency (Fmin) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 40 to 65 Hz by step of 0.1 Hz
Time setting (tFmin) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
DB432619.eps

(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

F (Hz)

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Overfrenquency ANSI 81O
Frequency (Fmax) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 40 to 70 Hz by step of 0.1 Hz
Time setting (tFmax) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
DB432620.eps

(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

F (Hz)

C-6
 www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection

In case of loss of its prime mover (steam turbine, gas turbine or diesel engine), a synchronous power generator
connected to an external network or operating in parallel with other generators becomes a synchronous motor and
drives the prime mover with a potential risk of mechanical damage. The ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection
is used to detect such abnormal operating conditions and to disconnect the generator from other power sources.
This digital module can also be used to monitor the amount of active power exchanged between two parts of an
electrical network, with associated alarms, load shedding or tripping as soon as the flow of active power in the
selected direction exceeds the set value.

Description
C

PB119222_L63.eps
The ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection digital module is used to generate
either an alarm or a trip. This digital module calculates the active power with the
RMS values of the voltages and currents. A time delay is associated with the
protection. The time-delay starts as soon as the protection picks up. The protection
generates the start, operate and trip events as described page C-4. The positive
sign of the active power is defined by setting. The same sign is used for active power
measurement. By default the MicroLogic X assigns the sign + to the active power
when the transit of the active power circulates from the top to the bottom of the circuit
breaker. This assumes that the power supply feeding the installation is connected to
the top of the circuit breaker (top- fed breaker).
The sign – is assigned when the transit circulates from the bottom to the top of the
circuit breaker. When the power supply is connected to the bottom of the circuit
breaker (bottom- fed breaker) the sign assigned by default (power sign parameter)

DB436527.ai
can be changed with MicroLogic HMI, EcoStruxure Power Commission software or
Modbus command;
The protection trips if all below conditions are met:
b The active power is negative
b The value of active power exceeds the setting
b The timer is elapsed
The recommended settings are 2 % to 6 % of the rated power for turbines
and 8 % to 15 % for diesel engines

Benefits
Monitoring of the mode of operation of a synchronous power generator connected to
an external network or running in parallel with other generators.
Tripping as soon as the generator operates as a synchronous motor, driving its prime
mover.
Monitoring of the active power exchanged between separate parts of an electrical
network.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Q Reverse active power ANSI 32P
DB430645.eps

Active power (Rp) Accuracy: ±10 % 50kW to 5000 kW by step of 10 kW

Time setting (tRp) Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.05 s
(with time delay set to 0)
accuracy: ±2 %
-Ps Ps

C-7
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

ANSI 51 - IDMTL overcurrent protection

The ANSI 49RMS/51 long-time overcurrent protection is provided as standard with any type of MicroLogic X control
unit. This long time overcurrent protection meets the IEC 60947-2 standard and covers long time overcurrent selectivity
for most electrical distribution applications. However, with some upstream protection device such as medium voltage
fuse, it does not cover long time overcurrent selectivity. By selecting another shape of long time tripping curve such as
an IDMTL (Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag) tripping curve, it may be possible to achieve such selectivity.

Description
The ANSI 51 – IDMTL overcurrent protection Digital Module is used to generate either an alarm or a trip.
C This digital module provides overcurrent protection based on one of the selected IDMTL tripping curves:
b DT: Definite Time (time-independant characteristics)
b SIT: Standard Inverse Time curve (I0.02t)
b VIT: Very Inverse Time curve (It)
b EIT: Extremely Inverse Time curve (I²t)
b HVF: High Voltage Fuse curve (I4t)
IDMTL overcurrent protection (ANSI 51) is based on the true RMS current. This protection is implemented
independently for each phase and the neutral. This protection is an overcurrent time dependent protection (except
when Definite Time has been selected).
IDMTL overcurrent protection (ANSI 51) has definite time characteristics described page B-12. The protection
generates the start, operate and trip events as described page C-4.
The protection trips if all below conditions are met:
b the value of the current exceeds 1.05 x IDMTL Ir setting
b the timer (IDMTL tr) is elapsed (timer value is given for an overload of 6 x IDMTL Ir).

Benefits
The addition of one of the IDMTL tripping curves to the existing long-time overcurrent protection may facilitate the
selectivity with an upstream protection device.
b Selectivity with an upstream low voltage protection relay where the long time protection is set at very low level
by using SIT or VIT tripping curves.
b Selectivity with upstream fuses (High Voltage Fuse) by using HVF tripping curve.
b Protection with certain types of loads where the level of short circuit is very low by using DT tripping curve.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

IDMTL ANSI 51
Current setting (A) IDMTL Ir 0.4 In to 1.5 In, step 1 A
Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x IDMTL Ir
Time setting (s) IDMTL tr 0.1 s to 24 s, step 0.1 s (for an overload of 6 x Ir)
Accuracy: 0 to -20%

Long-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 49RMS/51) remains active when IDMTL overcurrent protection (ANSI 51)
is configured. Check the MicroLogic X user guide, DOCA0102EN (chapter setting guidelines) for
recommendations on how to maintain consistency between settings.
10000.0 10000.0

1000.0 1000.0

100.0 100.0

10.0 10.0

1.0 1.0

0.1 0.1
IDMTL IDMTL
Standard Long time Standard Long time

0 0
0.1 1 10 100 0.1 1 10 100

C-8
 www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
ANSI 67 - Directional overcurrent protection

For low voltage installation with multiple power sources running in parallel, the standard overcurrent protection is
insufficient to achieve selectivity. In the example below, in case of short circuit on the transformer side, without the
directional overcurrent protection, both circuit breaker will trip and therefore the busbar is no more powered. With the
directional overcurrent protection, it is possible to achieve selectivity thanks to the detection of the direction of the
short circuit and therefore the busbar will keep powered

Description
The directional overcurrent protection (ANSI 67) Digital Module is used to generate
either an alarm or a trip. There are two independant protections : reverse direction
overcurrent and forward direction overcurrent. Per convention, reverse direction is
C
given for an overcurrent flowing from the bottom connection to the top connection of
the MasterPacT MTZ. Forward direction is given for an overcurrent flowing from the
top connection to the bottom connection of the MasterPacT MTZ. Directional
overcurrent protection detects the direction of the short-circuit current and is an
overcurrent time-independent protection.
The Directional overcurrent protection requires the MicroLogic X control unit to be
supplied by an external 24 V dc power supply. The protection generates the start,
operate and trip events as described page C-4.
The protection trips if all below conditions are met:
b The value of the current exceeds the setting (Ifw or Irv)
b The associated timer (tifw or tirv) is elapsed
b The direction of the short-circuit current is detected:
v From the top connection to the bottom connection of the circuit breaker:
forward directional overcurrent protection trips
v From the bottom connection to the top connection of the circuit breaker:
reverse directional overcurrent protection trips

Benefits
Avoid black-out in case of short circuit on the source side in low voltage installation
with multiple power sources running in parallel.
Avoid black-out in case of short circuit on the bus bar side in low voltage installation
with multiple power sources running in parallel and with a bus tie.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Forward Directional ANSI 67
overcurrent
Current setting (A) Ifw 0.5 x In to 10 x In
Time setting (s) tIfw 0.1 s to 4 s, step 0.1 s
Reverse Directional ANSI 67
overcurrent
Current setting (A) Irv 0.5 x In to 10 x In
Time setting (s) tIrv 0.1 s to 4 s, step 0.1 s

Example: 2 Sources - No Tie

Fault in A1:
DB432936.ai

T1 T2 The short-circuit is fed by T2.

A1 Without directional overcurrent protection, Q1 and Q2 shall trip and the busbar is no
Q1 RV Q2 RV more powered.
MTZ MTZ Goal:
FW FW b Trip Q1 in order to clear fault.
b Keep the Q2 closed in order to keep the busbar powered.

Q3 Solution:
MTZ Implement directional overcurrent protection on Q1 and Q2 in order to detect reverse
direction short-circuit.
Implementation:
Reverse directional overcurrent protection on Q1 shall clear the fault and must trip
before the short time protection on Q2 in order to keep Q2 closed.

C-9
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

ANSI 51N/51G - Ground Fault Alarm

A phase- to- earth fault can be the result of the slow degradation of an insulating component of electrical equipment
or the presence of a foreign body inside the equipment. For such events the fault resistance can be significantly high-
enough to maintain the earth fault current below the settings of the phase- to- earth fault protections. No tripping
occurs and, the installation remains energized with a potential risk of local over-heating and damage. The ANSI
51N/51G - Ground-fault alarm digital module with appropriate settings can pick up such critical resistive earth- fault,
allowing the maintenance staff to take appropriate action to restore good operating conditions in the installation.

Description
C
PB119221_63.eps

The ANSI 51N/51G - Ground-fault alarm digital module is used to generate alarm
only. The earth fault alarm and earth-leakage alarm functions operate as the earth
fault and earth-leakage protections, using the same sensors. They are, however,
independent from these protections and have their own settings.
When the Ground-fault alarm digital module is installed in MicroLogic 2.0 X,
MicroLogic 5.0 X or MicroLogic 6.0 X control units, the earth fault alarm is
automatically activated. When installed in the MicroLogic 7.0 X control unit,
the earth-leakage alarm is automatically activated.
The earth fault current is detected in two ways:
b By summation of either the three phase currents or the three phase currents and
the neutral;
b By means of the external sensor SGR installed on the link connecting to the earth
the neutral point of the power transformer feeding the installation. The SGR
sensor must be connected to the MicroLogic X control unit through the MDGF
interface module.
The earth-leakage current is detected by means of the rectangular sensor
encompassing the three phases or the three phases and the neutral.

Benefits
Early detection of resistive earth-faults with fault currents increasing slowly up to the
settings of the phase-to-earth fault protections.
The alarms allow the maintenance staff to take appropriate action at the right time in
order to safeguard the installation.

MicroLogic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X

Earth fault alarm ANSI 51N
Pick up (Ig alarm) Accuracy: ±10 % Ig = 0.2 In to In by step of 1A
Time setting (tg alarm) 1 to 10 s by step of 0.1 s

MicroLogic 7.0 X
Earth leakage alarm ANSI 51G
Sensitivity (IΔn alarm) Accuracy: Complies with IΔn = 0.5 to 22 A by step of 0.1 A
IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex B
Time setting (Δt alarm) 1 to 10 s by step of 0.1 s

MicroLogic 7.0 X
Energy per Phase ANSI 51N/51G
IDMT Ground Fault Protection (contenu
Clarisse)

C-10
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
ANSI 51N/51G - IDMT Ground Fault Protection

IDMT ground fault protection provides protection against phase-to-ground fault, w ​ hich is more sensitive than
protection based on phase current only. ​It is generally used in TN-S systems but could also be used in other earthing
systems.​

IDMT ground fault protection is based on the summation of the phases and neutral current.

The IDMT ground fault protection Digital Module provides ground fault protection based on a High Voltage Fuse
(HVF) tripping curve (I4t), providing the ability to be selectively coordinated with fuses.

DB446010.ai
Description MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

IDMT ground fault protection is available when the IDMT Ground-fault Digital
Module is installed on the MicroLogic control unit. IDMT GF
Protection Curve
IDMT GF

IDMT ground-fault protection requires an external 24 V DC power supply. Alarm

ON I4t

Alarm Ig (A) 600

Inhibit by I/O IgMax (A) 1200

The ground fault current Igf is calculated by summation of the instantaneous phases OFF Tg (s) 0.40

OK OK
and neutral current according to the circuit breaker configuration, as shown in the
following table. As a result, it does not need an additional sensor to measure the
ground current.

Circuit breaker Igf ground-fault current

configuration TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op. Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Ii I n

3P Igf = I1 + I2 + I3
Test Reset Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X

4P Igf = I1 + I2 + I3 + IN ID: ID:

IgMax 1989421527520002LV847604 1989421527520002LV847604

3P + ENCT Igf = I1 + I2 + I3 + IN (ENCT) 0 Igf

DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A In 1600 A
The IDMT ground fault protection threshold Ig sets the level of ground-fault current at
which the circuit breaker detects a ground fault that can lead to a trip, based on a
High Voltage Fuse (HVF) tripping curve (I4t).
Setting Unit Range Step Factory Accuracy
The time delay tg sets the minimum length of time during which the circuit breaker setting
carries a ground-fault within the IDMT ground fault protection threshold Ig range. IDMT ON/OFF OFF
mode
The IDMT ground fault protection threshold IgMax sets the level of ground-fault
current at which the circuit breaker trips with the time delay tg as a constant time IDMT Alarm/Trip Alarm
protection. action
IDMT ON/OFF OFF
IDMT ground fault protection is based on the true RMS current of phases and
inhibit
neutral.
Ig A 0.2-1 x In 1A 1 x In +/- 10%
In order to trip on an intermittent electrical fault, the control unit accumulates the IgMax A Ig-5 x In 1A 2 x In +/- 10%
intermittent currents in the ground-fault tripping range that do not last long enough to
trigger a trip. In this case the tripping time is progressively reset at each intermittent tg s 0-0.8 0.05 0.4
electrical fault and may lead to shorter tripping times than those set.
Note: If IgMax = Ig, protection is constant time.
The setting tg = 0 is sensitive.
Benefits One measurement above Ig will generate a trip.

The IDMT Ground-fault digital module provides protection against phase-to-ground

faults, which can be more sensitive that protection based on phase-to-phase
DB421316.ai

currents only. It is generally used in TN-S systems but can be used in other earthing
systems as well.

C-11
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

ERMS - Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings

Under specific circumstances, qualified professionals may need to access and work near energized equipment to
perform testing, troubleshooting, and diagnostics. They are thereby subject to the risk of internal arc fault which is
a growing concern. Current research shows that up to 80% of reported electrical injuries are caused by an electrical
arc. In this context, the safety of personnel working on electrical power distribution systems has received increasing
attention from a number of regulatory organizations in recent years [1].
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers with the “Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings” digital module provide an answer
to this issue. The ERMS function, when engaged , allows the MicroLogic X control unit to operate faster.
Should an internal arc fault occur downstream to MasterPacT MTZ , the reduced fault clearing time allows a decrease in
the amount of energy generated by the electrical arc, and may limit the risk of injury.

C Description

DB432840.ai
The ERMS function is used to reduce the LSIG protection settings in order to trip
faster when an internal arc fault occurs. It is acknowledged as one of the recognized
MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

solutions to improve the protection of workers against internal arc-fault caused by

faulty electrical equipment, abnormal environmental conditions, lack of maintenance,
ingress of mice. It complies with the recommendations issued by the regulatory
organisations [1] dealing with this concern.
As soon as the ERMS digital module is installed on MicroLogic X control unit, the
ERMS function is enabled, but not engaged. Additional steps are then required to set
the appropriate ERMS LSIG settings and to engage the ERMS function.
ERMS settings is an additional LSIG tripping curve in addition to dual settings.
ERMS LSIG settings can be customized on site by means of a smartphone via
Bluetooth, or with EcoStruxure Power Commission software running on a PC.
Customization of ERMS settings with EcoStruxure Power Commission software or a
TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
smartphone is password-protected.
Ir Isd Ig Op. Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

As soon as ERMS is engaged, the ERMS LSIG factory settings are automatically 7.0 X 7.0 X

replaced by the ERMS LSIG customized settings: ID:

1989421527520002LV847604
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

ERMS can be engaged/disengaged through the Ecostruxure Power Device App app
(there is a digital lock between Ecostruxure Power Device App app and MicroLogic X DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE

control unit). ERMS can also be engaged/ disengaged through an external lockable DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST

selector switch with the additional dedicated ESM hardware module (ERMS Switch In 1600 A In 1600 A

Module) [3]. ESM harware module requires the MicroLogic X control unit to be supplied
by an external 24 V DC power supply.
When ERMS is engaged, the corresponding information is made available as ERMS Range Factory
follows: settings settings
b On the MicroLogic X front face with the ERMS blue LED [2]

b On the MicroLogic X embedded display with the blue backlight

Ir ERMS Same as L protection In
b On an external light with the additional dedicated ESM hardware module
b On a PC with EcoStruxure Power Commission software tr ERMS Same as L protection 0.5
b Through the customer communications network (Ethernet or Modbus SL) Isd ERMS Same as S protection 1.5 ir
tsd ERMS Same as S protection 0
Benefits li ERMS Same as I protection 2
The ERMS function complies with the regulations concerning the protection of Ii ERMS Same as I protection fast
personnel against the effects of internal arc fault, when under specified condition tripping
it becomes necessary to work close to, or in the vicinity of, energized electrical mode
equipment.
ERMS engaged status is visible at a distance thanks to the MicroLogic X HMI blue Ig ERMS Same as G protection 0.2
backlight. ERMS can be engaged/disengaged with your personnal smartphone. tg ERMS Same as G protection 0

[1]
b NEC Section 240.87 – Acceptable Methods for Arc Energy Reduction
DB421316.ai


b NFPA 70E: National Fire Protection Association. Standard for Electrical Safety in the
Workplace where there are recognized hazardeous situations when working on energized
electrical equipment.

b IEEE 1584: Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations provides guidelines for
conducting a formal arc flash study
b EN 50 110-1: Operation of electrical installations - General requirements
[2] ERMS LSIG factory settings.
[3] When the ESM hardware module is used, the M2C programmable contacts cannot be
installed.

C-12
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
Energy per phase

The energy per phase digital module enables the analysis of energy consumption per phase. It is especially
recommended for low voltage installations having a large amount of unbalanced loads.

Description
At the point of measurement, this function allows to calculate and to display the
imported and exported energy on each phase of the network. It calculates and
displays active, reactive and apparent energy per phase. It also provides the total
active, reactive and apparent energy (as standard).

Benefits
Follows energy per phase when having large amount of unbalanced loads in low
C
voltage installations, or when different usages or tenants are supplied on each
phase.

Note: Energy per phase digital module can be installed on 4 poles MasterPacT MTZ circuit
breaker or 3 poles circuit breaker as well with the neutral connected to the VN terminal of
MicroLogic X and ENVT=Y configuration.
DB421339.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Range Range Unit EHMI FDM128 EcoStruxure
min acc max acc Power
Commission
Smartphone
EIFE
IFE, IFM
Active energy IN per phase Ep IN, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Active energy OUT per phase Ep OUT, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Total active energy per phase [1]
Ep phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Reactive energy IN per phase Eq IN, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 2% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Reactive energy OUT per phase Eq OUT, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 2% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Total reactive energy per phase [1]
Eq phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Total apparent energy per phase Es phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kVAh
[1] IN+OUT or IN-OUT according to setting. Available
Not available
C-13
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

Individual harmonics analysis

Harmonic pollution in electrical systems is generated by non-linear loads, for example, power electronic equipment
(drives, motor starters, rectifiers, UPS), computers and data processing equipment, arc furnaces, welding machines,
lighting (discharge lamps, fluorescent lamps). The harmonics have instantaneous and long-term effects.
The instantaneous effects include for example :
b Disturbance of the operation of power electronic equipment,
b Generation of pulsating mechanical torques, vibrations and noise in asynchronous motors,
b Additional errors in metering devices,
b Interference on communication and control circuits.
The long-term effects include mainly:
b Additional losses and heating in power transformers, rotating machines, capacitors and power cables,
b Mechanical fatigue and premature aging of motors.
C The effects of harmonics always have an economic impact resulting from the additional costs linked to:
b Degradation of the performance of electrical installations
b Degradation in the energy efficiency due to increased losses
b Premature aging and oversizing of the electrical equipment.
The limit values below are taken into account by EMC standard IEC 61000-2-4:
THDV < 5% Insignificant deformation of the voltage waveform: No significant risk of malfunction.
5% < THDV < 8% Significant deformation of the voltage waveform: Risk of over-heating and malfunction.
THDV > 8% Major deformation of the voltage waveform: Very high risk of malfunction if the installation has not been
specifically calculated and sized with this restriction in mind.
The Individual harmonics analysis digital module allows real-time monitoring of harmonics affecting the voltages
and currents of an electrical power system. If harmonic pollution reaches unacceptable limits it helps you to select
appropriate corrective solutions.

Description
THDV and THDI are available as standard. Individual harmonics of voltages and
currents up to rank 40 are available with the Individual harmonics analysis digital
module. They are calculated by the MicroLogic X control unit according to the
measurements methods specified in IEC 61000-4-30 (Testing and measurement
techniques - Power quality measurement methods). The calculation of individual
harmonics is performed every 200 ms. MicroLogic X control units provide the average
aggregated values of individual harmonics calculated on a time period of 3 s.

Benefits
"Individual harmonics analysis at a glance" on your smart phone.
Easy share with a remote expert thanks to the share function on the smartphone.
Remote individual harmonics analysis thanks to EcoStruxure Power Services.
Real-time monitoring of harmonic pollution enabling appropriate decisions to be
made when unacceptable levels are reached:
b Deep investigation, based on measurements and recordings
b Dedicated studies
b Installation of passive filters
b Installation of active filters.

Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Range Range Unit EHMI FDM128 Smartphone
min acc max acc IFM EIFE
EcoStruxure IFE
Power
Commission
Harmonics of currents
I1, I2, I3, IN Cl II [2] 40 [1] 4000 x 1.2 [1] A
up to rank 40
Harmonics of phase to phase
V12, V23, V31 Cl II [2] 208 690 x 1.2 V
voltage up to rank 40
Harmonics of phase to neutral
V1N, V2N, V3N Cl II [2]
120 400 x 1.2 V
voltage up to rank 40
[1] 40 to 1600 A x1.2 for MTZ1, 40 to 4000 A x1.2 for MTZ2, 80 to 6300 A x1.2 for MTZ3.
[2] According IEC/EN 61000-4-7. Available
Not available

C-14
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
Power restoration assistant

Embedded intelligence in LV circuit breakers may help the user to recover the supply in a quick manner.
The optional digital modules dedicated to power restoration and MasterPacT operation bring assistance to operators
for fault analysis and reduction of the consequences of power outages.

Description
The true cost of The function aims to assist maintenance operator on power restoration procedure,
a power disruption by displaying information on the event and the circuit breaker. It helps the operator to
determine potential cause of event like opening, manual trip or electrical trip, or loss
of supply. It also provides guidance for potential solution to restore the power.

Can you Benefits C
afford it ? This function aims to reduce downtime of power supply at critical load (Mean Time To
Repair) after a trip, an opening, or a loss of upstream power supply.
DB421885.ai

Hospital
100000 euros per hour
+ endangered lives MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK

Data centers
750000 euros per minute
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

Semi conductor
manufacturing plant
35 million euros per hour

C-15
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

MasterPacT operation assistant

In many critical installations the cost of a power interruption may exceed several hundred thousand euros per hour.
Human lives may also be endangered. Most of the time the quick restoration of power is essential after tripping.

Description
This function aims to assist the operator in reclosing and opening the circuit breaker
by delivering instructions like reset (if applicable) or charge spring (if applicable).
It displays circuit breaker status like ready to close, voltage release status or spring
status. This is a real onsite guidance. Full benefit of the function is given when

C
installed with the diagnostic and communicating voltage release (MX diag&com, XF
diag&com).

Benefits
This function allows to close and open the circuit breaker from a distance of few
meters.
It reduces reclosing time, without the need for documentation and lengthy training.

Yesterday, with MasterPacT NT/NW Today, with MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3
DB421340.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home

+
Quickview
Measures
6.5
8 ! Alarms & H...
Maintenan...

OK

+
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

Troubleshooting DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

C-16
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules
Waveform capture on trip event

After any tripping initiated by long-time, short time, instantaneous, earth fault protection (LSIG) and optional
protection the waveform digital module allows to display the interrupted phase and neutral currents.

Description
The Waveform capture on trip event Digital Module provides both short waveform
capture and long waveform capture.
The short waveform capture function records five cycles of phase currents and
neutral currents (four cycles before and one after the trip event) with a sampling
period of 512 μs.The short waveform capture function records the digital status of
the following:
b TRIP event: activation of the circuit breaker tripping voltage release (MITOP)
b SDE: fault-trip indication contact
b OPEN: open position of circuit breaker
C
b ZSI-out and ZSI-in: ZSI signals
The long waveform capture function records 50 cycles of phase currents, neutral
currents, phase-to neutral voltage and the frequency (35 cycles before and 15 after the
trip event) with a sampling period of 625 μs. The long waveform capture function records
the digital status of the OPERATE event when the associated time delay elapses.
The waveform capture is a COMTRADE (Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange) file. Refer to the IEEE C37.111 or IEC 60255-24 standard for more
information on the COMTRADE file format.
Note: Wave Form Capture function requires the MicroLogic X control unit to be supplied by an
external 24 V DC power supply.

Benefits
The automatic recording of waveform helps the maintenance operator to analyze
the trip event in detail. At a glance, it helps to understand the nature of the trip event,
the gravity of the trip event (with amplitude and duration) and the potential damage
on the installation. Digital signals, like SDE / Open / ZSI, support analysis of global
behavior of the circuit breaker in the power system (response time, selectivity).

MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3

DB445883.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

C-17
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

IEC 61850 for MasterPacT MTZ

IEC 61850 is an Ethernet-based protocol designed for electrical substations. It is a standardized method of
communications, developed to support integrated systems composed of multi-vendor, self-describing IEDs
(Intelligent Electronic Device) that are networked together to perform monitoring, metering, real-time protection
and control. IEC 61850 is gaining wide adoption in Critical application such as O&G, data centers.Thanks to
the IEC 61850 digital module, MasterPacT MTZ natively fits into such systems.

Description
C

DB446011.ai
HMI/
The IEC 61850 for MasterPacT MTZ digital module provides MasterPacT MTZ SCADA
circuit breaker data over ethernet network in conformance with IEC 61850 MMS
communication protocol. The installation of this digital module on MicroLogic X
control unit will automatically enable IEC 61850 MMS communication protocol on
IFE or EIFE communication interface in addition to existing Modbus TCP/IP protocol.
The MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker data are: Ethernet
b Class 1 energy metering Network
b Electrical measurements
b Status
b Control.
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Ethernet Ethernet Masterpact

NW40
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Uimp

690/1000V
50kA/1s
12kV

Benefits
Ue peak
Icw 105kA

switch switch
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

The IEC 61850 MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) communication

MasterPacT fixed
protocol helps integrating Low Voltage circuits breakers in Medium Voltage circuit breaker
installation without the need of additional gateway. Communication of Low Voltage
circuit breakers data (class 1 energy metering data, electrical measurements, status
and control) to IEC 61850 supervision systems (EcoStruxure Power Automation Sub- COM
UC1
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

system EPAS) becomes smooth and easy. Network UC1

SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

IEC 61850 for MasterPacT digital module supports IEC61850 Edition 2 protocol
COM

Masterpact
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Masterpact
HA10 12kV

and provides the following logical nodes:

NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Logical Node Description MasterPacT fixed

MasterPacT drawout circuit breaker
CSWI Switch controller. This logical node is used to control circuit
circuit breaker
breakers and switches
GGIO Generic process I/O. For information on how to configure the
GGIO, refer to your I/O module guide.
LLN0 Logical node zero. Contains the data related to the associated
IED.
LPHD Physical device. Contains information related to the physical
device.
MHAI Harmonics. Consists of harmonic values such as THD, K factor,
Crest factor.
MMTR Metering. Consists of the integrated values (energy), primarily for
billing purposes.
MMXU Measurements. Contains per-phase and total current, voltage and
power flow for operational purposes.
PTOC Time overcurrent protection
PIOC Instantaneous Over Current protection
PTOV Overvoltage protection
PTUV Undervoltage protection
PDOP Reverse Power Protection
PTRC Protection trip conditioning.
XCBR Circuit Breaker. Indicates the status of the circuit breaker

C-18
www.se.com
Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules

Modbus legacy dataset

Supervision software for MasterPacT NT/NW circuit breakers uses Modbus drivers that are compatible with legacy
format Modbus registers. MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers provide standard format Modbus registers.
As a result, supervision software for MasterPacT MTZ should use Modbus drivers that are compatible with standard
format Modbus registers. The Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module provides a dataset that is compliant with
the legacy format. This dataset can be used by existing Modbus drivers running supervision software designed for
MasterPacT NT/NW to allow easy integration for installations which include both MasterPacT NT/NW and MasterPacT
MTZ circuit breakers.

Description
The Modbus dataset collects the most useful information for remote supervision C
software in one convenient Modbus table (starting at register 12000 for the legacy
dataset, starting at register 32000 for the standard dataset). This table contains the
following information:
b Circuit breaker status
b Tripping causes
b Real time values (current, voltage, power, energy…)
The user can get the information contained in this table with only two read requests.
As standard, with MicroLogic X control units, the Modbus standard dataset is
available via the following communication interfaces: EIFE, IFE, IFE gateway
and IFM.
As an option, with Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module, the Modbus legacy
dataset is available via the following communication interfaces: EIFE, IFE, IFE
gateway and IFM.
The Modbus legacy dataset is compatible with the MicroLogic control unit of
MasterPacT NT/NW.

Benefits
The Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module allows the system integrator to keep
the same existing Modbus driver within the supervision software.
It allows easy integration for installations with both MasterPacT NT/NW and
MasterPacT MTZ.

C-19
 Customize your Control Unit with Digital Modules www.se.com

C-20
www.se.com

Customize your Circuit Breaker

with Accessories

Overview of accessories.......................................................D-2
Design and installation simplification
Connection........................................................................................ D-4

Operation efficiency................................................................D-8
Signalling.......................................................................................... D-8
Controlling....................................................................................... D-13

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking................................................................ D-22
Circuit protection............................................................................. D-26
Operation and mechanical protection............................................ D-29

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies................................................................................ D-32

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

D-1
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Overview of accessories

Design and installation simplification - connection > On page D-4

Applicable Fixed Drawout
for
Horizontal and vertical rear connection MTZ 1/2/3
Front connection MTZ 1/2/3
Vertical-connection adapters MTZ 1
Cable-lug adapters MTZ 1
Spreaders MTZ 1
Disconnectable front connection adapter MTZ 2/3
Drawout version Interphase barriers MTZ 1/2/3
CC - arc chute cover MTZ 1
Brackets for mounting MTZ 2/3
Operation efficiency - Signalling > On page D-8
OF - ON/OFF indication contacts MTZ 1/2/3
SDE - fault-trip indication contact MTZ 1/2/3
EF - combined connected/closed contacts MTZ 2/3
CE, CD, CT - Carriage switches MTZ 1/2/3
PF - ready-to-close contact MTZ 1/2/3
M2C - Programmable contacts MTZ 1/2/3
ESM - ERMS switch module MTZ 1/2/3

D Fixed version
CDM - mechanical operation counter MTZ1/2/3
Operation efficiency - Controlling
MTZ 1/2/3
> On page D-13
XF - closing voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
XF diag&com - diagnostic and communicating closing voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MX - opening voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MX diag&com - diagnostic and communicating opening voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MN - undervoltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage release MTZ 1/2/3
R - non-adjustable delay unit MTZ 1/2/3
Rr - adjustable delay unit MTZ 1/2/3
Isolation module MTZ 1/2/3
MCH - gear motor MTZ 1/2/3
RES - electrical reset option MTZ 1/2/3
RAR - automatic reset option MTZ 1/2/3
BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Locking and Interlocking > On page D-22
VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking MTZ 1/2/3
VSPO-VCPO - OFF position locking MTZ 1/2/3
Chassis locking in disconnected position by padlock MTZ 1/2/3
VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected position: by keylock MTZ 1/2/3
Optional connected/disconnected/test position locking MTZ 1/2/3
VO - Safety shutters (with padlocking standard) MTZ 1/2/3
VIVC - shutter position indication and locking MTZ 2/3
IPA - cable-type door interlock MTZ 1/2/3
VPEC - door interlock MTZ 1/2/3
VPOC - racking interlock MTZ 1/2/3
IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton MTZ 2/3
V DC - mismatch protection MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Circuit protection > On page D-26
TCE - external sensor for neutral and residual earth fault protection MTZ 1/2/3
SGR - External sensor for source ground return protection MTZ 1/2/3
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Operation protection > On page D-29
DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal MTZ 2/3
KMT - grounding kit MTZ 2/3
People and property safety - Mechanical protection > On page D-29
CB - terminal block shield MTZ 1/2/3
CDP - escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
Power availability and realiability - Power supplies > On page D-32
VPS - Voltage power supply MTZ 1/2/3
External 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply MTZ 1/2/3
BAT - battery module MTZ 1/2/3
Mobile Power Pack by APC MTZ 1/2/3
Spare internal battery MTZ 1/2/3

D-2
 www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Overview of accessories

Mounting versions
MasterPacT circuit breakers are available in two mounting versions: fixed and drawout
The drawout version is prefered in most of the applications due to its following benefits:
b Visible separation of the power contacts via racking out
b Easy and complete access to the device for periodic maintenance
b Possibility of a quick replacement of the device if necessary
MasterPacT MTZ Accessories provide the possibility to further customize the circuit breaker and enhance
functionality at all stages of the lifecycle.
b The comprehensive range of accessories addresses the needs of majority of applications
b Many accessories are common between MasterPacT NT, NW, MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3. In addition, some accessories
are also common between MasterPacT and ComPact ranges. Safety stock can therefore be optimized and less
training is required to master the installation of different ranges of Schneider Electric circuit breakers. The design
of the circuit breaker incorporates the need to simplify installation, last minute changes and future upgrading.

MasterPacT MTZ2/3 drawout version as an example

J K L M N
DB419733_1.ai

O D

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
21
1 OF444 32
31
2 OF1
114 42
41
3 OF1
124 112
4 OF1 122 111
134 121
4 OF1
144 132
2 OF2 142 131
214 141
3 OF2
224 212
4 OF2 222 211
234 221
OF2 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
X2 C2 A3
MN/M 2 C3 A1
D2/C1
/C13 1 C1
D1/C1
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

A B C D E

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

G
arged
Disch

00000

T S R Q P
Ig Op.
Isd I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X

Circuit breaker accessories

604
2LV847
ID: 52000
21527
19894

A
In 1600

A V DC - Mismatch protection
B Terminal blocks for standard accessories Chassis accessories
I H MTZ2
-20 H3

C Terminal blocks for optional accessories

J V DC mismatch protection
D Optional block of four OF indication contacts or EF
K ULP port
combined connected/closed contacts
L Terminal blocks for optional accessories
E Standard block of four OF indication contacts
M Cord between ULP port and EIFE interface
F KMT grounding kit
N EIFE Embedded Ethernet interface
G MCH gear motor
O CB - Terminal block shield
H MX, XF, MN, MX diag&com, XF diag&com,
MN diag&com and MN diag voltage release P VPOC racking interlock
I CDM operation counter Q VIVC Shutter position indication locking
R Latch to lock the device in any position
S Chassis locking in disconnected position by padlock
T VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected position by keylock

D-3
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Design and installation simplification

Connection

Simple and adaptable design, accurate and fast installation are the first two essential elements of building
a switchboard. MasterPacT MTZ provides three types of basic connections and additional accessories to fullfill
different connection needs as well as to simplify installation.

MasterPacT MTZ1 fixed version as an example

A B C

D
DB419898.ai

F E

Connection accessories Connection

A Vertical connection adapters D Arc chute screen F Horizontal and vertical rear connection
B Cable-lug adapters E Interphase barriers G Front connection
C Spreaders Note: For more information, see Chapter F.

D-4
 www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Design and installation simplification
Connection

Three types of basic connections are available for MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3 devices:
b Rear vertical connection
b Rear horizontal connection
b Front connection
Top and bottom can have different connection types (mixed connection).
Changing between horizontal and vertical rear connection can be done by simply turning the terminal by 90°.
MasterPacT circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper or tinned aluminum
conductors. No special treatment is required. Front connections not available for MTZ2 HA10 fixed, MTZ2 H10 fixed,
MTZ2 HA10 draw-out, MTZ2 H10 draw-out.

MasterPacT MTZ2/3 fixed version as an example

A B C
DB419897.ai

E D

Connection accessories Connection

A Disconnectable front connection adapter C Mounting brackets D Front connection
B Interphase barriers E Horizontal and vertical rear connection
Note: For more information, see Chapter F.

D-5
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Design and installation simplification

Connection
Three types of connections are available
Rear connection Front connection

For 6300 A circuit breaker only vertical connection is available. Front connection is available for fixed
and drawout versions up to 3200 A.
ront

ront
ear

ear
nt

nt
ar

ar
out r
out f

out f

out r
d fro

d fro
d re

d re

D
Draw

Draw

Draw

Draw
Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

MasterPacT MasterPacT
MTZ1 MTZ2, MTZ3 Type of accessories
Vertical connection adapters
Vertical connection adapters are used for simplifying
the connection to a set of vertical busbars. They are
[1] [1] mounted on front-connected MTZ1 devices or
chassis. The adapters can be oriented either towards
the front or the back of the device. When oriented
towards the front of the fixed devices, the use of arc
chute screen is compulsory.
Cable lug adapters
Cable lug adapters are used for simplifying the
connection of cables fitted with lugs. They are
[1] [1]
mounted on the vertical-connection adapters on front
connected devices or chassis. To ensure adequate
mechanical strength, the cable lug adapters must be
secured together via spacer (part number 04691).
The cable lug adapters must not go over the arc chute
screen (see “Dimensions” page in this catalog).

Spreaders
When the connection bar is wider than the terminal,
[1] [1] [1] [1]
[2] [2] [2] [2] or a higher pole pitch is needed, spreaders can be
mounted on the front or rear terminals of MTZ1
devices.

Disconnectable front connection adapter

Disconnecting a rear connected circuit breaker for
maintenance or replacement can be complicated if
there is no rear access to the switchboard. To avoid
this complication, front connectors and
disconnectable adapters can be used together as
shown in the picture. In this case, the circuit breaker
can be easily disconnected from the front of the
switchboard.

[1] Spreaders, vertical connection adapters and cable lug adapters cannot be used when the voltage is u 500 V.
[2] MTZ1 spreaders are not compatible with interface barriers.
[3] Mandatory for voltage u 500 V. Not compatible with spreaders.
[4] Except for MTZ2 40 equipped with horizontal rear connections and for fixed MTZ3 40-63 .
[5] Mandatory for fixed MTZ1 front connexion versions with vertical connection adapters oriented towards the front.

D-6
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Design and installation simplification
Connection

Mixed connection

Mixed connection. Top and bottom can have different connection types

ront

ront
ear

ear
nt

nt
ar

ar
out r
out f

out r
out f
d fro

d fro
d re

d re
D
Draw

Draw

Draw
Draw
Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

Fixe
MasterPacT MasterPacT
Type of accessories MTZ1 MTZ2, MTZ3
Interphase barriers
To reinforce the isolation of connecting points,
interphase barriers can be installed vertically between
rear connection terminals. As the interphase barriers
are bendable, it gives more flexibility when installing the
busbars. The busbars can be insulated or not.
They are mandatory for MTZ1 devices at voltages
u 500 V. [3] [3] [3] [4] [4]

Interphase barriers are not compatible with:

b Spreaders on MTZ1
b Front connections on drawout version MTZ1
b Front connections on MTZ2
b Horizontal connections on MTZ2 40
b MTZ3 fixed version.
Interphase barriers are mandatory for MTZ2 HA10
fixed and MTZ2 H10 fixed.
Arc chute screen
When the breaker trips with high current, hot gas is
generated and pushed up to the terminals through the
filter. A flashover can occur between different
terminals.
An arc chute screen blocks the hot air and prevents [5]

the generation of an arc between the terminals. For

the drawout type, an additional arc chute screen is not
necessary as the filter is already covered. For fixed
MasterPacT MTZ1 with front-connection and
vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the
front, it is mandatory to respect the safety clearances.

Mounting brackets
When fixing a breaker at the back, mounting brackets
can be installed on the backplates to simplify the
installation. Only applicable for MTZ2 08 to 32.

D-7
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

Efficient day-to-day operation is vital. It means precise, in time and accessible data about the status of the circuit
breaker and fast action without the limitation of physical location.
MasterPacT further develops the operation efficiency of the circuit breaker through signalling and control accessories.
Signalling
Signalling accessories provide status indications for both the device and the chassis. The accessories listed below
are available to achieve efficiency objectives. Combinations of contacts are possible depending on the needs.
b On/Off position of the breaker main poles - OF
b Fault trip of the breaker - SDE
b Combined connected/closed position of the breaker (for MTZ 2/3 only) - EF
b Connected, disconnected and test positions of the chassis – CE, CD, CT
b Threshold overruns or status change through M2C programmable contacts – M2C
b Indication ERMS engaged through ESM, ERMS switch module
b Ready-to-close contact - PF
b Operation counter - CDM
OF, EF, CE, CD, CT, SDE and PF are available:
b In the standard version for relay applications
b In a low-level version for control of PLCs and electronic circuits.

D MasterPacT MTZ2 drawout version as an example

A B C
DB430622.ai

EF118
EF128 11 6
12 6 11 5
EF138 12 5 11
EF148 13 6 12
14 6 13 5
EF218 14 5 13
EF228 21 6 14
22 6 21 5
EF238 22 5 21
EF248 23 6 22
24 6 23 5
24 5 23
24

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
OF14 134 121
144 132
OF24 142 131
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
OF24 234 221
244 232
242 231
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2 251
2 MX1 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
es UC4 VN- 471
SDE2/R 2 V3 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/K - V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

G F E

or 0000
0

A CE, CD - Carriage switches C OF - ON/OFF indication contacts F M2C - Programmable contacts

or ESM - ERMS switch module
B EF - combined connected/closed D PF - ready-to-close contact
contacts G SDE - fault-trip indication contact
E CDM - mechanical operation counter

D-8
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Signalling

PB100806-32.eps
ON/OFF indication contacts OF
Two types of contacts indicate the ON and OFF position of the circuit breaker:
b Micro switch type changeover contacts standard or low level version for
MasterPacT MTZ1
b Rotary type changeover contacts for MasterPacT MTZ2/3. They are driven directly
by a mechanism and switch when the minimum isolation distance between the main
poles of the circuit breaker is reached.
b Four OF contacts are provided in the basic configuration for all the MasterPacT
circuit breakers.
b For MTZ1, no additional OF contacts can be added. However, low level OF
contacts can replace the standard OF contacts. A mix of low level contacts and
standard contacts is possible.
b For MTZ2/3, the rotary type changeover contacts can be used in both standard
and low level version. In addition to the 4 OF contacts provided for the basic
configuration, two optional blocks of 4 contacts can be added on the circuit breaker.
This gives 12 OF contacts maximum. When EIFE is installed, as it takes up two OF
positions, the maximum number of OF contacts is reduced to 10.

OF
ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)

Type
MTZ1
Micro switch
MTZ2/3
Micro switch Rotary Rotary
(micro switch type) - MTZ1
D
standard low level type contacts type contacts

PB100807-20.eps
type type by default additionals
Number By default 4 Maximum 4 By default 4 Maximum 8
Minimum load 100 mA/24 V 2 mA/15 V 2 mA/15 V 2 mA/15 V
Breaking V AC 240/380 6 5 10 6
capacity 480 6 5 10 6
(A) 690 6 5 6 6
p.f.: 0.3 V DC 24/48 2.5 5/2.5 10 6
AC-12/ 125 0.5 0.5 10 6
DC-12 [1] 250 0.3 0.3 3 3 ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)
(rotary type) - MTZ2 and MTZ3
Fault-trip indication contacts SDE
Circuit breaker tripping following a fault is signalled by:
b Local indication given by a blue mechanical fault indicator (reset)
b Remote indication given by a changeover contact SDE
PB100820-32.eps

Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker
can be closed. One SDE standard level (SDE1) is supplied in the basic breaker
configuration. An optional SDE (SDE2, standard or low level) can be added.
Note: SDE2 is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (RES), see page D-11.
Details of RES are explained on page D-21.

SDE MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3

Supplied as standard 1
Maximum number 2
Breaking capacity (A) Standard Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 480 2
V DC 24/48 3
Additional fault-trip
125 0.3
indication contacts (SDE)
250 0.15
Low-level Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

D-9
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

Combined connected/closed contacts EF

PB100816-32.eps

The contact combines the device connected and the device closed information to
produce the circuit closed information. Supplied as an option for MasterPacT
MTZ2/3, it is installed in the place for the connector of an additional OF contact.

Note: Ordering of additional OF contacts is compulsory if EF is selected.

The maximum number of EF is the number of additional OF contacts.
EF MTZ2, MTZ3
Maximum number 8
Breaking capacity (A) Standard Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 480 6
690 6
Combined contacts. V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
D Low-level
V AC 24/48
Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3

Connected, disconnected and test position carriage

PB100817-32.eps

switches
As standard, the connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by a
mechanically indexed indicator. It shows the exact position when the racking handle
blocks.
In addition, three types of optional auxiliary contacts (both standard and low level)
are available to indicate the position of the chassis:
b Changeover contacts to indicate the connected position CE,
CE, CD and CT b Changeover contacts to indicate the disconnected position CD. This position is
connected/disconnected/test indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits
position carriage switches. is reached,
b Changeover contacts to indicate the test position CT. In this position, the power
circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected.

MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3

Contacts CE/CD/CT
Breaking capacity (A) Standard
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240 8
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 380 8
480 8
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
Low-level
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

D-10
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Signalling

Connected, disconnected and test position carriage switches

MTZ1

DB419909.ai
10

11

12

13

MCH 14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
1

9
COM

ESM UC4 M2C

UC1

UC2

UC3
RES SDE

SDE

MX

MX

CD

CD
OF
CE

CE

OF

OF

OF

CE

CT
PF
XF
CT1
CE1
CD1
CD2

2
ETH
1
ETH
MN

EIFE EIFE
MS

ZZ
-XX.YY.
EIFE

F1
F2
F3
F4
CH
PF F1
XF F2
N/ X1 F3
X2 A01
DE1 A02
2C C3 SD
DE2 C4 T1
es N/ T2
C2 X
DE
C3
AF2
AF1
C2

As shown in the picture above, the carriage switches can be installed in 6 positions: 1, 2, 19, 20, 21
and 22. Each position corresponds to a particular type of auxiliary contact (CE, CD, CT).
When EIFE is installed, it takes the place of 1 CD at position 19, 1 CD at position 20, 1 CE at act
position 21 and 1 CT at position 22. The CD, CE, CT switches are directly connected to EIFE which Mas
terp CT1
CE1
CD1
CD2

ETH2

ETH1

makes the information available through the Ethernet communication bus.

R

EIFE NS
MS

CE2 .YY.ZZ
CE3 EIFE-XX

F1
F2
F3
F4
CH

Position Without EIFE With EIFE

PF F1
XF F2
N/ X1 F3
X2 A01
DE1 A02
2C C3 SD
DE2 C4 T1
es N/ T2
C2 X
C1 DE
C3

D
AF2
AF1
C2
C1
OM

1 None or 1 CE None or 1 CE
2 None or 1 CE None or 1 CE
rpact
Maste

19 None or 1 CD None
20 None or 1 CD None
21 None or 1 CE None
Reset
Reset
Test
Test

Reset
Test

22 None or 1 CT None
Aux
Aux
Power
Power VPS
VPS

AA
1000
InIn1000

Aux
Aux
er
Power
Pow VPSS
VP

Note: Any standard contact can be replaced by a low level contact except for the ones provided by EIFE. 10000
AA
InIn100

MTZ2 and MTZ3

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

DB419910.ai
COM

MCH
ESM M2C
UC1
UC2

UC4
UC3
RES SDE

SDE

MX MN
MX
CD
CD
CD

CE
CE
CE

OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
CT
CT
CT
XF
PF

ETH2

ETH1

EIFE NS
MS
CD CE
CD CE
CE
CE
CE

CE
CT
CT
CT

EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF

Y.ZZ
-XX.Y
EIFE

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
21
1 OF444 32
31
2 OF1
114 42
41
3 OF1
124 112
4 OF1 122 111
134 121
4 OF1
144 132
2 OF2 142 131
214 141
3 OF2
224 212
4 OF2 222 211
CD

234 221
OF2 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
X2 C2 A3
MN/M 12 C3 A1
D2/C
/C13 C1
11
D1/C
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
Res V3
SDE2/ K2 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/ /- V1
T5 182 K1
UC1M1 M2 T2 181/

EIFE
AF3 AF2
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
F2+

As shown in the picture above, the carriage switches can be installed in three blocks: MN MX1 XF
PF MCH

b Position 1, 2, 3 for the first block.

MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res

b Position 12, 13, 14 for the second block.

UC1
COM

b Position 32, 33, 34 for the third block. ETH1

ETH2

As standard, the first block can be installed with CD (maximum 3), the second block can be installed
R

EIFE NS
MS

Y.ZZ
EIFE-XX.Y

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21

with CE (maximum 3), and the third block can be installed with CT (maximum 3).
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312

Change of the functions of the carriage switches is possible. In this case, the first block can be
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1

-20 H3
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814

Z2act
824 812
CD3 822 811
834
terp
MT
832 821

Mas HA10
831

12kV
NW40 Uimp

replaced by CE, the second block can be replaced by CT and the third block can be replaced by CE
V
Ui 1250 V
V 1000
Ue 1150 690/
/1s
Ue 50kA
A peak
PF MCH Icw 105k
MN MX1 XF 0Hz
MX2 Icm 50/6
7-2 AS NEMA
6094 CEI UNE
IEC BS

or CD.
SDE1 VDE 55°C
MC2 UTE
SDE2 UC4
UC3 A Ie
UC2 /Res Ith 4000 Ue
(A)
UC1 (V)
COM 4000
1000
3A 0Hz
AC2 50/6
7-3
6094 CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE

Mixing of CE, CD, CT in one block is not possible. For example, installing 1CD and 2CE in the first
UTE

block is not possible. Test

Reset

NW40
pact
MasterHA10

Ui 1250V
Uimp
12kV

When EIFE is installed, it takes the place of CT, CE and CD switches at positions 32, 33 and 34.
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

The CD, CE, CT switches are directly connected to EIFE which makes the information available
r
Aux
Powe VPS

through the Ethernet communication bus. As EIFE also takes up positions 30 and 31, OF cannot be
In 1000

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

installed at these positions and the maximum number of OF contacts is limited to 10.
Block: Position Without EIFE With EIFE
1: 1, 2, 3 None None
or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
2: 12, 13, 14 None None
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
or 1CT or 2CT or 3CT or 1CT or 2CT or 3CT
3: 32, 33, 34 None or None
1CT or 2CT or 3CT
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD
Note: Any standard contact can be replaced by a low level contact except for the ones provided by EIFE.

D-11
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

M2C programmable contacts

PB115794.eps

The M2C optional module ( 2 contacts) can be used to signal threshold overruns or
status changes. The assignment of the 2 contacts can be configured by using
EcoStruxure Power Commission software. The M2C optional module ( 2 contacts)
requires the MicroLogic X control unit to be supplied by an external 24 V dc power
supply. When the M2C optional module 2 contacts is installed, the ESM hardware
module cannot be installed.
M2C MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 Output
M2C programmable Rated voltage V AC 250 V / 3 A
contacts: circuit breaker V DC 30 V / 3 A
internal relay with two Max breaking voltage V AC 277 V / 3 A
contacts Max load breaking capacity V AC 277 V / 3 A
V DC 30 V / 3 A
Minimum load V DC 5 V / 10 mA
LV836302.eps

ESM: ERMS Switch Module

D The ESM optional hardware module is used with an external lockable selector switch to
engage/disengage the ERMS function. It is equipped with one input dedicated to the
ERMS selector switch and one output to activate an external pilot light when the ERMS
is engaged. The input and the output must be powered with the same control voltage
(24 Vdc or 24...110 Vac). The ESM optional hardware module requires the MicroLogic X
control unit to be supplied by an external 24 V dc power supply. When the ESM optional
hardware module is installed, the M2C optional module 2 contacts cannot be installed.
ESM: ERMS switch module
ESM MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 Output Input
To download the Rated voltage V AC 110 V / 3 A 24 ... 110 V
instruction sheet V DC 30 V / 3 A 24 V
Max breaking voltage V AC 110 V / 3 A -
Max load breaking capacity V AC 110 V / 3 A -
V DC 30 V / 3 A -
Minimum load V DC 5 V / 10 mA -
PB100818-16.eps

Ready-to-close contact PF
The ready-to-close function ensures that the breaker will close only when all the
necessary criteria are met.
It checks through the prerequisites for closing the circuit breaker and informs when it is
ready to close.
It consists of a mechanical indicator and a PF changeover contact.
This indicator only shows ready when all the following conditions are met:
b The circuit breaker is in the OFF position
b The spring mechanism is charged
b A maintained opening order is not present.
Ready-to-close contacts PF This indicator will not show ready when any of the following conditions is met:
b Voltage release MX energized
b Fault trip
b Remote tripping second voltage release MX or MN
b Device not completely racked in
b Device locked in OFF position
b Device interlocked with a second device.
Note: Details of MX are presented on page D-18.
PF MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3
Maximum number 1
Breaking Standard - Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
capacity (A) V AC 240/380 480
p.f.: 0.3 5 2
AC-12/DC-12 [1] V DC 24/48 125 250
3 0.3 0.15
Low-level - Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 240
3 3
PB116027_64.eps

V DC 24/48 125
3 0.3
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

Operation counter CDM

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front
panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.
Operation counter CDM This option is compulsory for source-changeover systems.
D-12
 www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Control accessories bring convenience and safety by providing multiple ways of controlling the circuit breaker
and the possibility to operate it remotely. Two control devices are presented here:
b Remote On/Off
b Remote reset after fault tripping

A B C
DB419896.ai

D
CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
OF14 134 121
144 132
OF24 142 131
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
OF24 234 221
244 232
242 231
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2 251
2 MX1 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
es UC4 VN- 471
SDE2/R 2 V3 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/K - V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

F E

A RAR - automatic reset option b MX - opening voltage release D BPFE - electric closing pushbutton
b MX diag&com - diagnostic and
B RES - electric reset option communicating opening voltage release E MCH - gear motor
C 
b XF - closing voltage release 2nd MX or MX diag&com F b
 R - delay unit non-adjustable
b XF diag&com - diagnostic and b MN - undervoltage release b Rr - delay unit adjustable for MN
communicating closing voltage b MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage and MN diag undervoltage release.
release release

D-13
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Remote ON/OFF
PB116196_50.eps

Various solutions are possible that use different combinations of the accessories below.
b Basic voltage release to voltage release open and close orders:
v XF - closing voltage release
v MX - opening voltage release
v MN - undervoltage release
The circuit breaker can be equipped with:
- An XF voltage release,
- An MX voltage release,
- A 2nd MX voltage release or an MN undervoltage release.
b Diagnostic & Communicating voltage release with diagnostic and communication functions in addition to
releasing open and close orders:
v XF diag&com - diagnostic and communicating closing voltage release
v MX diag&com - diagnostic and communicating opening voltage release
v MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage release
The diagnostics and communicating voltage release require the installation of the insulation module.

D The circuit breaker can be equipped with:

- An XF diag&com voltage release,
- An MX diag&com voltage release
- A 2nd MX diag&com voltage release or an MN diag undervoltage release. The 2nd MX diag&com voltage
release and the MN diag undervoltage release provide only the diagnostic function. The communicating
PB115972_50-Copie.eps

function cannot be performed. The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the
delivery of the circuit breaker. This is an after sales adaptation.
Note: MN undervoltage release and MN diagnostic undervoltage release can be used with non adjustable and adjustable delay
unit R or Rr.
b Electric Motor to charge the spring:
v Electric motor MCH
XF, MX and MN
b Signalling Accessories are often added to enhance convenience and safety:
v Ready-to-close contact PF
v Device ON/OFF indication OF
v Fault-trip indication SDE
b Other Accessories to complete the solutions:
v Electric closing pushbutton BPFE. It requires the installation of an XF diag&com voltage release
v Isolation module (compulsory when diagnostic & communication voltage release are used).

Solutions
DB421346.ai

Three remote control solutions are provided by MasterPacT MTZ

Customer wiring with basic voltage release (XF, MX, MN)

MasterPacT MTZ can be opened and closed remotely by using the output contacts of a PLC or a pushbutton
wired
to the voltage release (MX, MN, XF).
This solution requires hard wiring between the circuit breaker and the location from where the operation is conducted.
AC/DC supply
DB421188.ai

Adjustable or non-
Charged
to-close

(+) (+) (+)

Ready-

adjustable delay unit

AT

BPO
C12

252
254
B3
B2
C2
D2

MCH
[2] [2] [2]

MN MX MX
PF CH

or [1]

[1] Possibility to add a second MX voltage release or an MN undervoltage release.

[2] The maximum (-) lengths of the wiring between
(-) the AC/DC power supply
(-) and voltage release terminals A1-A2 / C1-C2 /
C11-C12 / D1-D2 are given page D-18.
C1
D1

C11

251

B1

D-14
 www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Customer wiring with voltage release with diagnostic function (XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag)

PB115971_50-Copie.eps
When voltage release with diagnostic functions are used in customer wiring, the following diagnosis information is
available in addition to remote operation. The information can be accessed through the MicroLogic X HMI,
wireless communication, and EcoStruxure Power Commission through USB connection.
b Identify the type of the voltage release, MX diag&com, XF diag&com or MN diag.
b Detect whether the voltage release is functioning properly by comparing the voltage release order and the
opening/closing status of the circuit breaker.
b Check whether there is any breakage of the wiring in the voltage release periodically (every 30 seconds). XF diag&com,
b Identify whether the order comes from BPFE option. MX diag&com, MN diag
b Identify whether the order is a permanent order.
b Count the operation cycle of the voltage release.
AC/DC supply
DB421189.ai

(+) (+)
to-close

(+)
Ready-

[2] [2] [2] Note: When MX or XF diagnostic

and communicating voltage release
are used, the third wire (A3, C3, C13)
AT BPF
BPO must be connected. When the control
voltage (A3-A1, C3-C1, C13-C11) is
C12
C13

252
254
C2
C3

A2
A3

D
D2

applied to the voltage release, it is

necessary to wait 1.5 seconds before
issuing an order. Special attention shall
be paid to control voltage when using
[3] [3] [3] [3] these voltage release in application
2nd MX MX XF where power supply may disappear
MN
diag diag diag such as source change over systems.
diag
& com & com & com PF

or [1]

(-) (-) (-) OF OF : ON/OFF indication

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

contact.
PF
SDE
PF : Ready to close
Isolation contact.
Module Micrologic X CH
SDE : Fault trip indication
contact.
CH : Mechanism charged.
Communication Bus connection with diagnostic & communication voltage release
(XF diag&com, MX diag&com)
When a communication system is present, the MasterPacT MTZ can be opened and closed from a remote control
system such as a SCADA, through the communication bus.
In addition to the functionalities of the previous solution, this solution brings the following benefits:
b Bus solution provides more flexibility geographically and saves wiring costs
b Diagnosis information can be accessed remotely through the communication network but not from the
MicroLogic X HMI.
A bus solution and point-to-point solution can be implemented together when using communication voltage release.
AC/DC supply
(+) (+) (+)
DB430624.ai

Charged
to-close

(+)
Ready-

[2] [2] [2]

PC running
EcoStruxure
AT BPF Power Local [1] P
 ossibility to add a
BPO Supervisor second MX diag&com
Commission Smart phone
voltage release or an
C12
C13

252
254

B3
B2
C2
C3

A2
A3
D2

MN diag undervoltage
release. The second
MX diag&com voltage
Ethernet release can only be
MCH installed after the
2nd MX MX XF EIFE/
MN
diag diag diag FDM 128 delivery of the circuit
diag IFE
& com & com & com breaker. This is an after
PF CH Micrologic X or sales adaptation.
IFM Modbus SL
or [1]
[2] M
 aximum length of
Module
the two wires cables
between A2-A3 / C2-C3
(-) (-) (-) (-)
OF / C12-C13: 5 m.
D1

C11

C1

A1

251

B1

PF [3] The maximum lengths

SDE of the wiring between
Isolation the AC/DC power supply
Module CH
and voltage release
terminals
A1-A3 / C1-C3 /
C11-C13 /D1-D2 are
given page D-18.

D-15
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

The table below summarizes all the possibilities for controlling the On/Off status of a breaker in different operating modes.
Connection Voltage Method MicroLogic X Operation Mode Setting Exclusiveness Diagnostic
release Manual Auto Auto [1]
Information
Local Remote [2]

Customer wiring Basic voltage Pushbutton

release Wireless pushbutton
(XF, MX, MN) (XB5)
Diagnostic & Pushbutton
Communicating BPFE voltage release
voltage release connection
(XF diag&com,
Wireless pushbutton
MX diag&com,
MN diag) BPFE via MicroLogic X
Digital input (IO module) [3]

EcoStruxure Power
Commission via USB
D Ecostruxure Power
Device App app
(Bluetooth)
Bus solution Diagnostic & BPFE via MicroLogic
with COM Communicating Digital Input
[3]
communication voltage release (I/O module)
option (XF diag&com,
EcoStruxure Power
MX diag&com)
Commission via USB
SCADA via
IFE/EIFE/IFM
FDM128 via IFE/EIFE
EcoStruxure Power
Commission via IFE/
EIFE
Webpage via IFE/EIFE
Ecostruxure Power
Device App app
(Bluetooth)
[1] Exclusiveness means that the operation can only be done in one particular operating mode.
For example, when customer wiring with basic voltage release is used, On/Off operation of the breaker using the pushbutton has no exclusiveness as it can
be done in all three operating modes.
[2] Details of diagnostic functions can be found on page B-22.
[3] When the rotary switch of the I/O module is switched to I2/I3, operation can only be done in Auto remote mode. When it is switched to I4/I5 operation can
only be done in auto local mode.

D-16
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Selection of voltage release

Three common user cases are presented here to illustrate the possible choice of voltage release.

User case I: Remote Opening

This case is applicable when only remote opening is required. It is necessary to respond to an emergency.
This solution enables the emergency opening of the circuit breaker.

User case II: Remote Opening and Closing

When both remote opening and remote closing are required, this solution can be implemented.
As the spring needs to be charged to close the circuit breaker, an electric motor MCH needs to be installed in this
solution.

User Case III: Remote closing and opening with 2nd MX or MN voltage release
For safety reasons, redundancy of mechanisms is required in certain installations. A second MX/MX diag&com or
MN/MN diag can be added for this purpose.

The additional MN diag benefits the following situations.

b When the voltage drops by 35 % to 70 % of its rated voltage, MN diag will open the breaker automatically.
D
b When MX diag&com fails to receive the order or fails to voltage the voltage after receiving the order, MN diag
can be triggered to voltage the voltage to open the circuit breaker.
Customer wiring with Customer wiring with Communication bus
basic voltage release diagnostic & communicating connection with diagnostic
voltage release & communicating voltage
release
User Case I: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Opening b Opening voltage b Opening voltage release MX b Opening voltage release
release MX diag&com MX diag&com
Option II: Option II:
b Instantaneous b Instantaneous undervoltage
undervoltage release release MN diag
MN
User Case II: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Opening b Opening voltage b Opening voltage release MX b Opening voltage release
and Closing release MX diag&com MX diag&com
b Closing voltage b Closing voltage release XF b Closing voltage release XF
release XF diag&com diag&com
b Electric motor MCH b Electric motor MCH b Electric motor MCH
Option II: Option II:
b Instantaneous b Instantaneous undervoltage
undervoltage release release MN diag
MN b Closing voltage release XF
b Closing voltage diag&com
release XF b Electric motor MCH
b Electric motor MCH
User Case III: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Closing b Opening voltage b Opening voltage release MX b Opening voltage release
and Opening with release MX diag&com MX diag&com
2nd MX or MN b Closing voltage b Closing voltage release XF b Closing voltage release XF
voltage release release XF diag&com diag&com
b Electric motor MCH b Electric motor MCH b Electric motor MCH
b Instantaneous b Instantaneous undervoltage b Instantaneous
undervoltage release release MN diag or a second undervoltage release
MN or a second MX MX diag&com voltage release MN diag or a second MX
diag&com voltage diag&com voltage release
release
Note:
b Adjustable or non adjustable delay unit can be added to MN and MN diag in all situations.
b An isolation module is required for all connections between MicroLogic X and diagnostic & communicating voltage release (XF
diag&com, MX diag&com and MN diag).
b Within user case III, when using the second MX diag&com voltage release instead of the MN diag undervoltage release, this
second MX diag&com voltage release will provide diag only.

D-17
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Basic voltage release and diagnostics &

PB115972_50.eps

communication voltage release general characteristics

After receiving the command, the closing/opening voltage release instantaneously
triggers the mechanism to close/open the circuit breaker. For MN, it also opens the
circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of
its rated voltage. Circuit breaker closing is possible only when the supply voltage of
the voltage release returns to 85 % of its rated value.
b MN undervoltage release locks the circuit breaker in OFF position when it is not
energized.
b MX opening voltage release can lock the circuit breaker in OFF position if the
order is maintained.
Voltage releases XF and MX
The XF, MX, MN, XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag voltage release require a
power supply separate from the MicroLogic X power supply.
Note: The minimum duration of the pulse operating order must be 200 ms.
200 ms min.

D
XF Characteristics XF, XF diag&com MX, MX diag&com
XF diag&com [1]
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
XF Close Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un
DB425480.eps

XF diag&com order
action Consumption (VA or W) Hold: 4.5 Hold: 4.5
Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
MX Circuit breaker MTZ1: 55 ms Max=65 ms 50 ms Max=60 ms
MX diag&com [2]
response time at Un MTZ2: 70 ms Max=80 ms
MTZ3: 80 ms Max=90 ms
MX
MX diag&com Open CB locked
action order in off position Characteristics MN, MN diag
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
MN
MN Diag Operating Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold Closing 0.85 Un
MN Consumption (VA or W) Hold: 4.5
Open CB locked
MN Diag order in off position Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
action
MN consumption Hold: 4.5
[1] For XF diag&com the supply shall be present between with delay unit (VA or W) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
terminals A1-A3. Circuit breaker 40 ms Max=45 ms (MasterPacT MTZ1)
[2] For MX diag&com the supply shall be present between response time at Un 90 ms Max=95 ms (MasterPacT MTZ2, MTZ3)
terminals C1-C3.
Recommended maximum cable lengths (m)
24 V 48 V
2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
MN, U source 58 35 280 165
MN diag 100 %
U source 16 10 75 45
85 %
MX-XF, U source 115 70 550 330
MX diag&com, 100 %
XF diag&com U source 75 44 350 210
85 %
Note: The indicated lengths are given for each of the two wires of the cables.

D-18
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Diagnostic & communicating voltage release

PB115971_50.eps
specificities
The new generation of communicating voltage release brings two major benefits
compared with the basic voltage release, diagnostic and communication functions.

Diagnostic Function
Incorrect operation or failure of the voltage release can cause damage to the electric
network. The new function of the diagnostic and communicating voltage release
provides the diagnostic information and prevents incorrect operations that can
damage the equipment.

These voltage release can perform the following diagnosis and communicate the XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag
results through MicroLogic X.
b Identify the type of the voltage release, MX diag&com, XF diag&com or MN diag
b Detect whether the voltage release is functioning properly by comparing the
voltage release order and the opening/closing status of the circuit breaker
b Check whether there is any breakage of the wiring in the voltage release D
periodically
(every 30 seconds)
b Identify whether the order comes from BPFE option
b Identify whether the order is a permanent order
b Count the operating cycles of the voltage release

Results can be read through all the different ways of retrieving information from
MicroLogic X as presented in chapter B, including HMI, wireless communication,
and EcoStruxure Power Commission through a USB connection. If the voltage
release are connected to the communication system, they can also be accessed
through the communication system.

Communication function
In addition to hard wiring, these voltage release can be connected to the
communication network.
It allows the voltage release to be integrated in the communication system. It gives
more flexibility for remote operations, and the diagnosis results mentioned in
diagnostic function can be assessed remotely as well.
MN diag only has the diagnostic function. It cannot be connected to a communication
network.

New voltage release action type

In addition to the diagnostic function, a major new feature of the new generation is
the voltage release action type. The new generation no longer has the pulse-type
voltage release; the voltage release can be maintained as long as the order is
maintained. Because of the new feature, MX diag&com can lock the circuit breaker
in the OFF position when the order is maintained.
DB421346.ai

MN delay units
To reduce circuit breaker nuisance opening during short voltage drops, MN delay
units can be installed to delay the MN undervoltage release and only trigger the
voltage release when voltage is low for a certain period of time. It can be disabled by
an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Two versions of the delay unit are available, adjustable and non-adjustable.
Adjustable or non-adjustable delay unit
Characteristics
Power supply Non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
- 380/480
Operating threshold Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
Closing 0.85 Un
Delay unit consumption Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5
Circuit breaker Non-adjustable 0.25 s
response time at Un Adjustable 0.5 s - 1 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

D-19
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Isolation module (Compulsory for XF diag&com,

MX diag&com, MN diag voltage release)
PB116199_50.eps

When diagnostic and communicating voltage release are required, the internal
isolation module for MicroLogic X is compulsory to provide reinforced insulation as
per IEC 60664-1 (up to 12 kV). It is installed between the voltage release and
MicroLogic X. Besides the isolation between the electric network and MicroLogic X,
it also provides the insulation between the voltage release. It is necessary because
the voltage release can be powered by different voltages.
Isolation module
DB421191.ai

BPFE

MX diag

Micrologic X Isolation
Module

D XF diag

2nd MX diag
or MN diag

Note:
b Only one isolation module is needed regardless of the number of voltage release installed.
To facilitate the ordering process and make sure the isolation module is ordered for diagnostic
and communicating voltage release, it will be added to the purchase list automatically when
any of the XF diag&com, MX diag&com or MN diag is selected.
b For safety reasons it must be avoided to mix in the same circuit breaker 277-380/480 V
voltage release with 24/48 V voltage release.
b When ordered the BPFE is de facto connected in factory to the isolation module.

Electric closing pushbutton BPFE

Located on the front cover of the circuit breaker, this pushbutton carries out electric
closing of the circuit breaker, taking into account the safety functions that are part of
the control and monitoring system of the installation.
PB116200_50.eps

The BPFE requires a XF diag&com voltage release to be installed on the circuit breaker.
The BPFE does not operate with a standard XF voltage release.
They are two solutions to implement the electric closing pushbutton. A standard
solution and a customized solution:
b The standard solution is performed in factory. When the BPFE option is ordered,
the circuit breaker is de facto delivered equipped with the BPFE and a XF
diag&com voltage release, both connected on the isolation module. The two
functions of the XF diag&com voltage release (remote control through MicroLogic
X and diagnostic) are operational
Electric closing pushbutton BPFE b The customized solution can only be performed after the delivery of the circuit
breaker. This is an after sales adaptation. The isolation module is removed and
the BPFE directly connected to the diag&com voltage release.
For both solutions, terminal A2 of the XF diag&com voltage release can be used to
close the circuit breaker by means of an external closing pushbutton. Terminal A3
can be used to insert the safety functions of the installation
For safety reasons, the BPFE is generally associated with the pushbutton locking
VBP that forbids access to the mechanical closing pushbutton.
DB425695.eps

DB425694.eps

External
closing Safety External
push functions closing Safety
button push functions
button
A2 A3

XF A2 A3
diag&com
BPFE
XF
diag&com
A1

Isolation A1
BPFE Micrologic A+/E+
Module

BPFE standard solution performed in factory BPFE customized solution

performed after sale
D-20
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Remote reset after fault trip

DB419110.eps
When a fault trip happens, the fault trip indicator SDE indicates ‘fault’ and the blue
fault trip reset button pops up. To close the breaker, the reset button needs to be
pressed down. Reset Fault
To do a remote reset after fault trip, two solutions, RES and RAR, order

are provided. 82 86
K4

Electric reset after fault trip RES

This function resets the SDE fault trip indication and voltage releases the circuit SDE
breaker mechanism, the reset button goes in and circuit breaker closing is possible.
A power supply of 100/130 V AC or 200/240 V AC is required to enable this function.
Note: The additional Fault Trip indication contact SDE2 is not compatible with RES.
81
Automatic reset after fault trip RAR
In the case of RAR, it is no longer required to press the reset button to enable the
circuit breaker closing after tripping. The circuit breaker is closed with the Reset
button still popped up and the SDE indication still indicating ‘fault’. The SDE Remote reset after fault trip
D
indications will remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed.
Note: To achieve remote closing after fault trip, closing voltage release XF and electric motor
MCH are required in addition to RES or RAR.

Note: an opening order always takes priority over a closing order. If opening and closing orders
DB429640.ai

occur simultaneously, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts.
The circuit breaker remains in the open position (OFF).
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard mechanism provides an
anti-pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position.
Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening using the manual or electric
controls, the closing order must first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit Electric reset after fault trip RES
breaker.
When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is installed, to avoid pumping following
a fault trip, the automatic control system must take into account the information supplied by
the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or blocking the circuit breaker in the
DB429639.ai

open position (information on the type of fault, e.g. overload, short-time fault, earth fault, earth
leakage, short-circuit, etc.).

Automatic reset after fault trip RAR

Electric motor MCH

The electric motor automatically charges the spring mechanism when the circuit
PB100808-32.eps

breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible following

opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle can be used as a backup if the
auxiliary power supply is absent.
The electric motor MCH is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact CH that
PB100797-23.eps

signals the charged position of the mechanism.

The electric motor MCH require a power supply separate from the MicroLogic X
power supply.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440
- 480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s
Charging time maximum 3 s for MasterPacT MTZ1
maximum 4 s for MasterPacT MTZ2, MTZ3
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
Electric motor MCH for Electric motor MCH for
CH contact 10 A at 240 V MasterPacT MTZ1 MasterPacT MTZ2 and
MTZ3

D-21
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking

Safety is always the priority. MasterPacT MTZ provides a high degree of safety to both people and property through
the following aspects:
b Locking and Interlocking
b Circuit Protection
b Operation Protection
b Mechanical Protection.
Locking and interlocking
It is of great importance to ensure that the breaker is only operated by a certified and authorized person.
It is for both the safety of the operator and the safety of the property. Another important aspect is to minimize the
chances of incorrect operation which may lead to high safety risk.
Locking and interlocking accessories ensure that the circuit breaker is operated by the right person at the right time
in accordance with local rules and regulations.

A B C D E

D
DB419914.ai

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
OF24 234 221
244 232
242 231
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2
2 MX1 C2 A3 251
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
es UC4 VN- 471
SDE2/R 2 V3 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/K - V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

J UC
1
UC
2

00000

Pull

-20 H3
MTZ2
Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
TRIP CAUSE

Ir I n
Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

I H G F

A VPEC - door interlock catch E VCPO/VSPO - OFF position locking I IBPO - interlock between racking handle
and OFF pushbutton
B VO - Safety shutters F VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking
J 
b VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected
C VIVC - shutter position indication G V DC - mismatch protection
position: by keylock
and locking b Chassis locking in disconnected position
H VPOC - racking interlock
D IPA - cable-type door interlock by padlock
K Shutter locking block
D-22
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Protection of people and property
Locking and interlocking

Pushbutton locking VBP

PB116201_60.eps
Open and close pushbuttons can be blocked by using VBP. It consists of two
transparent covers which can be locked with any of the following:
b Padlock (not supplied), 5 to 8 mm,
b Lead seal,
b Two screws.
The opening button and the closing button can be locked independently.
Access to pushbuttons protected
by transparent cover VBP.
Device locking in the OFF position VCPO

PB116202_60.eps
with padlocks, VSPO with keylocks
The circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
b Using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied), shackle Ø5 to 8 mm
b Using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied).

Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: Pushbutton locking with padlock VBP.
D
b One keylock

PB116203_35.eps
b One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately
for interlocking with another device
b Two different keylocks for double locking.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

Accessory-compatibility
For MasterPacT MTZ1: 3 padlocks or 1 keylock. OFF position locking with padlock VCPO.
For MasterPacT MTZ2, MTZ3: 3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocks.
PB116204_40.eps

For MTZ1, either keylock or padlock can be used. For MTZ2 and 3, padlock will
always be available when keylock is selected. Padlock and keylock can be used at
the same time.

Disconnected position locking with padlocks

OFF position locking with keylock VSPO.
(standard) or keylocks (VSPD option)
The circuit breaker can be locked in its disconnected position by using the locks on
the chassis. This feature is accessible via the cut out door closed.
PB116205_60.eps

Two options are available:

b Using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied),
b Using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: Disconnected position locking
v One keylock, with padlocks.
v Two different keylocks for double locking,
v One (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

Connected, disconnected and test position locking

PB116206_60.eps

The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator and are
mechanically indexed. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle
blocks. A release button is used to free it.
As standard, the circuit breaker can be locked only in disconnected position by Disconnected position locking
padlocks or by keylocks.. by keylocks VSPD.
On request, the locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of
the three positions: connected, disconnected or test.

D-23
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking

Safety shutters with padlocking VO

When the circuit breaker is in the disconnected or test position, there is a
possibility for an operator to accidentally touch the disconnected contact cluster or to
accidentally slide back to the connected position, causing a safety risk to the
PB116207_60.eps

operator and to the installation.

Mounted on the chassis, safety shutters close automatically when the breaker is
in disconnected or test position. It ensures the insulation distance and physical
segregation between the live parts and the compartment of the chassis
Safety shutters with padlocking VO (Degree of protection: IP 20).
The shutter-locking system locks the safety shutters in the closed position and
prevents the insertion of the device. For MTZ1, safety shutters can be padlocked
directly. For MTZ 2/MTZ3, the shutter-locking system is made up of separate parts
that can be padlocked.
There are in total 2 blocks for MTZ2, 3 blocks for MTZ3-3P and 4 blocks for MTZ3-4P.
For MTZ 2/MTZ3, a support at the back of the chassis is used to store the blocks
when they are not in use.
D
Shutter position indication and locking VIVC
PB116012.eps

Alternatively, shutter position indication and locking (VIVC) can also be used to lock
the safety shutters.
This device is installed on the chassis front plate and allows the locking operation to
be realized outside the chassis compartment. For MTZ2, the upper and lower
shutters can be indicated independently and locked either independently or together.
For MTZ3, the upper and lower shutters are locked together.
One to three padlocks can be used (padlocks are not supplied).
Note: This option is applicable for MTZ2/3 only.

Shutter position indication and locking VIVC

DB419918.ai

Cable-type door interlock IPA

This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
To implement this option, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is
mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker.
This option is not compatible with the source changeover function.
This option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.

Cable-type door interlock IPA

D-24
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Protection of people and property
Locking and interlocking

Racking interlock VPOC

DB419919.ai
This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.

Racking interlock VPOC

Door interlock catch VPEC

PB116034_30.eps
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position.
If the breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be
closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
D

Door interlock catch VPEC

DB421347.ai

Racking interlock between racking handle and

OFF pushbutton IBPO (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)
This option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the
racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.

Racking interlock between racking handle and

OFF pushbutton IBPO (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)

Mismatch protection V DC
PB100815-32R_SE.eps

Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is inserted only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on
the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select
from.

Mismatch protection V DC

D-25
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Protection of people and property

Circuit protection

MicroLogic X external sensors and voltage measurement inputs enlarge the protection functions of MicroLogic X.
Instantaneous voltage release also prevents property from being damaged.
DB419900.ai

A B

Pull

-20 H3
MTZ2

M3
M2
M1

A TCE - external sensor for neutral and residual earth fault protection
B SGR - external sensor for source ground return protection
C Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection

D-26
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Protection of people and property
Circuit protection

TCE external sensor for neutral and residual earth

LV833576SP_image.eps
fault protection
Installed on the neutral conductor,the external sensor enables circuit breaker to
perform:
b Neutral protection for 3P only
b Neutral current measurement
b Earth fault protection for 3P circuit breakers in TNS System.

The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit External sensor for neutral and residual earth fault
breaker: protection (TCE)
b MTZ1 06 to MTZ1 16: TC 400/1600
b MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 20: TC 400/2000 N L1 L2 L3

DB421680.ai
AF1
AF2
AF3
b MTZ2 25 to MTZ2 40: TC 1000/4000

VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
b MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63: TC 4000/6300.

For MTZ1 or MTZ2, a single sensor with a single wire is provided.

For MTZ3 both single sensor with single wire and double sensor with double wire
are available. D
Q
For oversized neutral protection the sensor rating must be compatible with the I
Micrologic 6.0 X
measurement range: 1.6 x In (available up to MTZ2 40 for MTZ2 and MTZ1 16 for U
MTZ1).

M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+
H2
H1

SGR External sensor for source ground return

06133779A.eps
protection
The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to
the earth and connected to the MicroLogic 6.0 X control unit via an MDGF module
to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection.

Connection of the secondary circuit

MasterPacT equipped with a MicroLogic 6.0 X:
External sensor for source ground return protection
b Between external transformer and MDGF module:
(SGR)
v Unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair,
v Maximum length 150 meters,
DB421148.AI

v Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2,

v Recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.
AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4

b Between MDGF module and MicroLogic X:

v Unshielded cable,
v Maximum length 10 meters,
v Cable cross-sectional area 0.8 to 2.5 mm2,
v Recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent, Q
v Terminals 5 and 6 may not be used at the same time: I
- Use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2, Micrologic 6.0 X
U
- Use terminal 6 for MTZ3.
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+

or

H1 X1 8 5 6 7
1
H2 3 MDGF module
X2
PE

D-27
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Protection of people and property

Circuit protection

Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection

PB100834-48.eps

Rectangular sensor enables the detection of zero-phase sequence current which is

required for the earth-leakage protection.
It is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) and comes with two sizes to
cover different installation needs.
Inside dimensions (mm):
b 280 x 115 up to 1600 A for MasterPacT MTZ1 and MTZ2, MTZ3
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection b 470 x 160 up to 3200 A for MasterPacT MTZ2, MTZ3.

N L1 L2 L3
DB419103.eps

AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4

D Q

I
Micrologic 7.0X
U
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+

M1
M2
M3

D-28
 www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Protection of people and property
Operation and mechanical protection

Operating protection
Adding safety check points and reducing the safety risk during daily operation to the minimum level is a primary
concern. The following accessories add safety especially when physical touching of the circuit breaker is required.
Mechanical protection
In addition to the protection using electrical components, these accessories use simple mechanical structures to
enhance the safety of both people and property.
DB424866.ai

A B C

D
CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
2 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Isd
Ig
I n
Op. Test
/ Reset
Pull
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
-20 H3
MTZ2
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

Pull

G Pull
F E D

Operation protection Mechanical protection

A CB - terminal block shield D CCP - transparent cover for escutcheon F CDP - escutcheon
B DAE - automatic spring discharge before E OP - blanking plate for escutcheon G Transparent cover for MicroLogic
breaker removal X
C KMT - grounding kit

D-29
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Protection of people and property

Operation and mechanical protection

Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal

DB424865.ai

DAE (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)

This option automatically discharges the spring before the breaker is removed from
the chassis.

Automatic spring discharge DAE

Grounding kit KMT

DB419114.eps

This option allows the grounding of the breaker mechanism while the front cover is
removed. The grounding is made via the chassis for the drawout version and via the
fixation side plate for the fixed version.

Grounding kit KMT.

CB terminal block shield

DB419669.eps

Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.

CB terminal block shield

Blanking plate OP for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet
DB419923.ai

equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
drawout devices.

Blanking plate OP for escutcheon

DB419672.eps

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon

Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by
a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54, IK10. It only adapts to drawout
devices.

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon.

D-30
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Protection of people and property
Operation and mechanical protection

Door cut-out and escutcheon CDP

Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30).
It is available in fixed and drawout versions.

Door cut-out (see chapter F for more information)

MTZ1 MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed Drawout Fixed Drawout

WIth or without escutcheon Without escutcheon WIth or without escutcheon Without escutcheon

WIth escutcheon WIth escutcheon

Escutcheon (see chapter F for more information)

MTZ1 MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed Drawout Fixed Drawout

D-31
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

Power availability and reliability is crucial in all situations. These accessories make the different ways of powering up
MicroLogic X possible.
DB432610.ai

A B C

G4
G3 N
L

1A
5Vc
1.5A
4444
LV45
5Vc
t
Outpuut
2.4A
Outp 5Vc

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

-20 H3
MTZ2

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

E D

FORE
T BE
NNEC ST
DISCOCTRIC TE
DIELE

A External 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply

B Power Pack for MicroLogic X
C ABL8 24 V DC power supply
D Voltage power supply VPS module
E Spare internal battery

D-32
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Power Availability and reliability
Power supplies

MicroLogic X power supplies

b The basic functions of protection performed by the MicroLogic X (LSIG: Long-time
overload protection, Short-time short circuit protection, Instantaneous short circuit
protection, Earth fault protection) do not require external power supply.
They are self powered by the currents delivered by the current transformers
embedded in the MTZ circuit breaker, except the earth-leakage protection in
MicroLogic 7.0 X which requires the installation of the VPS module.
b When the circuit breaker load current is above 20 % of the rated current the proper
operation of all the functions processed by the MicroLogic X is ensured.
This includes:
v The functions of protection
v All the measures with the accuracies specified on page B-21 of this catalog
v The diagnosis
v The HMI (Embedded display and key pad)
v The wireless features (Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity).
b When the load current falls below 20 % of the rated current, the VPS module or
an external 24 V DC power supply is needed to maintain the operation of
MicroLogic X with its specified performances.
b The external 24 V DC is compulsory to supply power the following devices and
D
functions associated with MicroLogic X:
v EIFE module
v IFE module
v IFM module
v I/O module
v M2C programmable contact
v ESM - ERMS switch module
v FDM 128.
v The optional protections provided by the optional digital modules
Two types of 24 V DC power supplies are offered to supply power to the MicroLogic
X and its associated modules:
b The external 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply
b The 24 V DC Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 and ABL8 RPS 24030 power
supply.
In addition, a portable PowerPack battery can be used to supply power to the
MicroLogic X through its mini USB port.

PB115958_60.eps
Voltage Power Supply VPS module for MicroLogic X
When the current is below 20 % of the rated current providing presence of three-
phase or two-phase voltage downstream of the circuit breaker (circuit breaker
closed), the VPS module ensures the operation and performance of MicroLogic X.
This includes:
b All the measures with the accuracies specified page B-21 of this catalog
b The HMI (Embedded display and key pad) Voltage Power Supply VPS module
b The wireless features( Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity).
The VPS module is provided as standard for MicroLogic 7.0 X to perform earth
leakage protection. The input voltage of the VPS module is limited to 600 V.
Above 600 V it shall be supplied from an external voltage by means of the PTE
option and voltage transformers. Presence of 24 V on VPS output is signaled by a
green LED on the front face of the module. The VPS module can be easily installed
in the bottom part of the MicroLogic X, with two positions:
b First position: The VPS module is plugged and all connections are realized
(AC inputs and 24 DC output). A mechanical interlock locks the VPS in this position.
To unlock the VPS it is mandatory to open the battery cover and pull the locking
handle
b Second position: This is an intermediate position where no power is connected
(AC inputs and 24 DC output). In this position the VPS is completed isolated.
This position allows you to perform the switchboard dielectric tests without risks.
Power supply input
Three phase 208 - 600 V AC +10% -30% 2.6 W
Two phase 208 - 600 V AC +10% -15% 1.7 W

D-33
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

External 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply

LV454444.eps

The external power-supply module makes it possible:

b To use the display even if the circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact
conditions of use, see the “electrical diagrams” part of this catalog)
b To display fault currents after tripping
b To modify settings when the circuit breaker is open (OFF position)
An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installation with communication,
whatever the type of control unit, for MicroLogic with additional protection or
advanced features.
This module is not designed to power on 24 V DC voltage releases and electric
External 24 V DC MicroLogic power supply motor mechanism.
This module powers both the control unit and the M2C programmable contacts or
ESM module.
Characteristics
b Power supply AC-to-DC or DC-to-DC
b Output voltage: 24 V DC ±5 %.
b Output current: 1 A.
D b DIN rail or platine Fixing with Acti9 form factor
b Conducted emissions power line: class B per EN/IEC 61000-6-3.

D-34
www.se.com
Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories
Power Availability and reliability
Power supplies

24 V DC Universal Phaseo™ ABL8 power supplies

PF106349SE_ABL8RPS24050.eps
The Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 and ABL8 RPS 24030 power supplies can
be connected phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase.
They deliver a voltage that is precise to 3 %, whatever the load and whatever the
value of the AC supply, within the ranges 85 to 132 V AC and 170 to 550 V AC.
The Universal Phaseo ABL8 powers:
b Circuit breaker communication module and interface
b Programmable MicroLogic.

Characteristics
b Power supply AC-to-DC.
b Network frequency: 50/60 Hz (±5 %).
b Output voltage: 24 V DC ±3%. ABL8 RPS power supply
b Output current: 3 or 5 A.
b DIN rail or platine Fixing.
b Conducted emissions power line: class B per EN/IEC 61000-6-3.

To assist cooling there must be sufficient clearance around the Universal range
Phaseo power supplies:
D
b 50 mm above and below
b 10 mm on the side.
ABL8RPSpppp Module AD
Over Voltage Category Cat I per VDE 0106-1 Cat IV per IEC 62477-1
(AC model)
Cat III per IEC 62477-1
(DC model)
Cat III per UL 61010-1
Degree of pollution 2 3
as per IEC 60664-1
Input supply voltage AC 100…120 V AC and 110-130 or 200-240 V AC
200…500 V AC
Input supply voltage DC N/A 24-30 or 48-60
or 100-125 V DC
Dielectric Input/Output 4 kV rms -1 mn. 3 kV rms - 1 mn.
(110-130 V AC and
200-240 V AC model)
3 kV rms - 1 mn.
(110-125 V DC model)
2 kV rms - 1 mn. (24-30 V DC
and 48-60 V DC model)
Input/Ground 3.5 kV rms -1 mn. 3 kV rms - 1 mn.
Ouput /Ground 0,5 kV rms - 1 mn. 1.5 kV rms - 1 mn.
Temperature b 50 °C 70°C
b 60 °C with 80 % of
the rated current
maximum
Output current 3 A (ABL8RPS24030) 1A
5 A (ABL8RPS24050)
Inrush current for 2 ms < 30 A < 20 A
Ripple 200 mV peak-peak 200 mV peak-peak
Output voltage limits 24 to 28.8 V DC 22.8 to 25.2 V DC

Protection degree IP20 IP4x front face / IP2x

terminals / IP3x other
Note: For the applications requiring an over voltage category higher than 1, a surge arrester
shall be associated to ABL8 RPS power supplies. The iQuickPRD20 type 2 surge arrester is
recommended.

D-35
 Customize your Circuit Breaker with Accessories www.se.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

Mobile Power Pack for MicroLogic X

PB115956_60.eps

The mobile portable Power Pack battery is a manufactured & tested Schneider Electric
device that can energize the MicroLogic X through its mini USB port.
It allows to use the embedded display & keypad for basic settings & reading or access
to complementary tripping information during shutdown.
Mobile Power Pack can be easily recharged by connecting it to a PC or a charger
Mobile Power Pack for MicroLogic X equipped with a USB port.
The Remaining power available in Power Pack can be read when pressing the
power button for 1 second.
The Power Pack can also be used to charge a smartphone (a USB cable with a mini
Status Indicators
USB port is provided for this purpose ).
Battery capacity State explanation This item can be ordered as a spare part.
display
100 %
A
70 %
F

40 %
G H
D 15 %
< 15 %
I
0%
1A
5Vc
1.5A
5Vc
2.4A
5Vc

J H
Battery charging in progress

Internal fault E D C B

A Battery capacity display E Power button I Cable for power

B USB 5 V / 1 V output F Cable battery charging MicroLogic X control unit
C Micro-USB 5 V / 1.5 A G mini USB connector J Micro USB connector
input H USB connector
D USB 5 V / 2.4 V output
DB421457.ai

Spare internal battery

The MicroLogic X control unit is equipped with an internal battery dedicated to the
supply of the trip causes LEDs and the internal clock. The battery can be replaced on
site when discharged.
Spare internal battery The battery is lithium type.
A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.
This item can be ordered as a spare part.

D-36
www.se.com

Integrate in Smart Panels -

Architecture and Systems

Architecture overview............................................................. E-2

Components
ULP interface module......................................................................E-10
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface.................................................E-12
IFE Ethernet interface......................................................................E-14
IFE switchboard server....................................................................E-16
IFM Modbus interface......................................................................E-18
I/O Application module....................................................................E-20
FDM121 Display Unit ......................................................................E-22
FDM128 Display Unit ......................................................................E-24

Customer engineering tool:

EcoStruxure Power Commission software....................E-26

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

E-1
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture overview

Connect the Panel for

Sustainability
PB124095.eps

p Energy efficiency is a part of sustainability.

If you do not know what is going on in your
panel you cannot do anything to optimize
the energy usage. That is why metering is
necessary. And a lower energy bill helps both
the environment and lower energy cost.
p Minimize CO2 footprint.

Safety
Prevent injuries to people and damage to
equipment. By monitoring temperature, humidity
E and gases in the panel, the likelihood of
accidents, such as fire, decreases.

Power Availability
Prevent unexpected downtime through better
monitoring and connectivity.

Business and
Operation Continuity
Ensuring resilience through source
management.

E-2
 www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture overview

MasterPacT MTZ with MicroLogic X

Enerlin'X enables the integration of MasterPacT MTZ in a digital system and enables the integration in EcoStruxure
Software solutions. Enerlin'X can also be used for connecting with a local display.

> For MasterPacT MTZ drawout circuit breaker, Enerlin'X EIFE is used for Ethernet connectivity

> For MasterPacT MTZ fixed circuit breaker, Enerlin'X IFE is used for Ethernet connectivity

Energy management and

electrical asset monitoring
have never been simpler
DB445885.ai

MasterPacT MTZ
drawout circuit breaker E
With its embedded Enerlin'X EIFE
module, MasterPacT MTZ is ready
to be connected to Ethernet
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Connect with your breaker

act
Masterp
HA10 12kV

MICROLOGIC
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
50/60Hz

When in front of the breaker:

Icm AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz

Home
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Quickview
Isd
Ig
I n
Op.

Measures
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

> with a smartphone via

7.0 X

! Alarms & H...

04

ID: 20002LV8476
19894215275

In 1600
A Maintenan...

OK

Bluetooth and/or NFC using the

EcoStruxure™ Power Device
Application
> with a computer using a USB
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.

All your circuit breakers

Ii I n

Cable
7.0 X
ID:

and energy data

1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE

available via Ethernet

DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

Remotely using:
and Modbus SL
> EcoStruxure™ Power
Monitoring Expert
> EcoStruxure™ Power
Operation
> EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor
> Any other Energy
Management System with a
Modbus TCP/IP protocol

E-3
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture overview

Ethernet has become the universal link between switchboards, computers and communicating devices inside
buildings. The large amount of information which can be transferred makes the connection of Enerlin'X digital system
to hosted web services of Schneider Electric a reality.

General architecture
MicroLogic X control units with its interfaces offer the following
communication channels:
DB445886.ai

b Connection to an Ethernet network through either an EIFE or IFE

interface module. The EIFE and IFE modules are connected to the
MicroLogic X control unit by means of a ULP port and a prefabricated
FDM121
Local ULP cord. The EIFE is dedicated to drawout circuit breakers.
0V 24V

Supervisor The IFE is dedicated to fixed circuit breakers.

ULP Port b Connection to a Modbus SL RS 485 bus through an IFM interface
module. The IFM module is connected to the MicroLogic X control
Switch unit by means of a ULP port and a prefabricated ULP cord
b Communication with a smartphone via a wireless powered Bluetooth
EIFE Module FDM128 channel or a wireless powerless NFC channel.
b Communication with a PC via a USB port.
b Connection to Internet. The connection to Internet can be performed
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

through a Panel Server connected to internal Ethernet network.

E Masterpa
NW40

Ue
Icw
Icm
IEC
UTE

AC23A
IEC
UTE
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V

VDE

Ith 4000A

VDE
Uimp

BS
ct
12kV

50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
BS
690/1000V
50kA/1s
105kA
50/60Hz NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
AS

55°C
Ue
(V)
1000
peak

Ie
(A)
4000

NFC
In addition MicroLogic X offers a wireless proprietary connectivity
interface for communication with a Panel Server.
Smart Phone via To improve the capabilities of monitoring and control, one or two I/O
PC via Bluetooth and modules connected to the ULP bus can be associated to IFE, EIFE,
USB cable NFC wireless and IFM modules.
The EIFE is designed to monitor the three positions of the circuit
breaker when inserted in its chassis:
b Circuit breaker racked IN (CE contact),
Drawout circuit breaker
b Circuit breaker racked OUT (CD contact),
b Circuit breaker in test position (CT contact),
b No additional I/O module is required to monitor these three positions.
The connection of an FDM 128 display unit on the Ethernet internal bus
is possible for any configuration.
The following control orders, information and data, are made available
on Ethernet and Modbus SL:
DB445887.ai

b Control orders:
24V 0V

v MX diag&com opening voltage release control

v XF diag&com closing voltage release control
ULP Port Local b Events:
Supervisor v All the events logged in the event histories of MicroLogic X
b Status indications:
v ON/OFF (0/F)
v Spring charged CH
Switch
SDE2 UC4
UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

v Ready to close
FDM128
UC2 /Res

v Fault trip SDE

UC1
COM

EIFE Module
Masterpa
HA10
ct
12kV
v Connected / disconnected / test position CE/CD/CT
b Measurements
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA

NFC
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

v Instantaneous measurement information

Smart Phone via v Averaged measurement information
PC via Bluetooth and v Maximeter / minimeter
USB cable NFC wireless v Energy metering
v Power quality...
b Operating assistance:
v Protection settings and alarm
Fixed circuit breaker v Histories
v Maintenance indicators
b Availability:
v Access control by password like existing offer. To be initialized by the
Ethernet Internet user.
ULP Wireless proprietary connectivity
Modbus SL
[1] Connection to a Modbus Network through a IFM interface.

E-4
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture overview

A MicroLogic X control unit can be easily incorporated in Enerlin'X digital system by means of EIFE and IFE interface
modules. Enerlin’X provides a simple and reliable link to local LCD displays and expert applications over Ethernet.
It makes available on Ethernet most of the information collected in the circuit breakers and other electrical devices
installed in a low voltage switchboard: Status, measurements, counters and alarms etc.

DB419762.ai
System Security ULP connectivity
Operational security is an important concern for ULP is a fast communication link dedicated to circuit

y
alit
electrical installations when it comes to local and breaker monitoring and control. It connects the

nti

Int
de
remote interaction. Confidentiality, integrity and circuit breaker to an Ethernet interface or to an I/O

eg
nfi

rity
availability (also known as the AIC triangle) is a module. ULP operates at a speed of 1 Mb/s and is

Co
model designed to guide policies for information plug & play.
Availability
security within an organization and these elements
are considered as the three crucial components of
security. Ethernet connectivity
In this context, confidentiality is a set of rules that Ethernet is a data link and physical layer protocol Confidentiality
limits access information (equivalent to privacy), complying with the IEEE 802.3 standard. It operates b Bluetooth Smart:
integrity is the assurance that the information is at a speed of 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps. The maximum Wireless Encrypted
trustworthy and accurate, and availability is a length of Ethernet cable between two devices is 100 (AES-128)
guarantee of reliable access to the information by meters. communication
authorized people. IFE and EIFE Ethernet interfaces can be connected
(IEEE 802.15.1)
to a PC, a laptop or a PLC over Ethernet.
Bluetooth Smart connectivity
E
b NFC: operates in very
IFE Ethernet switchboard server provides a Modbus
MicroLogic X control units are equipped (as TCP/IP gateway over Ethernet to enable Modbus short range (few
standard) with Bluetooth 4.0 Smart wireless TCP communication from a Modbus TCP master to centimeters)
communication which allows to establish a any Modbus slave devices connected to it. b Compliant with NIST
connection with a smartphone equipped with the The maximum active Modbus TCP client connection 800-121 concerning
same technology. Bluetooth Smart complies with is twelve. pairing method and
the IEEE 802.15.1 standard. IFE and EIFE Ethernet interfaces have an encryption.
embedded web server (web page).

Proprietary connectivity Modbus connectivity Integrity

MicroLogic X control unit are natively equipped with Modbus SL is a communication protocol widely b Only Schneider
a proprietary connectivity means based on IEEE used in industrial networks. Electric firmwares
802.15.4 standard which allows a connection with It operates according to a “master-slave” mode. can be installed in the
a Com'X module. The slaves communicate one at a time with the MicroLogic X control
master. This is an RS 485 open bus on which
unit
communicating Modbus devices are connected.
NFC connectivity All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be
b Only Schneider
connected on to the bus. Electric digital
MicroLogic X control units are equipped with a near
field communication (NFC) which allows data The maximum number of devices that may be modules can be
exchange with a smartphone equipped with the connected to a bus depends on the type of devices, installed in the
same technology and follow the standard the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume MicroLogic X control
ISO/IEC 15693-3. of data exchanged, and the expected response unit.
time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to 32
connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus Availability
SL bus is 1200 meters. b Access control done
by password. To be
initialized by the user
to change the default
values.
b Restricted USB
usage for
communication
profile only (no mass
storage).

E-5
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture overview

Digital Switchboard Example Architecture

DB445889.ai

A
Z ure
Pa c T MT rchitect
ter na Internet
Mas unicatio
c
24V
Power
1
2

EcoStruxure Energy Hub

Inputs I1
Digital I1C 3
I2 4
I2C 5
6

m
Com
ID:
MAC N°:
serial

Server
Panel L
PAS600

On-site control
and monitoring system
J

I
F
Test

C
Test

B
E
Test
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
IFE
lin'X
Ener
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC
02
LV4340

A1

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4

D
I5
I6

63
LV4340

IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

E
Trip

Trip

ComPacT NSX
rip

ComPacT NSX
K
ComPacT NSX
L H

H
M COM
UC1
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC3
MC2 SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

IGO
ic
MicroLog

LS ERMS

Status act
Ready Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE

H
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

OK

Back

S
ERM

+24VDC
CMD
SDOF
0V

MasterPacT drawout
circuit breaker

ULP is a communication link dedicated to circuit breaker A Panel Server (PAS600) H I/O Smart Link
monitoring and control
B FDM128 I IFM
C FDM121 J Switch
D EIFE K ULP port
24 V DC ULP
E IFE L ULP cord
Ethernet Wi-Fi
F I/O M BCIM
Modbus SL Proprietary wireless connectivity G PowerTag Energy with
radio frequency
Note: For every MasterPacT MTZ, all the associated interface modules (ULP port, IFE, IFM, communication
I/O) must have the same 24 V DC power supply.

E-6
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture overview

Enerlin'X digital devices for MasterPacT connection and monitoring

Name Function Protocol Bin. Input Analog. Bin. Comercial
Input Output Reference
(to device) (to
server)
Panel Server Gateway Modbus SL, Modbus 2 PAS600L,
A Modbus TCP/IP or TCP/IP or (PAS600L PAS600
IEEE802.15.4 Wi-Fi
only)

Gateway and data Modbus SL, Modbus 2 - - PAS800L,

logging Modbus TCP/IP or TCP/IP or (PAS800L PAS800,
IEEE802.15.4 Wi-Fi
only) PAS800P

FDM128 Ethernet LCD Modbus TCP/IP - - - - LV434128

color touch display
B

FDM121 Ethernet LCD ULP - - - - TRV00121

color touch display
C
E
EIFE Embedded ULP Modbus - - - LV851001
Ethernet interface [2] TCP/IP
D

IFE Ethernet interface [2] ULP, Modbus - - - LV434002

switchboard & Gateway Modbus SL or TCP/IP
server TCP/IP
E IFE Ethernet interface ULP Modbus - - - LV434001
interface for circuit breakers TCP/IP

IFM Modbus interface for ULP Modbus - - - LV434000

interface circuit breakers SL

I/O Input/Output ULP - 6 1 3 LV434063

application module
F for circuit breaker

Ethernet Gateway or Interface: routes the internal traffic (ULP or other protocole) to the Internet: the outgoing messages are coded
with Modbus TCP/IP protocol.

Server (Switchboard, Energy): routes the internal traffic to the Internet. Includes complementary functions such as data logging and storage.
Provides device status and energy trends via internal web pages.

Note: For more information, see ULP System for MasterPacT and ComPacT (IEC Standard) - User Guide DOCA0093EN and EcoStruxure Power for
Commercial & Industrial Buildings - Smart Panels Assembly Guide ESXP1G003EN.

E-7
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture overview
DB432696.ai

Trip

Trip

D
Trip

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

MicroLogic
IGO
LS

B
ERMS

Status
Ready
Masterpact
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA Trip
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

OK

Back Trip

ERMS

Trip

C Trip

Trip

Trip

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

H
E
MicroLogic
IGO
LS ERMS
ct
Status Masterpa
HA10
Ready 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

OK

Back

ERMS

H
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

H
A1

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4

F
I5
I6

LV434063

IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

+24VDC
CMD
SDOF0V

I
X IFE
Enerlin'

Test

Test

Test

LV434002

E Power
c
24V

1
2

Inputs I1
Digital I1C 3
I2 4
I2C 5
6

J
ID:
MAC N°:
serial

Server
Panel
PAS600L

A B C D E F G I J
I6
C
I5
c I4
24V
C
Power
1 I3
2 I2
C
I1
Inputs I1
Digital I1C 3
I2 4
I2C 5
6
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

ID:
A1
MAC N°:
serial

O1
IFE I1
lin'X O2
Ener I2
O3
I3

H
Server
Panel L APP
PAS600
I4
I5
I6

02
LV4340 063
LV434

Test
IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

Ethernet A Panel Server (PAS600) G PowerTag Energy with Breaker ULP cord: ULP cable:
Modbus SL radio frequency b 0.3 m b 0.3 m
B FDM128
ULP communication
b 1.3 m b 0.6 m
C FDM121 H I/O Smart Link
b 3m b 1m
D EIFE I IFM
b 5m b 3m
E IFE J Switch
b 5m
F I/O Module

E-8
 www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture overview

Communication architecture Possible connection of

an I/O module to the
MTZ drawout circuit breaker RJ45 ULP connector.
DB432697.ai

I6
C
I5
I4
C

B
I3
I2
C

D
I1

ULP system
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C

A
I1
+ C
24VD

A1

ULP system is a fast

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

IO
O3
LV43

T1
4063

A1
T2
communication link dedicated
to circuit breaker monitoring
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

and control.
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH
It is well adapted to extreme
B environments.
MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

OF1

A choice of recommended
OF4
OF11

E
OF14
OF21
OF24

cables with different lengths are

act
Masterp
HA10 12kV

OR
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

A provided for the connection of

EIFE, IFE and I/O modules to a
ULP port.
F

Test

Pull
MICROLO
GIC

A EIFE / IFE interfaces

MTZ fixed circuit breaker MTZ fixed circuit breaker

EIFE/IFE interfaces provide
an IP address to any circuit
E
without I/O module with additional I/O module
breaker fitted with a ULP port.
The EIFE / IFE interfaces make
all available data from the
circuit breaker accessible from
DB445694.ai
DB432698.ai

an Ethernet-compatible display
C 'X IFE
F
(FDM128), a PC, or a Modbus
Enerlin

D
OR
4002
LV43

C TCP/IP client.
D
'X IFE
Enerlin Test

EIFE / IFE interfaces generate

OR
4002
LV43

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3

their own web pages.

I2
C
I1

F
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C I6
I1 C
I5
+ C I4
24VD C
I3
I2
C
I1

I6
C
I5
I4
A1 I3
C
I2
C
I1
O1 +
I1 24VD
C
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
Test I4
I5

E
I6
A1

4063 O1
LV43 I1
O2
I2

I/O application module

O3
IO APP
I3
I4
A1
T2 I5
O3 T1
34 I6
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13 4063
LV43

IO
A1

I/O is specifically for circuit

T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

E breakers with a ULP link.

It may ensure:
A b The control of the circuit
A
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

breaker
SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3

b The control of applications

UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

associated with the circuit

act
Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
act Ie
Masterp
HA10 Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
12kV (V)
NW40 Uimp 4000
Ui 1250V 1000
Ue 1150V 690/1000V AC23A 50/60Hz
50kA/1s 60947-3 UNE
Ue peak IEC BS CEI
VDE
Icw 105kA UTE
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS

breaker: cooling system, load

60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

control, lighting and pulse

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Ethernet
Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

ULP metering acquisition.

24 V DC
A ULP port D I/O module
Modbus SL
B EIFE communiation module E Breaker ULP cord
C IFE communiation module F IFM interface Note: For every MasterPacT MTZ, all the associated interface modules (ULP port, IFE, IFM,
I/O) must have the same 24 V DC power supply.

E-9
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
ULP interface module

In the new generation of MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers, an internal communication protocol (ULP port) is
systematically embedded in the MicroLogic X control unit (no longer a need for BCM module as in previous
generations), as well as the microswitch contacts to obtain complementary circuit breaker status information
(OF, SDE, PF, CH).

MasterPacT MTZ Fixed circuit breaker

DB421308.ai

MasterPacT MTZ Drawout circuit breaker

DB421309.ai

A
In 1600

MicroLogic X
ULP port
Microswitch contact (OF, SDE, PF, CH)

Note: Reminder: MasterPacT MTZ Switch Disconnector ranges (HA, NA) have no
communication capabilities. They are not compatible with any communication architecture.

E-10
 www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
ULP interface module

Depending on the type of the device (MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3, fixed or drawout version), the ULP port and its corresponding wiring kit
is supplied as standard or as an option as shown in the following chart :

ULP port versions

MTZ1/2/3 fixed MTZ1 Drawout MTZ2/3 Drawout

24 V DC power supply

DB421313.eps
DB421312.eps
DB421311.eps

RJ45
RJ45
RJ11
24V 0V

RJ11
24 V DC power supply

24 V DC

0V 24V
power supply

RJ45 ULP connector

E
for IFE - I/O - IFM connection

Optional Optional Standard

Notes:
- Standard ULP port (RJ45): used for connection of legacy devices (IO-IFE-IFM)
- EIFE port (RJ11): it is not possible to connect an EIFE and an IFM or an IFE at the same time

ULP port generalities

The targets of the ULP port are:
b To interconnect the MicroLogic X with EIFE, IFE, IFM and I/O module.
b To supply power to the control unit and the EIFE module.
b To integrate the ULP bus line termination.
Note:
DB445884.ai

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C

b Possible connection of an I/O module

I1

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

I1
A1

O1
on the RJ45 ULP connector.
b When the ULP port is installed the 24 V DC
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

power supply shall be disconnected from

063
LV434

IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
23

the terminals F1/F2 of the control unit.

O1
14
13

IO Module b The connection of the +/- of the power

Ener
lin'X
IFE supply either on terminals F1/F2 of
LV4340
02
MicroLogic X or on the +/- terminals of the
ULP port must be strictly respected. Crossing
IFE the polarities may damage the device.
b For every MasterPacT MTZ the 24 V DC
supply of all the associated interface modules
Test (ULP port, IFE, IFM, I/O) must be delivered
from the same 24 V DC power supply.
IFM Interface

EIFE
ULP port

Circuit Breaker
informations (status...)

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
G4
G3 N UC2 /Res
UC1
L COM

or
t
Outpu

act
Masterp
12kV
Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA

Information data
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA

24 V DC
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

MicroLogic ABL8 RPS 24 V DC power supply

power supply
Aux
Power VPS

Power supply
A
In 1000

E-11
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface
PB115959_36.eps

EIFE embedded Ethernet interface description

Introduction
The EIFE embedded Ethernet interface module enables drawout MasterPacT MTZ
circuit breakers to be connected to an Ethernet network.
It provides a digital access to all the data delivered by the MasterPacT control unit
MicroLogic X. In addition it monitors the three positions of the circuit breaker when
inserted in its chassis:
b Circuit breaker racked IN,
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface b Circuit breaker racked OUT,
b Circuit breaker in test position.
EIFE becomes then the best solution for high uptime demanding switchboards.
EIFE interface: ref. LV851001
Provides an Ethernet access to a single drawout MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker.
Function
One circuit breaker is connected to the EIFE interface via its ULP port.
EIFE interface features
b Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
b Device profile web service for discovery of the EIFE interface on the LAN.
b Ethernet interface for drawout MasterPacT circuit breakers.
b Secure embedded set-up web pages over HTTPS.
b Secure embedded monitoring web pages over HTTPS.
b Secure embedded control web pages over HTTPS.

E b
b
Chassis status management (CE, CD, CT).
Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
b RBAC (Role Base Access Control).
b RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol) is a solution to implement redundant
Ethernet networks.
b NTP (network time protocol) for precise time synchronization.
Mounting
The EIFE interface is mounted on the chassis of the Drawout circuit breaker.
There are two types of dedicated ULP cable, one for the MTZ1 and one for
MTZ2/MTZ3.
24 V DC power supply
The EIFE power supply is provided by the ULP port through the dedicated ULP
cable.
EIFE interface firmware update
The firmware can be updated using EcoStruxure Power Commission software.
Required circuit breaker communication accessory
The connection to EIFE interface requires a ULP communication port on the chassis
of the drawout MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers.

B
DB445629.ai

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

OF1

B
OF4
OF11
OF14
OF21
OF24

IGO
ic

C
MicroLog

LS ERMS
act
Status Masterp
HA10 12kV
Ready
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

OK

Back

S
ERM

A ULP circuit breaker port

Ethernet
ULP B EIFE interface
Pull

24 V DC C ULP cable

EIFE mounting and cabling

E-12
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface

A B

DB419373.eps
General characteristics
Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10
Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking
Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
C
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance As the EIFE is mounted on the circuit A Ethernet port 1.
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations breaker it complies with its mechanical B Ethernet port 2.
characteristics C ULP port.
Electrical characteristics
Consumption 100 mA at 24 V DC
Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:
b 8 kV air discharge
b 6 kV contact discharge
Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 20 V/m
Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
Immunity to surges
Immunity to conducted radio
IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode
IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V
E
frequency field
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 51 x 51 x 52.5 mm
Mounting Breaker DIN rail of MTZ1 & MTZ2/MTZ3
Weight 75 g EIFE alone
Degree of protection of the installed b IP20 for connectors
module b IP30 for other areas
Connections b RJ45 for Ethernet
b Industrial USB connector for ULP

EIFE web page description

Monitoring and control web page: b E-mail server configuration
b Real time data b Alarms to be e-mailed
b Device logging. b Device logging
b Single device control. b Device log export
Diagnostics web page: b RSTP configuration
b EIFE communication status b SNMP parameters
b Ethernet and protocols statistics b Preferences.
b IMU information Security web page:
Setup web page: b IP network settings
b Device localization/name b advanced services control
b Ethernet configuration (dual port) b Modbus TCP/IP filtering
b IP configuration b Certificates management
b Date and time b Users management

E-13
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
IFE Ethernet interface
PB115852.eps

IFE interface server description

Introduction
The IFE interface enable LV circuit breakers to be connected to an Ethernet network.
The IFE interface are both equipped with two ULP ports and two Ethernet ports.
The following circuit breakers can be connected to IFE interface and to IFE
switchboard server: Fixed type MasterPacT MTZ, ComPact NSX or PowerPact.

IFE interface: ref. LV434001

Provides an Ethernet access to a single LV circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is
connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port and a prefabricated ULP cord [1].
IFE interface, ref.: LV434001

IFE interface
b Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
b Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface and IFE switchboard
server on the LAN.
b ULP compliant for localization of the IFE interface in the switchboard.
b Ethernet interface for MasterPacT, ComPact and PowerPact circuit breakers.
b Support of Modbus TCP/IP communication protpocol.
b Support of IEC61850 communication protocol (only if IEC61850 for MTZ digital
module is installed on the MicroloLogic X control unit).
b Secure embedded set-up web pages over HTTP.
b Secure embedded monitoring web pages over HTTPS.
b Secure embedded control web pages over HTTPS.
b Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
b Internal real-time clock with battery back-up.
b RBAC (Role Base Access Control) for the embedded control web pages.
E b RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol) is a solution to implement redundant
Ethernet networks.
b NTP (network time protocol) for precise time synchronization.

Mounting
The IFE interface is DIN rail mounting devices.

24 V DC power supply
The IFE interface must be supplied either with a 24 V DC AD or with a 24 V DC ABL8
RPS power supply.
Note: The connection of the +/- of the power supply on +/- terminals of the IFE device must be
strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may damage the device.

IFE interface firmware update

The firmware can be updated using the EcoStruxure Power Commission software.

Required circuit breaker communication modules

The connection to IFE interface or to IFE switchboard server requires ULP
communication ports. Every MasterPacT MTZ, fixed type circuit breakers is
equipped with a ULP port connected to its associated IFE Ethernet interface module
by a prefabricated ULP cord. The IFE Ethernet interface modules are equipped with
two ULP RJ45 connectors.When one is not used, it must be closed with a ULP
terminator.

E-14
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
IFE Ethernet interface

DB419230.eps
General characteristics 24VDC

Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10 ETH1 ETH2

Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking

Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
A B
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 J L

DB425732-2.eps
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
ETH1 ETH2

15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal

Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Enerlin'X IFE

5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz

IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
C
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT

Electrical characteristics
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT

Module Status
D
Modbus-SL

Consumption 150 mA at 24 V DC
Network Status

T E
LV434001

Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2: F

b 8 kV air discharge
b 6 kV contact discharge R

Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m

Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode I H G E
Immunity to conducted radio IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V

DB425733.eps
frequency field
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 72 x 105 x 71 mm
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb)
Degree of protection bO n the front panel (wall mounted
of the installed I/O enclosure): IP4x
b Connectors: IP2x
b Other parts: IP3x M
Connections Screw type terminal blocks
A Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication port.
B 24 V DC power supply terminal block.
C Ethernet communication LEDs:
IFE web page description
yellow: 10 Mb
Monitoring and control web page: b Device logging green: 100 Mb.
b Real time data b Device log export D Module status LED:
b Device logging. b RSTP configuration steady off: no power
b Single device control. b SNMP parameters steady green: device operational
Diagnostics web page: b Preferences steady red: major fault
b EIFE communication status b Advanced services control
flashing green: standby
b Ethernet and protocols statistics b User accounts
flashing red: minor fault
b IMU information b Web page access.
flashing green/red: self-test.
Setup web page: Security web page: E Network status LED:
b Device localization/name b IP network settings
steady off: no power/no valid IP address
b Ethernet configuration (dual port) b advanced services control
steady green: connected, valid IP address
b IP configuration b Modbus TCP/IP filtering
steady orange: default IP address
b Date and time b Certificates management
steady red: duplicated IP address
b E-mail server configuration b Users management
flashing green/red: self-test.
b Alarms to be e-mailed
F Sealable transparent cover.
G QR code to product information.
H ULP status LED.
I Test button (accessible with cover closed).
J Locking pad.
L Device name label.
M ULP ports.

E-15
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
IFE switchboard server

IFE switchboard server description

PB119096.eps

Introduction
The IFE switchboard server enable LV circuit breakers to be connected to an
Ethernet network. The IFE switchboard server incorporates a Modbus gateway.
The IFE switchboard server are both equipped with two ULP ports and two Ethernet
ports. The IFE switchboard server is equipped with a Modbus RS 485 serial
connection. The following circuit breakers can be connected to IFE interface and to
IFE switchboard server: Fixed type MasterPacT MTZ, ComPact NSX or PowerPact.

IFE switchboard server: ref. LV434002

Provides an Ethernet access to one or several LV circuit breakers. It allows to
IFE switchboard server, ref.: LV434002 interface to Ethernet:
b One single circuit breaker connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port and
a prefabricated ULP cord,
b Up to 12 ComPact NSX connected through the Modbus serial line interface.
Each ComPact NSX is connected to Modbus by means of a dedicated IFM
interface module performing the ULP/Modbus conversion.
The connection between each ComPact NSX and its associated IFM interface is
realized by a prefabricated ULP cord connected to ULP ports.

IFE switchboard server

b Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
b Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface and IFE switchboard
server on the LAN.
b ULP compliant for localization of the IFE interface in the switchboard.
b Ethernet interface for MasterPacT, ComPact and PowerPact circuit breakers.
E b Support of Modbus TCP/IP communication protpocol
b Gateway for Modbus-SL connected devices
b Embedded set-up web pages.
b Embedded monitoring web pages.
b Embedded control web pages.
b Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
b Internal real-time clock with battery back-up.
b RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol) is a solution to implement redundant
b Ethernet networks.
b NTP (network time protocol) for precise time synchronization

Mounting
The IFE switchboard server are DIN rail mounting device.
A stacking accessory enables the user to connect several IFMs (ULP to Modbus
serial line interfaces) to an IFE switchboard server without additional wiring.

24 V DC power supply
The IFE switchboard server must be supplied either with a 24 V DC AD or with
a 24 V DC ABL8 RPS power supply.
The IFMs stacked to an IFE switchboard server are supplied by the IFE, thus it is not
necessary to supply them separately.
Note: The connection of the +/- of the power supply on +/- terminals of the IFE device must be
strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may damage the device.

IFE switchboard server firmware update

The firmware can be updated using the EcoStruxure Power Commission software.

Required circuit breaker communication modules

The connection to IFE interface or to IFE switchboard server requires ULP
communication ports. Every MasterPacT MTZ, fixed type circuit breakers is
equipped with a ULP port connected to its associated IFE Ethernet interface module
by a prefabricated ULP cord. The IFE Ethernet interface modules are equipped with
two ULP RJ45 connectors.When one is not used, it must be closed with a ULP
terminator.

E-16
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
IFE switchboard server

DB419230.eps
General characteristics 24VDC

Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10 ETH1 ETH2

Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking

Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
A B
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 J K L

DB425732.eps
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 ETH1 ETH2

15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal

Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Enerlin'X IFE
5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
C
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT

Electrical characteristics ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT

Module Status
D
Modbus-SL

Consumption 150 mA at 24 V DC Network Status

E
T
Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:
LV434001

F
b 8 kV air discharge
b 6 kV contact discharge R

Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m

Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode I H G E
Immunity to conducted radio IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V

DB425733.eps
frequency field
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 72 x 105 x 71 mm
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb)
Degree of protection bO n the front panel (wall mounted
of the installed I/O enclosure): IP4x
b Connectors: IP2x
b Other parts: IP3x
M
Connections Screw type terminal blocks
A Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication port.
B 24 V DC power supply terminal block.

IFE web page description C Ethernet communication LEDs:

yellow: 10 Mb
Monitoring web page: b Setup web page: green: 100 Mb.
b Real time data b Device localization/name D Module status LED:
b Device logging. b Ethernet configuration
steady off: no power
Control web page: (dual port)
steady green: device operational
b Single device control. b IP configuration
steady red: major fault
b Modbus TCP/IP filtering
Diagnostics web page: b Date and time flashing green: standby
b Statistics b E-mail server configuration flashing red: minor fault
b Device information b Alarms to be e-mailed flashing green/red: self-test.
b IMU information b Device logging E Network status LED:
b Read device registers b Device log export steady off: no power/no valid IP address
b Communication check. b SNMP parameters steady green: connected, valid IP address
Maintenance web page: b Preferences steady orange: default IP address
b Circuit breaker health status b Advanced services control steady red: duplicated IP address
b Maintenance log b User accounts flashing green/red: self-test.
b Maintenance counters. b Web page access. F Sealable transparent cover.
G QR code to product information.
H ULP status LED.
I Test button (accessible with cover closed).
J Locking pad.
K Modbus traffic status LED.
L Device name label.
M ULP ports.

E-17
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
IFM Modbus interface
PB119111.eps

Function
IFM - Modbus communication interface - is required for connecting
MasterPacT MTZ, NT/NW or ComPact NS and NSX to Modbus network whenever
the circuit breaker has an ULP port (Universal Logic Plug). The port is available
on BCM ULP for MasterPacT range and BSCM module for ComPact range.
Note: IFM is defined as an IMU (Intelligent Modular Unit) within the ULP connection System
documentation.

Once connected to IFM, the circuit breaker is considered as a slave by the Modbus
master. Its electrical values, alarm status, open/close signals car be monitored
or controlled by a Programmable Logic Controller or any other system.
IFM Modbus communication interface.
Ref.: LV434000.
Characteristics
ULP port
2 RJ45 sockets, internal parallel wiring.
b Connection of a single circuit breaker.
b An ULP line terminator must be connected to the second RJ45 ULP socket.
The RJ45 sockets deliver a 24 V DC supply fed from the Modbus socket.
A B Built-in test function, for checking the correct connection to the circuit breaker.
DB425796.eps

Modbus slave port

b Modbus Serial RJ45 port - RJ45 connector provides fast and reliable wiring.
b Lateral socket, for DIN rail stackable connector.
Mo
b Both top and lateral sockets are internally parallel wired.
dbu
s
0V
b Multiple IFM can be stacked, thus sharing a common power supply and Modbus
24V
line without individual wiring.
b On the front face:
E v Modbus address setting (1 to 99): 2 coded rotary switches
v Modbus locking pad: enables or disable the circuit breaker remote control
and modification of IFM parameters.
4
3
5 6
7
8
C b Self adjusting communication format (Baud rate, parity).
x10

2 9

24 V DC power supply
1 0

5 6
4 7

b Screw clamp terminal block

3 8

D
x1

2 9
1 0

COM
E b High electrical insulation between Modbus and 24 V DC connectors
1 b Separated lines provides improved communication robustness.
COM

F
G

J I H

A Modbus Serial RJ45 port.

B 0-24 V DC power supply.
C Modbus address switches.
D Modbus traffic LED
E Modbus locking pad.
F ULP activity LED.
G Test button.
H Mechanical lock and locking seal.
I ULP RJ45 connectors.
J Stacking accessory connection

E-18
 www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
IFM Modbus interface

General characteristics
Environmental Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 61010, IEC 60950, UL 61010, UL 60950,
CISPRR 22, 24, 11, IACS E10
Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatement ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal
Resistance to sinusoidal Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6
vibrations 5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
Electrical characteristics
Consumption 30 mA at 24 V DC
Resistance to electrostatic IEC/EN 61000-4-2: 8 kV AD
discharge
Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m
Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: class 2
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 109 x 73 x 18 mm
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 120 g
Degree of protection b IP20 for connectors
of the installed module
Connections
b IP30 for other areas
b RJ45 for ULP and Modbus SL E
b Screw type terminals for Power

Recommended IFM installation

Stacking IFM
DB425861.ai

DB425813.eps

Test

Test
Test

Stacking accessories Up to 12 stacked IFM

Stacking an IFE switchboard server with IFMs
DB425811.eps

Test Test

Test Test

Test Test

IFE
lin'X
Ener

002
LV434

E-19
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Components
I/O Application module
PB119234.eps

I/O application module description

Description
The I/O input/output application module for LV breaker is one of the components of
ULP architecture. Built in functionalities and applications enhance control and
monitoring needs.
ULP system architecture including I/O modules can be built without any restrictions
using a wide range of circuit breakers:
b MasterPacT MTZ1/MTZ2/MTZ3/NT/NW,
b ComPact NS1600b-3200,
b ComPact NS630b-1600,
b ComPact NSX100-630 A.
I/O application module
The I/O application module is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application modules can be connected in the same ULP architecture.

I/O input/output interface for LV breaker resources

The I/O application module resources are the following:
b 6 digital inputs that are self powered for either NO and NC dry contact or pulse
counter,
b 3 digital outputs that are bistable relay (5 A maximum),
b 1 analog input for Pt100 temperature sensor.

Pre-defined applications
5 Pre-defined applications improve the IMU approach (Intelligent Modular Unit)
DB419578.eps

E
4 6
in a simple way.
3 7
A 9-position rotary switch on the front of the I/O module allows to select the pre-defined
2 8 applications. Each position is assigned to a pre-defined application except position 9
1 9 which allows the user to define a specific application by means of the customer
APP
engineering tool. The switch is set in factory to the pre-defined application 1.
For each application the input/output assignment and the wiring diagram are
pre-defined. No additional setting with the customer engineering tool is required.
DB419579.eps

DB419580.eps

The I/O and other resources not assigned to the pre-defined applications are free for
user specific applications.
User applications
The user applications with the corresponding resources are defined by means of
EcoStruxure Power Commission engineering tool. They use the resources not
assigned to the predefined applications. User applications may be required for:
b Protection improvement,
b Circuit breaker control,
b Motor control,
b Energy management,
b Monitoring.
24 V DC power supply
The I/O module must be supplied either with a 24 V DC AD or with a 24 V DC ABL8
RPS power supply.
Note: The connection of the +/- of the power supply on +/- terminals of the I/O module must be
strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may damage the device.

Mounting
The I/O is a DIN rail mounting device.

Setting locking pad

The setting locking pad on the front panel of the I/O enables the setting of the I/O
by EcoStruxure Power Commission engineering tool.

E-20
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Components
I/O Application module

DB419233.eps
General characteristics
Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10 I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6

Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking

Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3 A B
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Mechanical characteristics

DB432536.eps
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal 24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6

Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 C

5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
Electrical characteristics M 3
2
4 5 6
7
8
I1
AI
D
1 9 I2

Consumption 165 mA at 24 V DC L E
APP
I3 O1
I4 O2
I5

Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:

O3

K T
I6
F
b 8 kV air discharge
J IO G
b 6 kV contact discharge
LV434063

Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m

Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
E
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2

Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode

Immunity to conducted radio IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V
frequency field
Physical characteristics I H
Dimensions 71.7 x 116 x 70.6 mm
Mounting DIN rail

DB419235.eps
Weight 229.5 g (0.51 lb)
Degree of protection of the installed On the front panel (wall mounted 13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2

I/O application module enclosure): IP4x

I/O parts: IP3x
Connectors: IP2x 1

Connections Screw type terminal blocks

2

Digital inputs
Digital input type Self powered digital input with current limitations as
per IEC 61131-2 type 2 standards (7 mA) O N
Input limit values at state 1 19.8 - 25.2 V DC, 6.1 - 8.8 mA
(close)
A 24 V DC power supply terminal block.
Input limit values at state 0 0 - 19.8 V DC, 0 mA
(open) B Digital input terminal block: 6 inputs,
Maximum cable length 10 m 3 commons and 1 shield.
Note: for a length greater than 10 m and up to 300 m, it is mandatory to use a shielded twisted C 6 input status LEDs.
cable. The shield cable is connected to the I/O functional ground of the I/O application module. D Analog input status LED.
Digital outputs E 3 output status LEDs.
Digital output type Bistable relay F I/O application module identification labels.
Rated voltage 250 V AC maximum [1] / 30 V DC G Sealable transparent cover.
Rated carry current 5A H Analog input terminal block.
Contact resistance 30 mΩ I Digital output terminal blocks.
Maximum operating 18000 operations/hr (Mechanical) J ULP status LED.
frequency 1800 operations/hr (Electrical) K Test/reset button (accessible with cover closed).
Digital output relay protection External fuse of 5 A or less L Setting locking pad.
by an external fuse
M Application rotary switch: 1 to 9.
Maximum cable length 10 m
N Switch for I/O addressing (I/O 1 or I/O 2).
Analog inputs
O ULP connectors.
I/O application module analog input can be connected to a Pt100 temperature sensor.
Range -30 to 200 °C -22 to 392 °F
[1] 250 V AC OVC 2 according IEC/EN 60947-2 .
Accuracy ±2 °C from -30 to 20 °C ±3.6 °F from -22 to 68 °F For OVC 3 and 4 surge arresters are required
±1 °C from 20 to 140 °C ±1.8 °F from 68 to 284 °F on the polarizing voltage of the output contacts.
±2 °C from 140 to 200 °C ±3.6 °F from 284 to 392 °F
Refresh interval 5s 5s

E-21
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture components
FDM121 Display Unit

MicroLogic X measurement capabilities come into full play with the FDM121 switchboard display. It provides an
Ethernet connection via RJ45 port and displays MicroLogic X information.

FDM121 display
FDM121 The FDM121 is a device display. It collects the data from devices via ULP network. It
DB445627.ai

Main menu connects to individual breakers:

Quick view
Metering b MasterPacT MTZ1,MTZ2, MTZ3
Control b ComPacT NS, NSX
Alarms
Services
OK
FDM121display.
Display of measurements and trips
The FDM121 is intended to display measurements, trips and operating information.
It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
Measurements are easily accessed via a menu.
Trips are automatically displayed.
A pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the trip.
Status indications
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the Command Module, the FDM121
display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:
b OF: ON/OFF
E b CH: spring charged
b SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, ground fault)
b CE, CD, CT chassis management with EIFE.

Remote control
When the circuit breaker is equipped with communicating voltage releases, the
FDM121 display can also be used to control the circuit breaker (issuing of open/
close commands).

Key characteristics
b 96x96 mm display 128 x 128 pixels.
b Monochrome, LED backlight.
b Wide viewing angle: 60 x 30’
b Operating temperature range -10 °C to +55 °C.
b CE/UL/CSA marking
b 24 V DC power supply.
b Consumption 21 mA
b Two RJ45 Jack for ULP

Mounting and Protection

b The FDM121 is easily installed in a switchboard.
b The FDM121 degree of protection is IP54

E-22
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture components
FDM121 Display Unit

Main menu
General view
The Quick view menu provides quick access to the information essential
for operation.

Metering
The Metering menu displays the data made available by the MicroLogic
control unit:

Control
The Control menu is used to control a circuit breaker equipped with a
communicating motor mechanism from the FDM121 display.

Alarms
The Alarms menu.

Services
The Services menu contains all the FDM121 display setup functions and
the operating assistance information.

Sub menus
Quick view
The Quick view menu provides quick access to the information essential for E
operation.

Metering
The Metering menu displays the data made available by the MicroLogic control unit:
b Current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, frequency, and harmonic distortion
measurements
b Minimum and maximum metering values

Control
The Control menu is used to control a circuit breaker equipped with a communicating
motor mechanism from the FDM121 display.
The proposed commands are:
b Circuit breaker opening
b Circuit breaker closing with or without self-timer
b Circuit breaker reset after trip
b IO module lighting control
b IO module load control

Alarms
The Alarms menu is used to display:
b The event log file for the last 40 events and alarms detected by the devices
connected to the FDM121 display since the last power-up of the FDM121 display.
b The alarm history (for example, alarms, trips, maintenance, and control status) for
the device connected to the FDM121 display

Services
The Services menu contains all the FDM121 display setup functions and the
operating assistance information:
b Reset (peak demand values, energy meters, minimum and maximum values)
b Setup (display module date and time, parameters, display settings, date and time,
units)
b Maintenance (operation counters, load profile)
b Product version (identification of the intelligent modular units)
b Language (choice of language display)
b Monitoring and controlling the IO modules (IO status, forcing command, pulse
counters, and temperature)
b Setup of the IP address of the IFE Ethernet interface for one circuit breaker

E-23
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Architecture components
FDM128 Display Unit

MicroLogic X measurement capabilities come into full play with the FDM128 switchboard display. It connects to
Ethernet communication via RJ45 port and displays MicroLogic X information.
PB111806.eps

FDM128 switchboard display

The FDM128 is an intelligent Ethernet touch screen. It collects the data from devices
via Ethernet network. It is designed to manage up to 8 devices such as:
b MasterPacT MTZ1,MTZ2, MTZ3,
b ComPact NS,
b ComPact NSX.
The FDM128 switchboard display unit can be connected to a MicroLogic X via an
IFE or an EIFE interface module. It is easy to use and requires no special software or
FDM128 display. programming.
The FDM128 has a large screen. It requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic
screen has a backlight for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at
DB421324.ai

sharp angles.

Display of MicroLogic X measurements and trips

The FDM128 is intended to display MicroLogic X measurements, trips and operating
information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.

E Measurements are easily accessed via a menu.

Trips are automatically displayed.
A pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the trip.
General view
Status indications
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the Command Module, the FDM128
DB421325.ai

display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:

b OF: ON/OFF
b CH: spring charged
b SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, earth fault)
b CE, CD, CT chassis management with EIFE.

Remote control
When the circuit breaker is equipped with Communicating voltage releases,
Role base access control the FDM128 display can also be used to control the circuit breaker (Issuing of
open/close commands).
DB421326.ai

Main characteristics
b 115.2 x 86.4 mm with 5.7" QVGA display 320 x 240 pixels.
b Color TFT LCD, LED backlight.
b Wide viewing angle: vertical ±80°, horizontal ±70°.
b High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
b Operating temperature range -10 °C to +55 °C.
b CE / UL / CSA marking.
b 24 V DC power supply.
b Consumption y 6.8 W.
Editing devices
b One RJ45 Ethernet jack.
DB421327.ai

Mounting and Protection

b The FDM128 is easily installed in a switchboard.
b Standard door hole Ø22 mm.
b The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65.

General setting

E-24
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Architecture components
FDM128 Display Unit

DB421328.ai
Main menu
General view
Provides in one shot the information about the status of each monitored
device

Role base access control

Manage logins and passwords.

Quick view
Editing devices
Specify the devices monitored by the FDM128.

DB421329.ai
Communication setting
Set the communication parameters.

General setting
Select the language and to set the other parameters of FDM128.

E
Sub menus Measures

Quick view
DB421330.ai

Provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential operating

information (I, U, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker On/off), protection settings.

Measures
Display all the measurements (I, U, V, f, P, Q, S, E, THD, PF) with the corresponding
min/max values.

Alarms history
Display tripping and alarms histories.
alarm history
Control
DB421331.ai

Display the status of the devices (Open/Closed) and to initiate control commands
(Open/Close/Reset)

Maintenance
Display all circuit breaker health status indications and all the information generated
by the diagnostic functions (number of operations, contact wear, operating time,
internal temperature etc.)

Control
DB421332_1.ai

Maintenance

E-25
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Customer engineering tool:

EcoStruxure Power Commission software
EcoStruxure PowerCommission Experience
PB124095.eps

Project Lifecycle

Maintain
Facility managers
Software to
track installation
changes &
diagnostic features
for preventive
maintenance

E EcoStruxure EcoStruxure EcoStruxure Power

Power Design Power Build Commission
Discover Calculate Configure Buy Operate Renew

Design Select Quote Update

Build Commission
Panel builders Electrical
Simple & easy contractors &
software to set system integrator
up and test a Shorten
panelboard commissioning
time and speed up
SAT delivery with
easy-to-use software

Key Features
Build Commission Maintain
I want to test & deliver a “ready to I want to “shorten” my I want to ensure “continuity” of
commission” panel commissioning time services in “safe conditions”
b Device Discovery b Device Discovery b Settings consistency check
b Switchboard setting & testing b Multi Device Configuration b Device checkup
b Communication Test & Reports b Communication Test & Reports b Firmware upgrade
b Save my project & reports b Save my project & reports b Standard Diagnostic data
b Circuit Breaker Functional Tests b Save my project & reports
b Circuit Breaker Functional Tests
E-26
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Customer engineering tool:
EcoStruxure Power Commission software

EcoStruxure Power Commission Software

Definition
EcoStruxure Power Commission software helps the user to manage a project as part of the testing, site commissioning,
and maintenance phases of the project life cycle. With EcoStruxure Power Commission, you will get your electrical devices
configured, tested and commissioned in the simplest way. EcoStruxure Power Commission drastically reduces the
commissioning time of Smart Panels and supports the system during maintenance.
It allows the user to set up, test and generate comprehensive reports for connected panels and circuit breakers, track and
digitize assets for paperless sharing of project documents and perform firmware upgrade of communicating devices.
EcoStruxure Power Commission offers value added features like automatic discovery of connected devices. It
performs communication tests, generates reports as part of FAT reports. It generates comprehensive reports as
part of SAT reports, upgrade firmware etc.

Key Features
Device Discovery
EcoStruxure Power Commission helps the user to discover the communicating devices in a switchboard either
through Ethernet (using automatic or manual discovery) or a serial network. Once the devices in the switchboard
are discovered, the user can add those devices to the project.
Device settings
b EcoStruxure Power Commission helps the user to set the protection settings and the alarms of the devices,
MasterPacT MTZ (including dual settings only for MasterPacT MTZ) and I/O module configuration. It allows
configuration or settings to be downloaded and uploaded for multiple devices. The user can also compare
settings between the project (original settings) and device (current settings).
b EcoStruxure Power Commission also reads information (alarms, measurements, parameters) and displays
diagnostic information.
E
Communication Test
When a user has installed communicating devices in a switchboard, EcoStruxure Power Commission offers the
capability to test the communication network. Once a communication test is done, the user can generate a time
stamped communication test report.
Circuit Breaker Tests & Maintenance
Users can test the protection trip curve and other functions for low voltage circuit breakers using EcoStruxure
Power Commission. The following tests can be performed:
b Automatic trip curve test
b Zone-selective interlocking test
b Prepare for primary injection tests
b Breaker status and cradle position test
b MicroLogic X replacement (for MasterPacT MTZ only)

E-27
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Customer engineering tool:

EcoStruxure Power Commission software

Reports
EcoStruxure Power Commission offers the following reports to the users:
b Communication test report
b Comprehensive project report
b Automatic trip test report
b Breaker status and cradle position test report
b Circuit breaker advanced maintenance report
b Modbus registers extract report
Firmware Upgrade
EcoStruxure Power Commission offers the compatibility check and firmware upgrade for the following devices:
b MicroLogic X control units
b MicroLogic Active control units
b EIFE/IFE
b I/O modules
b EcoStruxure Panel Server
b Power meters
USB and Ethernet interfaces
EcoStruxure Power Commission provides access to MasterPacT MTZ through USB and Ethernet interfaces.
The following table indicates the features that are accessible through each interface:
Features USB Ethernet
Protection/Alarm settings Yes Yes
Firmware upgrade Yes Yes
Device Checkup Yes Yes
E I/O Module Configuration
Breaker status and cradle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
position test
Prepare for primary injection Yes No
tests
Automatic trip curve test Yes No
Zone-selective interlocking test Yes No

E-28
www.se.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems
Customer engineering tool:
EcoStruxure Power Commission software

Screen: Device homepage

The user can connect to the device from the device home page and do the settings configuration, do a device check up,
view maintenance information, upgrade the device with the latest firmware.
PB124016.eps

Screen: Device Configure

Once the user clicks on Configure, the below screens appear, through which the user can set up protection, alarms,
IO’s and Communication parameters of the device.

E-29
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and Systems www.se.com

Customer engineering tool:

EcoStruxure Power Commission software

Screen: Device Check up

On clicking Device Check Up, the below screens appear, through which the user can perform Open, Close and
Trip Operations on device, view device status, measurements, device histories and logs.

Screen: Firmware upgrade

Through the Firmware Upgrade screen, a user can check the compatibility of the firmware versions of the
devices and modules connected and upgrade them when needed with the device firmware baseline file.
PB115804.eps

E-30
www.se.com

Integrate in Switchboard

Operating conditions.............................................................. F-2

Installation rules
Installation in switchboard.................................................................F-6
Door interlock catch...........................................................................F-8
Power connection............................................................................F-10
Recommended busbar drilling MasterPacT MTZ1........................F-12
Recommended busbar drilling MasterPacT MTZ2 - MTZ3...........F-13
Temperature derating......................................................................F-14
Busbar sizing, front or rear horizontal connection...........................F-16
Busbar sizing Rear vertical connection...........................................F-17
Circuit breaker derating ..................................................................F-18

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices.....................................F-25
MasterPacT MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices................................F-30
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices............F-34
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices.......F-36
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices................................F-38
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices...........................F-40
MasterPacT MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices.....................................F-42
MasterPacT MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices................................F-44
Accessories.....................................................................................F-46
External modules.............................................................................F-48

Installation
Clusters............................................................................................F-53
F
Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices..............................F-54
MasterPacT MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices...................F-56
24 V DC external MicroLogic power supply...................................F-59

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

F-1
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Operating conditions

MasterPacT MTZ test conditions reproduce different customer environments, in accordance with product and
installation standards and relevant maintenance operations [1] to maximize the product lifespan.
[1] F
 or full details, please read the MasterPacT maintenance guide.

Introduction
MasterPacT MTZ is designed for specified operating conditions in terms of
temperature, humidity, vibration, altitude, corrosion, and electromagnetic
disturbances.
Beyond the limits defined here, the circuit breakers suffer accelerated aging that may
rapidly result in malfunctions.
Please refer to the MasterPacT Maintenance Guide for additional information and
consult us to confirm mechanical and electrical performances in severe conditions.
Example of application with severe operating conditions:
b Wind turbines
b Power frequency converters installed in the same switchboard or close to the
MasterPacT circuit breaker
b Emergency generators
DB419117.eps

b High vibration marine applications such as thrusters, anchor positioning systems,

etc.

Safety of operation
MasterPacT MTZ front face provides reinforced insulation (Class 2) according
to IEC 60664-1. It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control from outside.

Ambient temperature
MasterPacT MTZ is designed to operate in ambient temperature between -25 °C and
+70 °C, providing that the temperature around the breaker inside the switchboard
does not exceed +70 °C. If this condition cannot be fulfilled, dedicated measures
such as HVAC must be taken.
MasterPacT devices have succesfully passed the tests defined by the following
standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
F b IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -40 °C
b IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 °C
b IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 °C, relative humidity 95 %).
Nota: The indication of +55 °C with relative humidity of 95 % applies to test conditions. This
does not apply to normal, long term operational conditions for MasterPacT MTZ.
Shipping & Storage Installation & Operation inside
Commissioning the switchboard
surrounding the circuit
breaker [2]
MasterPacT MTZ
DB419119.eps

Temperature Relative Temperature Relative Temperature Relative

(°C) Humidity (%) (°C) Humidity (%) (°C) Humidity (%)
-40 °C/+85 °C 0...95 % -25°C/+70°C 0...95 % -25°C/+70°C 0...95 %
[2]

[2] Manual closing of circuit breaker (using pushbutton) is possible down to -35 °C.
Not all the combinations between temperature and humidity ranges are consistent
with the correct shipping, storage, commissioning and operation of MasterPacT
MTZ. Please contact Schneider Electric if more information is needed.
Vibrations
MasterPacT devices have successfully passed testing in compliance with
IEC 60068-2-6 for the following vibration levels:
b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm
b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Vibration testing to these levels is required by merchant marine inspection
organisations (such as Veritas, and Lloyd’s).

For more details on the IEC 60721-4-3 Class 3M4 standard performance and
severities, please contact your Schneider Electric representative.

F-2
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Operating conditions

Industrial environmental atmospheric conditions

DB419118.eps
MasterPacT devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard
IEC/EN 60947-1 (pollution degree up to 3).
It is nevertheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled
switchboards without excessive dust.

Profile Relevant standard

Corrosive industrial atmospheres Category 3C2 as per IEC 60721-3-3
Salt mist Level 2 as per IEC 60068-2-52
Mechanically active substances Category 3S3 as per IEC 60721-3-3
Beyond these conditions, MasterPacT MTZ must be installed inside switchboards
with an IP rating equal to or greater than IP54.

DB419120.eps
Altitude
At altitudes above 2000 meters, the characteristics of the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) lower the product characteristics as follows:
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 11 10 8
Rated insulation MTZ1 except H3, 1000 900 780 700
voltage (Ui) MTZ2 except H10,
MTZ3
MTZ2 H10 1250 1110 993 878
Maximum rated MTZ1 except H3, 690 690 630 560
operational MTZ2 except H10,
voltage 50/60 Hz Ue (V) MTZ3
F

DB419121.eps
MTZ2 H10 1150 1022 914 808
Rated current 40 °C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Note: Intermediate values can be obtained by interpolation.

Electromagnetic disturbances
MasterPacT devices are protected against:
b Overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
b Overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (for example, failure of a lighting system)
b Devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
b Electrostatic discharges produced by users.
MasterPacT devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic compatibility
tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
b IEC/EN 60947-2, Annex F
b IEC/EN 60947-2, Annex B (control units with earth-leakage function).
The above tests ensure that:
b No nuisance tripping occurs
b Tripping times are respected.
Immunity: ability of a device to operate without damage in the presence of an
electromagnetic disturbance.
Susceptibility: inability of a device to operate without damage in the presence of an
electromagnetic disturbance.
Conducted interference: disturbances generated by the device and transmitted by
the conductors (of power supply, signalling, or control) in the form of electrical
voltage.
Radiated interference: disturbances generated by the device and radiated in the
enironment in the form of electromagnetic waves.

F-3
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Operating conditions

Immunity
DB421459.ai

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Standard Level

To conducted disturbances
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH
Electrical fast transient/ burst (EFBT/B) IEC 61000-4-4 -
MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Masterpact
NW40
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Ue
Uimp
12kV

690/1000V
50kA/1s
peak
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 4
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields IEC 61000-4-6 4

Voltage dips, voltage sags, voltage interruption (AC supply) IEC 61000-4-11 -

Conducted low frequency IACS - E10 (§15) -

Harmonics and Interharmonics including mains signalling IEC 61000-4-13 3

at a.c. power ports
Immunity to conducted, common mode disturbances IEC 61000-4-16 -
of main frequencies

Oscillatory wave IEC 61000-4-18 -

Voltage dips, voltage sags, voltage interruption (DC supply) IEC 61000-4-29 -

F
To radiated disturbances
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 3

Radiated radio-frequency IEC 61000-4-3 3

electromagnetic fields

Power frequency magnetic fields IEC 61000-4-8 -

Impulse magnetic field IEC 61000-4-9 5

Oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10 -
Emission
To conducted disturbances
Limits for harmonic current emissions IEC 61000-3-2 A
Conducted emission CISPR 11/22 A
B
DB421460.ai

To radiated disturbances
Radiated emission CISPR 11/22 A
B

EMC and ERM tests compliant with: Directive RTTE -

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

b ETSI EN 300 328 and ERC Recommendation 70-03.

b FCC CFR47 Part 15, Subpart B and C, RSS-210 Issue 8
Masterpact
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000

b ETSI EN 300 440-1 /-2

AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

b ETSI EN 302 291-1 /-2.

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

 dditional EMC Tests not mandatory by IEC 60947-2 and

A
extra EMC performances.

Radiated
Conducted

F-4
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Operating conditions

Test values required by IEC/EN 60947-2 MasterPacT MTZ tested extra EMC performances

4 kV ; 5 kHz on poles and all AC supplies 4 kV ; 5 kHz and 100 kHz on poles and all AC supplies
2 kV ; 5 kHz on auxiliaries DC supply and signal ports 2 kV ; 5 kHz and 100 kHz on auxiliaries DC supply and signal ports
4 kV CM, 2 kV DM on poles and AC supply > 100 V 6.6 kV CM, 4.4 kV DM on poles.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on AC supply < 100 V 4 kV CM, 2 kV DM on MX-XF-MN voltage releases for supply > 100 V.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on MX-XF-MN voltage releases for supply < 100 V.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on 24 V DC supply.
2 kV CM, on all signals ports.
10 V CM; 0.15…80 MHz 20 V CM; 0.15...80 MHz
40 % (10/12 cycles); 70 % (25/30 cycles); 80 % (250/300 cycles)
0% (0.5 cycle); 0 % (1 cycle); 0 % (250/300 cycles)
External power supply failure:
b 3 interruptions during 5 minutes;
b switching-off time 30 s each case
Combined voltage and frequency variations
b AC: 50 Hz to 10 kHz ; 10 % of the rated voltage supply up to
harmonic 15. Then reduction at 1 % up to harmonic 100,
min 3 V RMS.
b DC: 50 Hz to10 kHz; Test voltage 10 % of the maximum voltage
supply 2 W.
AC supply of devices < 16 A

Only on pole accesses:

30-3 V; CM; 15-150 Hz; 3 V; CM; 150-1.5 kHz
3-30 V; CM; 1.5-15 kHz; 30 V; CM; 15-150 kHz
2.5 kV CM, 2,5 kV DM; 1 MHz
40 % (10/12 cycles); 70 % (25/30 cycles)
0 % (0.5 cycle); 0 % (50 ms); 0 % (250/300 cycles)
variations on DC : U ±20 %; 10 s.
External power supply failure:
b 3 interruptions during 5 minutes;
b switching-off time 30 s each case
Voltage continuous ±10 %; Voltage cyclic variation 5 %; Voltage ripple 10 %
F
8 kV air ; 8 kV contact

10 V/m ; 80 MHz…1 GHz; 1.4…2 GHz 20 V/m; 80 MHz…3 GHz

400 A/m permanently asked by IEC 61557-12 500 A/m permanently, 1000 A/m during 3 s

1000 A/m (8/20 µs wave)

100 A/m (100 kHz and 1 MHz)

- Tested on MX, XF, MN voltage releases for 240 V AC / 380 V AC

- A
B- Without VPS and with additional filters on MX, XF, MN voltage releases.
When VPS is connected 24 V DC supply is needed.

A
B- Without 24 V DC supply.
When 24 V DC supply is used additional external filtering is required.
The tests are applied to the following functions:
b Bluetooth (Low Energy and Modulation DSSS)
b Proprietary connectivity
b NFC (Near Field Communication)

F-5
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Installation in switchboard
DB419125.eps

Top and bottom power supply

MasterPacT devices can be supplied either from the top or from the bottom without
degrading performance, in order to facilitate connection when installed in a
switchboard.
DB419126.eps

DB419127.eps

Mounting the circuit breaker

It is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformly over a rigid mounting
surface such as rails or a base plate.
This mounting plane must be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm).
This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation of
the circuit breaker.
MasterPacT devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special
Mounting on rails brackets.
DB419128.eps

F Mounting with vertical brackets

DB419122.eps

DB419123.eps

Circuit breaker possible positions

Only one position is autorized.
DB419124.eps

Possible positions

F-6
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Installation in switchboard

Partitions

DB419131.eps
Sufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure good air circulation
around the circuit breaker. Any partition between top and bottom connections of the
device must be made of non-magnetic material.
For high currents, 2500 A and above, the metal supports or barriers in the immediate
vicinity of a conductor must be made of non-magnetic material [1].
Metal barriers [2] through which a conductor passes must not form a magnetic loop.
[1]
For MTZ2 H10 fixed and MTZ2 HA10 fixed it is recommended to use
2 compartments, one for the breaker alone and one for the connections and
busbars, the 2 compartments being segregated by the use of insulated barriers.
[1] non magnetic material

[2]

DB419129.eps
DB419130.eps
[2]

Busbars (MTZ1, MTZ2/MTZ3)

DB419132.eps
[3]
Creating a magnetic loop around a conductor, (via the busbar support for example),
must be strictly avoided.
To avoid this, either the supports [3] and/or the fixing screws [4] must be made of
non-magnetic materials. [4] [4]
[3]
F

65

DB419133.eps
100

Interphase barrier
If the insulation distance between phases is not sufficient (y 14 mm), it is advised to
install interphase barriers (taking into account the safety clearances).
Mandatory for MTZ2 HA10 fixed and MTZ2 H10 fixed.
Mandatory for MasterPacT MTZ1 for operational voltage Ue u 500 V not compatible
DB419134.eps

with spreaders.
For all MTZ2 H10 and HA10 draw-out up to 3200 A, the utilization of interphase
barriers is recommended.
For MTZ2 40 H10 and MTZ2 40 HA10 draw-out, only vertical terminals can be used.
Interphase barriers are recommended.

351 (MTZ1)
453 (MTZ2/MTZ3)

F-7
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Door interlock catch

Y Door interlock VPEC

DB424892.eps

Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
61 the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position.
If the breaker is put in the “connected” position with the door open, the door may be
X closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
11.4 Dimensions (mm)
Type [1] [2]
Catch not
[1] [2]
supplied MTZ1 08-16 (3P) 135 168
MTZ1 MTZ1 08-16 (4P) 205 168
MTZ2 08-40 (3P) 215 215
MTZ2 08-40 (4P) 330 215
Y
DB424893.eps

MTZ3 40-63 (3P) 660 215

MTZ3 40-63 (4P) 775 215
Ø5
a
Ø8

X
8

5 15

[1] [2]
Catch not
supplied
MTZ2 - MTZ3

F [1] Breaker in “connected” or “test” position

DB419137R.eps

DB419138.eps

Door cannot be opened

Type [1] [2]

MTZ1 08-16 (3P) 5 23
[1] F MTZ1 08-16 (4P) 5 23
F
[2] MTZ2 08-40 (3P) 87 103
[2]
Door Door MTZ2 08-40 (4P) 87 103
MTZ1 06-16 MTZ2 08-40 MTZ3 40-63 (3P) 37 53
MTZ3 40-63 (4P) 37 53
DB419139.eps

[1]

[2] F
Door
MTZ3 40-63

F-8
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Door interlock catch

Breaker in “disconnected” position

DB419141.eps
DB419140.eps
Door can be opened
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position.
It the breaker is put in the “connected” position with the door open, the door may be
closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.

MTZ1 06-16 MTZ2 08-40

DB419142.eps
MTZ3 40-63

Cable-type door interlock IPA

DB419144.eps
This option prevents opening the door when the circuit breaker is closed and
prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented. F
DB419143.eps

Db419447.eps

F-9
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Power connection

Cable connections
DB419154.eps

DB419155.eps

[1] If cables are used for the power connections, make sure that their weight is not
applied to the circuit breaker power terminals, but is supported by the panel
[2] structure.
For this, make the connections as follows:
b Extend the device terminals using short bars designed and installed according to
the recommendations for bar-type power connections:
v For a single cable, use solution [1]
v For a multiple cables, use solution [2].
b In all cases, follow the general rules for connections to busbars:
v Position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts
v The cables must be firmly secured to the framework [3].
[3] [3]
DB419156.eps

Busbar connections
[4] [5] [4]
Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the
DB419157.eps

DB419213.eps

first busbar support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective
short-circuit current.
Isc (kA) Distance A (mm)
30 350
50 300
65 250
A 80 150
100 150
150 150
b The busbars must be suitably adjusted to ensure that the connection points are
[4] positioned on the power terminals before the bolts [4] are inserted.
DB419212.eps

b The busbars weight must be supported by the busbar supports [5] that are solidly
fixed to the switchboard framework and not by the circuit breaker power terminals.

= Electrodynamic stresses
The first busbar support must be situated within a maximum distance (A) from the
power terminal of the circuit breaker. This distance must be respected so that the
= busbar can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between phases in the event of a
short circuit.The table above gives the maximum distance (A) according to the
prospective short-circuit current Isc.

F-10
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Power connection

A B C D E
DB419145.eps

A Terminal screw factory-tightened to 13 Nm (MTZ1)

and 16 Nm (MTZ2/MTZ3)
B Breaker terminal
C Busbar
D Bolt
E Washer
F Nut

Clamping

DB419149.eps
DB419148.eps
Correct clamping of busbars depends amongst other factors, on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening
torques to be used are shown in the table below.
These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, Class 8.8.
The same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French

DB419150.eps
standard NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1).
Tightening torques
Ø (mm) Ø (mm) Tightening torques (Nm) Tightening torques (Nm)
Nominal Drilling with grower or flat washers with contact or corrugated
washers
10 11 37.5 50

Busbar drilling
DB419153.eps
DB419151.eps

DB419152.eps

Isolation distance
DB419146.eps

Ui X min (mm)
600 V 8
1000 V 14

Busbar bending
When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below (a smaller radius would
cause cracks).
DB419147.eps

e (mm) Bending radius r (mm)

Min Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20

F-11
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Recommended busbar drilling MasterPacT MTZ1

Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders

50 50 63 80
DB418708.eps

DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps
15 15
12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Middle left or middle Middle spreader Left or right spreader Left or right spreader
right spreader for 4P for 3P for 4P for 3P

44 77 77 77 77
DB419465.eps

DB419466.eps

DB419467.eps

DB419469.eps

DB419469.eps
25 9.5 12.5 38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
60
30 30 30 30
12.5
82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
2 11
5 11 5 11 5 11 5 11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Vertical rear connection

32 40 50 63 80
DB419214.eps

12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

F 25 25 25 25 25

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5

60
12.5
12.5
DB419470.eps

9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Front connection via vertical connection adapters

50 50 63 80
DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps

15 15
DB418708.eps

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5

12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Top connection Bottom connection

44 2 11 89 12.5
DB419471.eps

DB419472.eps

DB419473.eps

25 9.5 25 = = 15
13

21
13 25 101
21
9.5 3 11
2 11 44

15 20

F-12
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Recommended busbar drilling MasterPacT MTZ2 - MTZ3

Horizontal rear connection MTZ2 08 to 32 MTZ3 40 to 50

50 63 80 100 100
DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps

DB419215.eps

DB419216.eps
15 15 22 28 28 22
12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max.
12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5 25 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

76
DB419474.eps

DB419217.eps
38 13
25 = = 12.5

47

3 11.5 14.5
Y

Vertical rear connection MTZ2 08 to 32, MTZ3 40 to 50

40 50 60 80 100
DB419218.eps

25 25 25 25 25
12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.
25 25 25 25 25

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
F
47
DB419475.eps

14.5 12.5
13

=
76
= 38

3 11.5 25

Front connection MTZ2 08 to 32

50 63 80
DB418709.eps
DB418708.eps

DB418710.eps

15 15
12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Top connection Bottom connection

76
DB419477.eps
DB419476.eps

25 25 13

3 11.5
12.5
12.5
3 11.5

25 25 13

F-13
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Temperature derating

The current rating of a high-ampere frame circuit breaker is highly dependent on the actual conditions of installation and
connection.
In addition to the cross-section of the connecting busbars, there are other strongly influencing factors like their orientation
(affecting convection efficiency), their length, their layout (number of bars, shape, spacing, etc. affecting conduction
efficiency in a.c.), but also the ventilation and the presence of other devices in the vinicity. Thus it is not possible, for ratings
above 1600 A, to give strict values of current rating without performing a temperature rise test in the actual swichboard
configuration, as indicated in clause 10.10.4 of IEC 61439-1 (Low Voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1:
General rules). Nevertheless, the following pages give guidelines for a first approach of connection sizing, installation
conditions, and current rating:
b Pages F-14 and F-15: indicates the maximum current rating depending on the ambient temperature around MasterPacT,
with standard busbar sizes as per IEC 60947-2 and IEC 61439-1.
For other busbar sizes, see page F-16 and F-17.
These values are based on tests performed on the circuit breaker alone in free air, as per IEC 60947-2, and give a first
approach of the thermal performance of the device in standard conditions. lt cannot be fully representative of the actual
performance of the device in a switchboard. For derating in switchboards, see Pages F-18 to F-24.
b Page F-16 and F-17: suggests dimension of busbars to reach a given current in a given ambient temperature around the
breaker.
b Pages F-18 to F-24: gives the current rating (or derating) of MasterPacT in a switchboard, depending on:
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v the ventilation (IP31, IP54)
v the number of breakers in the same column and the position of the breaker considered
v the busbar size and connection orientation (vertical or horizontal).

Evaluation and verification of the temperature Ti surrounding the circuit breakers installed
PB115714.eps

in low-voltage switchgear or controlgear assemblies

Requirements for the temperature rise in low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies with associated calculations and tests are
specified in IEC 61439-1/2 [1].
These two IEC standards lay down the definitions, the service conditions, and the requirements for construction, performance and
verification of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
F The requirements dedicated to the design, the verifications and the test of the low voltage equipment covered by the scope of
IEC 61439-1/2 can be summarized as follows:
b the design of every low-voltage switchgear shall be verified to prove its full compliance with IEC 61439-1/2.
b this is mandatory for all the constructional and performance requirements specified in the standards. Extrapolations or
analogies with similar assemblies are not allowed.
b concerning the temperature rise inside an assembly, type tests are mandatory for rated currents above 1600 A.
b for currents up to and including 1600 A, the verification of temperature rise may be performed by calculation following the
method defined in IEC 60890 technical report [1].
The IEC 60890 technical report proposes a method to determine the temperature rise of the air inside the low-voltage enclosure
without forced ventilation. The method is applicable to enclosed assemblies or partitioned sections of assemblies.
Thus, for low-voltage assemblies with a rated current up to 1600 A, the internal temperature Ti surrounding the circuit breakers and
their connections may be evaluated following the method given in IEC 60890 technical report.

According to chapter 10.10.4.3.1 of IEC 61439-1, the method for the evaluation of the temperature Ti surrounding the circuit
breaker is applicable if the following conditions are fulfilled:
b The power loss data for all built-in components is available from the component manufacturer.
b There is an approximately even distribution of power losses inside the enclosure;
PB115713.eps

b The rated current of the circuits of the assembly to be verified shall not exceed 80 % of the rated conventional free air thermal
current (Ith) if any, or the rated current (In) of the switching devices and electrical components included in the circuit.
b The mechanical parts and the installed equipment are arranged so that air circulation is not significantly impeded.

The following data is needed to calculate the temperature rise of the air inside an enclosure:
b Dimensions of the enclosure: height/width/depth;
b Type of installation of the enclosure;
b Design of enclosure, i.e. with or without ventilation openings;
b Number of internal horizontal partitions;
b Effective power loss of equipment installed in the enclosure;
b Effective power losses (Pn) of conductors installed in the enclosure.

Note: Experience shows that for external ambient temperatures up to 35 °C, the internal temperature inside IP 31 low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear assemblies does not exceed 60 °C. For degrees of protection above IP 31 the internal temperature
reaches 70 °C.
[1] IEC 61439-1: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 1: General rules
IEC 61439-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 2: Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
IEC/TR 60890: A method of temperature-rise verification of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies by
calculation.

F-14
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Temperature derating

Power dissipation (W)

b Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a 3-pole or 4-pole breaker,
in steady state temperature as per IEC/EN 60947-2.

Type of MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3

MasterPacT
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 25 32 40
H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1
H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H1 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2
H3 H3 H3 H3 H3 H2V H2V H2V H2V H2 H2V H2V H2V H2V H2V H2V
L1 L1 L1 L1 H2V H3 H3 H3 L1 L1 L1
H10 H10 H10 H10 L1 L1 L1 L1 H10 H10 H10
H10 H10 H10 H10
Drawout
55 115 90 140 150 230 250 460 137 100 220 150 330 230 480 390 470 600 670 900 600 670 900

Fixed
30 45 50 80 80 110 130 220 62 42 100 70 150 100 220 170 250 260 420 650 260 420 650

Temperature derating
b The table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as a function
of Ti around the circuit breaker and the busbars. Circuit breakers with mixed connections have
the same derating as horizontally connected breakers.
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection.

Drawout
Type of MasterPacT MTZ1 H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 MTZ2 N1 - H1 - H2 - H2V - H3 -L1 -H10 MTZ3 H1 - H2
[2] [3]
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
Ti [1] (°C) In max. (A)
In front or rear 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 –
horizontal 45 1560 3900
50 1520 3100 3800
55 1480 3030 3700
60
65 1200
1440
1400
1900
1830 1950 2450
2950
2880
3600
3500
F
70 1140 1360 1520 1750 1900 2370 2800 3400
In rear vertical 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45
50
55 1560 3900
60 1520 3800 6200
65 1480 3700 6000
70 1440 3100 3600 5800
Fixed
Type of MasterPacT MTZ1 H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 MTZ2 N1 - H1 - H2 - H2V - H3 -L1 -H10 MTZ3 H1 - H2
[2] [3]
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
Ti [1] (°C) In max. (A)
In front or rear 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 –
horizontal 45
50
55 3900
60 1560 1920 3140 3800
65 1520 1850 3050 3700
70 1480 1770 2960 3600
In rear vertical 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45
50
55
60
65 3900
70 1560 3800 6200
[1] Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
[2] Type: N1/H1/H2/H2V/H3/H10
[3] Type: L1
In. max. admissible.

F-15
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Busbar sizing, front or rear horizontal connection

MasterPacT Max. Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C Ti : 70 °C
service No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of
current 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm
thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars
MTZ1 06 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
MTZ1 06 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.60 x 10
MTZ1 08 or MTZ2 08 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10
MTZ1 10 or MTZ2 10 1000 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 2b.80x5 2b.80x5
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1400 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1600 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.50 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
MTZ2 20 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.60 x 10
MTZ2 20 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.60 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2200 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
MTZ2 25 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 2800 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10
MTZ2 32 3000 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3200 7b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10
MTZ2 40 3800 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10
MTZ2 40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10
MTZ3 40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10
MTZ3 50 4500 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10

F MTZ3 50 5000 7b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10

With MasterPacT MTZ1, it is recommended to use 50 mm-wide bars (see “Busbar drilling” in page F-12).
8b.100 x 10
DB419228.eps

Factors in tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper

Example
Conditions:
b drawout version
b horizontal busbars
b Ti: 50 °C
b service current: 1800 A
Solution:
For Ti = 50 °C, use an MTZ2 20 which can be connected with three 80 x 5 mm bars
or two 60 x 10 mm bars.
Note: For MasterPacT NT/NW, 63 mm wide bars were recommended.
For MasterPacT MTZ, 63 mm wide bars have been replaced by 60 mm wide bars which are
more standard. However 63 mm wide bars can be used instead of 60 mm.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical
calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial
experience or a temperature rise test.

F-16
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Busbar sizing Rear vertical connection

MasterPacT Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C Ti : 70 °C
service Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of
current 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm
thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars
MTZ1 06 400 1b.40 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.50 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.50 x 5 1b.30 x 10
MTZ1 06 630 1b.60 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.60 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
MTZ1 08 or MTZ2 08 800 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10
MTZ1 10 or MTZ2 10 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1400 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.100 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1600 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10
MTZ2 20 1800 2b.100 x 5 1b.100 x 10 2b.100 x 5 1b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
MTZ2 20 2000 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.125 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
MTZ2 32 2800 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.80 x 10 3b.120 x 10
MTZ2 40 3800 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.120 x 10
MTZ2 40 4000 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.120 x 10
MTZ3 40 4000 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10
MTZ3 50 4500 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 6b.120 x 10
MTZ3 50 5000 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 7b.120 x 10
MTZ3 63
MTZ3 63
5700
6300
7b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10
7b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10 8b.120 x 10
F
DB419229.eps

Factors in tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper

Example
Conditions:
b drawout version
b vertical connections
b Ti: 40 °C
b service current: 1100 A
Solution:
For Ti = 40 °C use an MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 which can be connected with two
60 x 5 mm bars or with one 60 x 10 mm bar
Note: For MasterPacT NT/NW, 63 mm wide bars were recommended.
For MasterPacT MTZ, 63 mm wide bars have been replaced by 60 mm wide bars which are
more standard. However 63 mm wide bars can be used instead of 60 mm.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical
calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial
experience or a temperature rise test.

F-17
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2000 x 400 x 400 area of outlet vents: 150 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ1 06-16 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 06 MTZ1 08 MTZ1 10 MTZ1 12 MTZ1 16
H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3 H1/H2/H3
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 40 x 5 2b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard 4 H1/L1 H1/L1
(➡ IP31) 3 630 630 800 800 1000/1000 1000/1000 1250 1250 1400 1520
[1] Ta = 35 °C 2
DB419219.eps

1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/950 1000/1000 1250 1250 1330 1440
Ta = 45 °C
2
1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/890 1000/960 1200 1250 1250 1340
Ta = 55 °C
2
[2] 1

[1] Area of outlet vents: 150 cm2

F [2] Area of inlet vents: 150 cm²

Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/960 1000/1000 1250 1250 1330 1400
Ta = 35 °C 2
DB419220.eps

1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/910 1000/980 1220 1250 1260 1330
Ta = 45 °C
2
1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/860 1000/930 1150 1230 1200 1260
Ta = 55 °C 2
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-18
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1100 x 500 area of outlet vents: 300 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ1 06-08 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 06 H1/H2/H3/L1 MTZ1 08 H1/H2/H3/L1
Switchboard composition
5
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 40 x 5 2b. 50 x 5

Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 5 630 630 800

[1] 4 630 630 630 800 800
DB419221.eps

[1]
3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
Ta = 35 °C
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 45 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
[2] 4 630 630 630 800 800
[2]
Ta = 55 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800

[1] Area of outlet vents: 300 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 300 cm²
1 630
F
Non ventilated switchboard 5 630 630 800
(➡ IP54) 4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 35 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
DB419222.eps

2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 45 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 55 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-19
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1100 x 500 area of outlet vents: 300 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ1 10-16 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 10 H1/H2/H3/L1 MTZ1 12 H1/H2/H3 MTZ1 16 H1/H2/H3
Switchboard composition
5
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

2b. 60 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 H1/L1
H1/L1
4 1000/1000 1250
DB419221.eps

[1]
[1]
3 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1500
Ta = 35 °C
2 1000/10001000/1000 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1460 1600 1550
1
5
4 1000/1000 1250
Ta = 45 °C 3 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1420
2 1000 /960 1000/1000 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1400 1500 1480
1
5
[2]
4 1000/920 1250
[2]
Ta = 55 °C 3 1000/950 1000/930 1250 1250 1330
2 1000/900 1000/1000 1000/970 1000/950 1250 1250 1250 1250 1300 1400 1370

F [1] Area of outlet vents: 300 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 300 cm²
1

Non ventilated switchboard 5

(➡ IP54) 4 1000/950 1250
Ta = 35 °C 3 1000/10001000/960 1250 1250 1370
DB419222.eps

2 1000/10001000/1000 1000/10001000/970 1250 1250 1250 1250 1400 1500 1400

5
4 1000 /900 1180
Ta = 45 °C
3 1000 /950 1000 /910 1250 1190 1300
2 1000/950 1000/1000 1000 /960 1000 /930 1250 1250 1250 1220 1350 1430 1320
5
4 1000/850 1120
Ta = 55 °C
3 1000/900 1000/860 1200 1130 1210
2 1000/880 1000/970 1000/910 1000/870 1210 1250 1210 1150 1250 1350 1250

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-20
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ2 08-10 N1/H1/H2/H2V/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 08 N1/H1/H2/H2V/L1/H10 MTZ2 10 N1/H1/H2/H2V/L1/H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5

2b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4 800
3 800 800 1000
DB419223.eps

[1]
Ta = 35 °C 2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 45 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 55 °C
[2] 2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm².

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm².

F
Non ventilated switchboard 4 800
(➡ IP54) 3 800 800 1000
Ta = 35 °C 2 800 800 800 1000 1000
DB419224.eps

1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 45 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 55 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-21
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ2 12-16 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 12 N1 MTZ2 12 H1/H2/H2V/L1/ MTZ2 16 N1 MTZ2 16 H1/H2/H2V/
H10 L1/H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

3b. 50 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3 1250 1250
DB419223.eps

[1]
Ta = 35 °C 2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1600 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1550 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
4
3 1250 1250
Ta = 45 °C
2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1500 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1470 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
4
3 1250 1250
Ta = 55 °C
[2] 2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1380 1470
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1380 1500 1500 1520 1600 1600

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm²
F Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3 1240 1250
Ta = 35 °C 2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1425 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1440 1550 1550 1600 1600 1600
4
DB419224.eps

3 1170 1250
Ta = 45 °C
2 1210 1210 1250 1250 1360 1500
1 1200 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1360 1470 1470 1500 1600 1600
4
3 1100 1250
Ta = 55 °C
2 1140 1170 1250 1250 1280 1400
1 1130 1200 1200 1200 1250 1250 1250 1250 1280 1380 1380 1400 1520 1520

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-22
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ2 20-40 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 20 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 MTZ2 32 MTZ2 40
N1/H1/H2/H2V/H3/H10 L1 H1/H2/H2V/H3/ H1/H2/H2V/H3/ H1/H2/H2V/H3/
H10 H10 H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 100 x 5 3b. 100 x 5 4b. 100 x 5 3b. 100 x 10 4b. 100 x 10
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3 2000 1830
Ta = 35 °C 2 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2375 2500 3040 3200 3320 3700
DB421285.ai

1
4
3 2000 1750
Ta = 45 °C
2 2000 2000 2000 1810 1960 1920 2250 2380 2880 3100 3160 3500
1
4
3 2000 1640
Ta = 55 °C
2 2000 2000 2000 1700 1850 1800 2100 2250 2690 2900 2960 3280
1

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm².

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm².
Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3 2000 1750
F
Ta = 35 °C 2 2000 2000 2000 1800 1900 1890 2125 2275 2650 2850 3040 3320
1
DB421286.ai

4
3 1900 1660
Ta = 45 °C
2 1900 1960 1960 1680 1810 1800 2000 2150 2550 2700 2880 3120
1
4
3 1780 1550
Ta = 55 °C
2 1800 1920 1920 1590 1700 1700 1900 2020 2370 2530 2720 2960
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-23
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1400 x 1500 area of outlet vents: 500 cm2

> MasterPacT MTZ3 40-63 H1/H2
Type MTZ3 40 H1/H2 MTZ3 50 H1/H2 MTZ3 63 H1/H2
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 5b. 100 x 10 7b. 100 x 10 8b. 100 x 10

Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3
DB419226.eps

Ta = 35 °C 2 4000 4000 4700 5000 5850

[1]
[1] 1
4
3
Ta = 45 °C
2 4000 4000 4450 4850 5670
1
4
3
Ta = 55 °C
2 4000 4000 4200 4600 5350
1
[2]
[2]

[1] Area of outlet vents: 500 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 500 cm²
F Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3
Ta = 35 °C 2 4000 4000 4350 4650 5290
DB419227.eps

1
4
3
Ta = 45 °C
2 4000 4000 4100 4400 5040
1
4
3
Ta = 55 °C
2 3840 3840 3850 4150 4730
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

b switchboard dimensions b T he temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
b number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed b Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
b type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
b drawout versions b The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
b ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: b The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1). b Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
b Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-24
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
105 (3P)
175 (4P) 105

DB419589.eps
178
136
105
DB419588.eps

301 X X
210

123

7 27 188
9.5 165.5 138 (3P) 138
208 (4P)
209 276 (3P)
346 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

6 Ø6.5 4 Ø6.5

DB419592.eps
DB419591.eps
DB419590.eps

25 100

125 154
X X
F 62.5 77
125 (3P) 125
195 (4P)
250 (3P)
320 (4P) 125 (3P) 125
195 (4P)

F
42
Y 250 (3P)
18 mini 100 320 (4P)
39 maxi
150 Y
F

Safety clearances Door cutout Rear panel cutout

A[3] B A[3] B u 194 (3P) u 194
DB419596.eps

DB419593.eps

DB419594.eps

u 264 (4P)

62
44
216 [1]
266 [2]
DB419595.eps

X X

40 130 108 [1] 62

106
133 [2]
F 100 (3P)
170 (4P) 100
194 [1] 97 [1]
244 [2] 122 [2] Y

Insulated Metal Energized [1] Without escutcheon.

parts parts parts [2] With escutcheon.
[3] An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
A 0 0 100
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.
B 0 0 60
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-25
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
43.5 70 70 70

DB419599.eps
DB419598.eps
DB419597.eps

123
15 67.5
X

15 67.5 N
123 Y

167.5
44
F
25 9.5 12.5

DB419600.eps
60
12.5

2 Ø11

Vertical rear connection Details

43.5 70 70 70
15
DB419603.eps
DB419602.eps
DB419601.eps

97
X

97
N
Y
F 167.5 60
F 12.5
DB421343.eps

12.5 9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Details

12 70 70 70
DB419605.eps

DB419606.eps
DB419604.eps

150

N
X
Y
326
150
Top connection Bottom connection
44 2 Ø11
164 25 9.5
DB419607.eps

DB419608.eps

F 13

13
25
9.5
2 Ø11 44
Notes: R
 ecommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-26
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection with spreaders Details
95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70 15

DB419638.eps
DB419637.eps

202

X
434
Y
202
DB419635.eps

95 95 95
12.5 12.5

DB419639.eps
70 70 70 15
179
F

N
Y

Rear connection with spreaders Details

98 95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70
DB419640.eps

DB419641.eps

15 123
82.5
X
15 52.5
123

F
DB419635.eps

219.5
Y
234.5
F 95 95 95
12.5 12.5
DB419642.eps

70 70 70

N
Y

Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
DB419643.eps

DB419644.eps

DB419645.eps

DB419646.eps

38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5

13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 25 25

30 30 30 30
82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-27
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection via vertical connection adapters Details
oriented to the rear
116.5 70 70 70
15

DB419648.eps
DB419647.eps
DB419706.eps

21 221

X
472
N
Y
21 221

89 12.5 [1] 2
 connection possibilities
on vertical connection
25 15

DB419649.eps
adapters (21 mm between
190.5 centers).
253 21 [1]
101
F 21
3 Ø11

15 20

Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted

with cable-lug adapters oriented to the rear Details
221 15 70 70 70
15
DB419650.eps

DB419651.eps
DB419707.eps

50

F
271
21 221

X
572 N
Notes: R
 ecommended connection
screws: M10 Class 8.8. Y
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with 21 221 184
contact washer. 271 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

50 80 50

340.5 15
5 Ø13 5 Ø11
357.5
F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425322.eps
DB425321.eps

between the cable lug

adapters to withstand the
electrodynamic stresses in
the event of a short-circuit.

F-28
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection via vertical connection adapters Details
oriented to the front
47.5 70 70 70
15

DB425331.eps
DB425330.eps
DB419706.eps

21
221
N
X
472 Y
221
Notes: For this connection the arc chute 89 12.5 [1] 2
 connection possibilities
screen is mandatory. 21 on vertical connection
25 15

DB419649.eps
adapters (21 mm between
centers).
21 [1]
101
42 157.5 21
3 Ø11
184
F 15 20

Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted

with cable-lug adapters oriented to the front Details
A 47.5 70 70 70
y 65 15
DB425333.eps

DB425332.eps
DB419707.eps

F
21 N
221
Y
X
Notes: 522 184
b For this connection the arc chute 221 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

screen is mandatory.
b Third party cable-lug adapters 21
mounted on front-facing vertical
connection adapters above arc 80 50
chutes must not exceed the maximum 271
distance A. 50
b Recommended connection screws: 5 Ø13 5 Ø11
M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact 42 157.5
washer. 174.5
F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425323.eps

between the cable lug

adapters to withstand the
DB425324.eps

electrodynamic stresses in
the event of a short-circuit.

F-29
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

127.5 (3P) Safety clearances

u 210 197.5 (4P) 160.5

DB419610.eps
DB419609.eps

DB419616.eps

DB419617.eps
46 [1] 188 37
94

199
322
X 250 X
209

5 123

u 60 Insulated Metal Energized

248 parts parts parts
288 (3P)
291 358 (4P) A 0 0 30
Y B 10 10 60
C 0 0 30

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

4 Ø6.5
DB419612.eps

DB419613.eps
DB419611.eps

6 Ø6.5

25 100 150 X
X
50

F 90 (3P) 90
F

160 (4P)
24 25 180 (3P) 109 (3P) 109
100 250 (4P) 179 (4P)
218 (3P)
216 Y 288 (4P)
231 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon Rear panel cutout
u 170 (3P) u 170 (3P)
DB425320.eps

u 230 u 230
DB419614.eps

DB419615.eps

u 240 (4P) u 240 (4P)

259 303 234

X X X

109 130.8 117

102.5 (3P)
102.5 172.5 (4P)
18 45 183
205 (3P)
98 98 307 275 (4P)
Y Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-30
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
70 70 70
49

DB419619.eps
DB419618.eps
DB419597.eps

114
15 67.5
X
N
15 67.5 Y
114

267.5 44

F 25 9.5 12.5

DB419600.eps
60
12.5

2 Ø11

Vertical rear connection Details

70 70 70
49 15
DB419621.eps
DB419620.eps
DB419601.eps

97
X

97 N
Y

60
F
267.5
12.5
DB421343.eps

F
12.5 9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Details

15 12.5 70 70 70
DB419622.eps

DB419624.eps

DB419625.eps

171 N
336 Y
X

140
DB419623.eps

Top connection Bottom connection

235 12.5
44 37.9 9.5
F
9.5 25
DB419626.eps

DB419627.eps

2 Ø11
26
100
52
83
131
2 Ø11
26 25
9.5
44
Notes: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8. 37.9 9.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-31
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection with spreaders Details
95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70

DB419654.eps
DB419653.eps

238
223

X
Y

207
DB419635.eps

192 95 95 95
12.5 12.5

DB419655.eps
70 70 70

250
F

N
Y

Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
DB419643.eps

DB419644.eps

DB419645.eps

DB419646.eps
38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 25 25

30 30 30 30
82 52 82 52 82 52 82 52
F 15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-32
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Vertical connection adapters fitted
with cable-lug adapters oriented to the front Details
15 70 70 70
15

DB419657.eps
DB419656.eps
DB419707.eps

50

71

21 292

171
N Y
X
583
Notes:
Recommended connection screws: 140
184
M10 Class 8.8. 21
Tightening torque: 50 Nm 261 17 50 50 50

DB419652.eps
with contact washer.
71

50 80 50

193.5 15 5 Ø13 5 Ø11

F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425323.eps

between the cable lug adapters

to withstand the electrodynamic
DB425324.eps

stresses in the event of a

short-circuit.

F
Vertical connection adapters fitted
with cable-lug adapters oriented to the rear Details
15 70 70 70
15
DB425326.eps
DB425325.eps
DB419707.eps

50

71

21 292

171
Notes:
Recommended connection screws: X
M10 Class 8.8. 583 N Y
Tightening torque: 50 Nm
with contact washer. 140
184
21
261 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

71

50 80 50

17 261.5 167 15 5 Ø13 5 Ø11

F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425322.eps
DB425321.eps

between the cable lug adapters

to withstand the electrodynamic
stresses in the event of a
short-circuit.

F-33
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
189 (3P)
304 (4P) 189
DB418642.eps

DB418643.eps
191
150

352 X
X
260
161

308
7 60 233
211 (3P) 211
300 326 (4P)
422 (3P)
537 (4P)

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418645.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5
F 200 (3P)
315 (4P) 200
75 38
15 mini 162 400 (3P)
60 maxi 515 (4P)
218.5
F
Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 295 (3P)
u 295 A[3] B A[3] B
u 410 (4P)
DB418646.eps

DB418647.eps

270 [1]
316 [2] O I

X
DB418648.eps

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
162.5 [1] F
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

Y
[1] Without escutcheon.
[2] With escutcheon.
MTZ2 devices except MTZ2-HA10 and H10
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove Insulated Metal Energized
the arc chutes. parts parts parts
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the A 0 0 100
terminal block. B 0 0 60
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. MTZ2-HA10 and H10
A 20 80 320
B 0 10 100

F-34
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
27 115 115 115

DB418683.eps

DB418651.eps
DB418711.eps

20
20 150
X

93
N
161 Y

20
47
75 233.5
12.5

DB418623.eps
F

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection Details

27 115 115 115
20
DB418686.eps
DB418654.eps
DB418712.eps

68
X

141
N
Y
F
75 233.5 47
12.5
DB418623.eps

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Front connection Details

20 115 115 115
12.5
DB418658.eps
DB418657.eps
DB418656.eps

230.5
N
Y
475
X

Top connection Bottom connection

219.5 76
25 25 13
DB419628.eps

DB419629.eps

159
12.5
219 12.5 3 Ø11.5
3 Ø11.5
F 12.5
242.5

Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8. 25 25 13

Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. 76

F-35
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

u 400 Safety clearances

DB418660.eps
DB418652.eps

66.5 [1]
308
A

DB418664.eps
238.5 Ø5
a
Ø8
Ø5
a
Ø8

439 X X
260

200.5
128
38.5
B B
383 220.5 (3P) 220.5
u 60 335.5 (4P)
403 441 (3P) Insulated Metal Energized
556 (4P) parts parts parts

Y A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60
The safety clearances take into account the
space required to remove the arc chutes.

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421274.eps
DB418662.eps
DB418661.eps

F
Ø11.5
Ø11.5 175
100
X x10 Ø10.5

F
See 103
view A
100
View A
167.5 (3P) 162.5
282.5 (4P) F
330 (3P)
103 175 445 (4P)
283.5 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon

u 300 (3P) u 300 (3P)
u 300 u 300
u 415 (4P) u 415 (4P)
DB418665.eps

DB418666.eps

270
X X
379
135 153.3 222

162.5 47 182

325 364

Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-36
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
115 115 115
27

DB418668.eps
DB418667.eps
DB418711.eps

20
20
X
93 296
N
184
Y
20

100 298.5 12.5 25 25 13

DB421344.eps
F
47
3 Ø11.5
76

Vertical rear connection Details

27 115 115 115
20
DB418682.eps
DB418670.eps
DB418712.eps

68 X

141
N
Y

100
F
298.5 47
12.5
F
DB418623.eps

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Front connection Details

20 115 115 115
12.5
DB418673.eps

DB418674.eps
DB418672.eps

151
X
N
400
Y
224

Top connection Bottom connection

25 25 13
100 284 12.5
DB418659.eps

DB421345.eps

F
12.5
3 Ø11.5 180

180 3 Ø11.5
12.5

25 25 13

Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.

Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-37
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
189 (3P)
304 (4P) 189

DB418643.eps
DB418642.eps

191
150
352
X X
260

161

7 60 233 308
300 211 (3P) 211
326 (4P)
422 (3P)
537 (4P)

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418645.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5

F 200 (3P)
315 (4P) 200
75 38
15 mini 162 400 (3P)
60 maxi 515 (4P)
218.5
F Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 295 (3P)
u 295 A[3] B A[3] B
u 410 (4P)
DB418648.eps

DB418646.eps

DB418647.eps

270 [1]
316 [2] O I

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
162.5 [1] F
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

Y
[1] Without escutcheon.
[2] With escutcheon.
MTZ2 devices except MTZ2-HA10 and H10
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove Insulated Metal Energized
the arc chutes. parts parts parts
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove A 0 0 100
the terminal block. B 0 0 60
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. MTZ2-HA10 and H10
A 20 80 320
B 0 10 100

F-38
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection
27
DB418683.eps
DB418675.eps

20
20 150
X

93
161

20

75 233.5
F

Details
150 150 150 25 25 25 47.5
14.5
115 115 115
DB430746.eps

DB418678.eps
52.5 17.5 17.5 52.5 47
182.5 (3P) 12.5

4 Ø11.5 135

25 25 25 12.5
14.5
DB418679.eps

N
332.5 (4P) 217.5 47
12.5
Y 4 Ø11.5 100
F
Vertical rear connection
27
DB418680.eps

DB418685.eps

117.5
X

190.5

75 233.5
F

Details
115 115 115 47
20 35 12.5
DB418686.eps

DB418630.eps

25
20
=
=
125
=
=
N
Y
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80. 5 Ø11.5 12.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. 14.5
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-39
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

u 400 Safety clearances

DB418660.eps
DB418652.eps

66.5 [1]
308
A

DB418664.eps
238.5
Ø5
a
Ø5
Ø8 a
Ø8

439 X 260 X

200.5

128 38.5

220.5 (3P) B B
383 220.5
335.5 (4P)
u 60 441 (3P)
403 Insulated Metal Energized
556 (4P)
parts parts parts
Y A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60
The safety clearances take into account the
space required to remove the arc chutes.

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421274.eps
DB418662.eps
DB418661.eps

F
Ø11.5
Ø11.5 175
100
X x10 Ø10.5
F See
view A
100
103

View A
167.5 (3P) 162.5
282.5 (4P) F
330 (3P)
103 175 445 (4P)
283.5 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon

u 300 (3P) u 300 (3P)
u 300 u 300
u 415 (4P) u 415 (4P)
DB418665.eps

DB418666.eps

270 [2]
379 [3]
X X
135 [2] 379
222 [3] 153.3 [2] 222

162.5 [2] 47 [2] 182

182 [3]
325 [2] 364
364 [3]
Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-40
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection

27
DB418675.eps

DB418676.eps

20
20
X
93 296
184
20

100 298.5
F

Details
150 150 150 25 25 25 47.5
14.5
115 115 115
DB430745.eps

DB418678.eps
52.5 17.5 17.5 52.5 47
12.5
182.5 (3P)
4 Ø11.5 135

N 25 25 25 12.5
14.5
332.5 (4P) 217.5
DB418679.eps

Y 12.5
47
F
4 Ø11.5 100

Vertical rear connection Details

47
27 35 12.5
DB418630.eps
DB418681.eps
DB418680.eps

25
20
117.5 =
X =
125
=
190.5
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
100 298.5 14.5
F

115 115 115

20
DB418682.eps

N
Y
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-41
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
533 (3P) 189
763 (4P)
DB418642.eps

DB418687.eps
191
150
352
X X
260

161

7 60 233 308
556 (3P) 211
300 786 (4P)
767 (3P)
997 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418688.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5
545 (3P)
775 (4P) 200

F 15 mini
60 maxi
75 38
162
218.5
Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 639 (3P) A[3] B A[3] B
u 295
u 839 (4P)
DB418646.eps

DB418689.eps
DB418690.eps

270 [1]
316 [2]
X

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
F
162.5 [1]
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

[1] Without escutcheon. Insulated Metal Energized

[2] With escutcheon. parts parts parts
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the
A 0 0 100
arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the B 0 0 60
terminal block.
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-42
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details
47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
DB418694.eps
DB418692.eps

DB418697.eps
20
20 150

X N
Y
20 93
161
12.5 25 25 13

DB421344.eps
47
75 253.5
3 Ø11.5
F
76

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details

47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
20
DB418698.eps
DB418695.eps
DB418691.eps

68
X
N
141 Y

47
12.5
F
DB418623.eps

75 253.5
F
25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 63) Details

47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
20
DB418698.eps
DB418696.eps
DB418693.eps

117.5
X
N
Y
190.5
47
35 12.5
DB418630.eps

25
75 253.5 20
F =
=
125
=
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
14.5
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-43
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
u 400
66.5 [1]

DB425367.eps
308
DB418613.eps

238.5
Ø5
a
Ø8

439 X 479 X
260

200.5
128
38.5
40

u 60 383.5 565.5 (3P) 220.5

795.5 (4P)
403 786 (3P)
1016 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421280.eps
F
DB418616.eps
DB418615.eps

6 Ø11x23
250
X 50
See
view A F 53

View A

F 151 (3P)
162.5 (4P)
50

53 250 325 (3P) 174 (3P)

450 (4P) 287.5 (4P)
333
Y
F

Door cutout Door cutout

Safety clearances without escutcheon with escutcheon
u 646(3P) u 646 (3P)
A u 876(4P) u 300 u 300
u 876 (4P)
DB425327.eps

DB425328.eps

DB425329.eps

Ø5
a
Ø8

270
X X
379
135 153.3 222

162.5 47 182
B B
325 364

Y Y
[1] Disconnected position.
Insulated Metal Energized
parts parts parts The safety clearances take into account the space required to remove the arc chutes.
A 0 0 0 Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
B 0 0 60

F-44
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
MasterPacT MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details
115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27

DB418622.eps
DB418711.eps

DB418621.eps

20
20
291 X

93 N
179 Y
20
47
12.5

DB418623.eps
50 348.5
F 25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details

115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27 20
DB418626.eps
DB418625.eps
DB418712.eps

68 X

141
N
Y
47 F
12.5
DB418623.eps

50 348.5
F
25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 63) Details

115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27 20
DB418629.eps
DB418628.eps
DB418713.eps

117.5
X

190.5 N
Y
47
35 12.5
DB418630.eps

50 348.5
25
F 20
=
=
125
=
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80. 14.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-45
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
Accessories

Mounting on backplate with special brackets (MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

429 (3P)
544 (4P) 384 (3P)
407 (3P)
DB421461.ai

499 (4P)

DB421463.ai
DB421462.ai
522 (4P)
203.5 192

4 Ø12
287
X X X

159
113 96 125 161 180

218.5 4.5 200 F

F F 200
Y
Y

Front-connection adapter (MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

Horizontal rear connection Detail
67 115 115 115
DB421464.ai

20
DB421466.ai

DB421467.ai

183

N
X Y

F 12.5 25 25 13
DB421465.ai

172
DB421344.eps

47
3 Ø11.5
76
253.5 20

Disconnectable front-connection adapter (MasterPacT MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

Vertical rear connection Detail
67 115 115 115
DB421468.ai

20
DB421470.ai

DB421471.ai

231

X
N
Y
DB421469.ai

47
220
12.5
DB418623.eps

25
253.5 76
25
F

3 Ø11.5 13
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-46
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
Accessories

Rear panel cutout (drawout devices)

MTZ1 MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 40
Rear view Rear view
DB421475.eps

DB421476.ai

DB421477.ai

DB421478.ai
234 X X X
X

117 302
187

216
102.5 (3P)
102.5 172.5 (4P) F 200.5 (3P)
200.5 264
205 (3P) 315.5 (4P)
275 (4P) 403 (3P) F
518 (4P)
Y
Y

MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63
Rear view
DB421479.ai

DB421480.ai

X X
297
182

545.5 (3P)
200.5 775.5 (4P) 314
746 (3P) F
976 (4P)
Y
F
Escutcheon
MasterPacT MTZ1
Fixed device Drawout device
DB421481.ai

DB421482.ai

275 313
X
X
27
27

27
27 13 27
253
317
Y
Y

MasterPacT MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed device Drawout device
DB421484.ai
DB421483.ai

324
X X
387

25 18

45
25
372
25 25
Y 372

F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole. Y

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
F-47
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
External modules

Connection of auxiliary wiring to terminal block

S : 0.6 mm²
DB421994.ai

DB421995.ai
S : 2.5 mm²

8
Ø 3.5 max.

Ø 3.5

One conductor only per connection point.

External power supply module (AD) Battery module (BAT)

2 Ø4 2 Ø6
DB421996.ai

DB421997.ai

60

82
61

90
73
G4
G3 N
L

ply
er sup
Pow
AC /DC
444
LVA454 /240V
t: 200
Inpu
0.25A Output
50/60Hz DC
ut: 24V
Outp
1A

F
ge
volta C4)
Overlevel (OV
High

112
75
67.5 108

RIM Delay unit for MN voltage release

2 Ø4.2
DB421999.ai

DB421998.ai

57

60 Hz
41mA
max 90
max
120
V 6mA

66
24 V

OUT
ZSI
ule ZSI
IN
8892 Mod ZSI eam
LV84 terfaceterfacez ZSI Upstr
ZSI In in
ule d’ interfa st strea
m
Modulo de -to-te Down
Mód Push

S1
CB Acc. 2H4
Ctrl. No.5

58 100

81 45 73

46
73.5
72

F-48
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
External modules

IFE - Ethernet interface IFM - Modbus Interface

29

DB432702.ai
DB432701.ai

109
105
90
84.8
45
Ener
lin'X
IFE 45
Test

02
LV4340

66
71 73
72 18

I/O (Input/Output) application module

DB432703.ai

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3

115
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V

84.8
A1

I1
I2
O1
O2
O3
45
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

63
LV4340

IO
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

71
72

F
PAS600
DB435539.ai

c
24V
er
Pow
1
2

ts
Inpu I1
tal
Digi I1C 3
I2 4
I2C 5
6

104.2
85
45.5
ID:
MAC al N°:
seri

Ser ver
Panel L
600
PAS

70.2 71.8

F-49
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
External modules

External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection

Sensor “MGDF summer” module
DB423003.ai

DB423004.ai
90
200
45
130

59 106

45 76
150

FDM128
DB423005.ai

100

100
100
+0

Ø 22.5 -0,30

100

F
39

100
1.5...6
30.6

129

+0

30 -0,20

17.5
163

F-50
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Dimensions
External modules

External sensor for external neutral

400/1600 A 400/2000 A 1000/4000 A
(MTZ1 06 to MTZ1 16) (MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 20) (MTZ2 25 to MTZ2 40)
DB423040.ai

DB423042.ai

DB423044.ai
4 Ø14.5x24 4 Ø14 8 Ø14.5
DB423041.ai

DB423043.ai

DB423045.ai
76.2
35 98 44.5 44.5
102 127

176.5
208 177
44.5 174 44.5
206
295

4000/6300 A 2000/6300 A 2000/6300 A

(MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63) (MTZ2 to MTZ3) (MTZ2 to MTZ3)
single sensor kit 3 layer bus

F
DB423046.ai

DB423085.ai

DB423087.ai

16 Ø14.5 8 Ø14
DB423088.ai
DB423047.ai

DB423086.ai

44.5 44.5 25.4

127 127 98
11

11
44.5 174 44.5 127
127 295
44.5

44.5 174 44.5

295

F-51
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Dimensions
External modules

Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)

280 x 115 mm window
4 Ø9
DB423032.ai

DB423033.ai
197 233
115 216

280 71
362
381

470 x 160 mm window

8 Ø9
DB423034.ai

DB423035.ai

281
146 242
160 263

456 72
470

F 552
572

Busbars I y 1600 A I y 3200

Window (mm) 280 x 115 470 x 160
Weight (kg) 14 18

Busbars path
280 x 115 mm window 470 x 160 mm window
Busbars spaced 70 mm center-to-center Busbars spaced 115 mm center-to-center
DB423036.ai

DB423038.ai

2 bars 50 x 10.
4 bars 100 x 5.
DB423037.ai

DB423039.ai

2 bars 100 x 5.
4 bars 125 x 5.

F-52
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Installation
Clusters

Clusters
Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models
DB403280_1.eps

Chassis MasterPacT MTZ1

rating (A) 3P 4P
630 12 18
800 12 18
1000 12 18
1250 12 18
1600 18 24
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.

Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models

Chassis MasterPacT MTZ2-3 3P MasterPacT MTZ2-3 4P
rating (A) N1, H1, H10, H2, H3 L1 N1, H1, H10, H2, H3 L1
NA HA HA10 H2V, NA HA HA10 H2V
HH, HH
HF HF
MTZ2 08 to 16 12 12 12 24 24 16 16 16 32 32
MTZ2 20 24 24 24 24 24 42 32 32 32 32 32 56
MTZ2 25 24 24 24 24 32 32 32 32
MTZ2 32 36 36 36 36 48 48 48 48
MTZ2 40 42 42 42 42 56 56 56 56
MTZ3 40 to 50 72 72 96 96
MTZ3 63 72 72 96 96
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.

F-53
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal
position.

Power Control unit Indication contacts

Micrologic X Control Unit 24 Vc / 24-110 Va
DB421182.ai

DB421183.ai
Power

Disengage
Upstream cb Downstream cb

Engaged
N L1 L2 L3

Engage
Open Closed
Z1
Z2
Z3

Z4
21

Connection for PTE option 22

AF1
AF2
AF3

484

474
474

484

42
44

32
34
22
24
12
14
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3

[3] Z4

I OF4 OF3 OF2

S1 S2
Micrologic X Control Unit
U
M2C ESM

or

Rectangular Sensor [1]

471

471

41

31

21

11
F1‒

F2+
M1
M2
M3

T1
T2
T5
T6

or 0 Vc / a
SGR Sensor [1]
1 12 5 6 7
Neutral 3 24 V DC Note:
MDGF

F external
sensor
for MDGF module:
b Use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2.
b Use terminal 6 for MTZ3.
Available for circuit breaker and switch-disconnector.
Available for circuit breaker only.

Remote operation
DB421184.ai

Basic coils Diagnostic & communicating coils Charged

(+)
to-close

(+) (+) (+) (+) (+)

Ready-
Fault

AT BPF AT
BPF
BPO BPO
C12

C12
C13

252
254
182

184

B3
B2
C2

C2
C3
K2

A2

A2
A3
82

84

D2

D2

or
MCH
MN MX MX XF MN MX MX XF
SDE1 diag diag&com diag&com diag&com
SDE2 PF CH

Res or [2] or [2]

or

(-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-)

B1
181

K1

81

D1

C11

C1

A1

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

Note: Maximum length of the two wires cables between A2-A3 / C2-C3 / C12-C13: 5 m.
The maximum lengths of the wiring between the AC/DC power supply and voltage release terminals A1-A3 / C1-C3 / C11-C13 /D1-D2 are given page D-18.
[1] Rectangular sensor or SGR sensor.
[2] Possibility to add a second MX/MX diag&com or a MN/MN diag voltage release.The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the
delivery of the circuit breaker. this is an after sales adaptation.
[3] F
 or 3 poles MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker in power system with neutral distributed, the neutral shall be connected to the VN terminal of MicroLogic X
and ENVT configured to "Yes" to ensure the quality of power measurement.
F-54
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices

Terminal block marking

CE3 CE2 Com UC1 UC2 SDE2 UC4 UC3 SDE1 MN MX XF PF MCH

334 324 F2+ T6 M1 M2 M3/T1/T5 184 V3 84 D2 C2 A2 254 B2

F2+ F1- ULP
332 322 [1] or Z3 Z4 AF3 T2 182 V2 VN 82 C3 A3 252 B3
F1-
331 321 Z1 Z2 AF1 AF2 181 V1 81 D1 C1 A1 251 B1
or or or
Res M2C / 2nd MX
ESM

K2 484 C12

474 C13

K1 471 C11

OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 CD2 CD1 CE1 CT1 Control unit terminal block
Com : Fixed, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option)
44 34 24 14 824 814 314 914 Drawout, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option)
UC1 : Z1-Z4 zone selective interlocking
42 32 22 12 822 812 312 912
M1 = rectangular sensor (MicroLogic 7.0 X) or MDGF module
41 31 21 11 821 811 311 911 input
or UC2 : T1, T2 = neutral external sensors
M2, M3 = rectangular sensor (MicroLogic 7.0 X) or MDGF module
EIFE input
UC3 : Voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P
circuit breaker)
Indication contacts terminal block UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)
OF4 / OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON/OFF indication contacts OF or
M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) F
Chassis contacts terminal block or
CD2 / CD1: disconnected position contacts ESM : ERMS switch module
CE3 /CE2 / CE1: connected position contacts
CT1: test position contacts Remote operation terminal block
SDE2: fault-trip indication contact
DB421185.ai

Connected Disconnected Test

or
Res: remote reset
822
824
812
814
332
334
322

324

312

314

914
912

SDE1: 
fault-trip indication contact
(supplied as standard)

CT1 MN /MN diag: undervoltage release standard or diagnostic

CE3 CE2 CD2 CD1 CE1 or
2nd MX/MX diag&com: opening voltage release standard
or diagnostic & communicating
331

321

311
821

811

911

MX/MX diag&com:  pening voltage release standard

o
or diagnostic

XF/XF diag&com: 
closing voltage release standard
DB421455.ai

or diagnostic & communicating

9 11
"Spring charged" PF: ready-to-close contact
light 440/480 V R

B3 B2 MCH: electric motor

Note: when communicating MX diag&com or XF diag&com voltage releases are

used, the third wire (C3,A3, C13) must be connected.
MCH
Drawout device only.

CH SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.

interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).
B1
[1] The connection of the +/- of the power supply either on terminals F1/F2 of
MicroLogic X or on the +/- terminals of the ULP port must be strictly respected.
Spring charging motor 440/480 V AC Crossing the polarities may damage the device.
(380 V motor + additional resistor)

F-55
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal
position.

Power Control unit

Micrologic X Control Unit 24 Vc / 24-110 Va
DB421182.ai

Power

Disengage
Upstream cb Downstream cb

Engaged
N L1 L2 L3

Engage
Z1
Z2
Z3

Z4
21

Connection for PTE option 22

AF1
AF2
AF3

484

474
474

484
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
[3] Z4

I
S1 S2
Micrologic X Control Unit
U
M2C ESM

or

Rectangular Sensor [1]

471

471
F1‒

F2+
M1
M2
M3

T1
T2
T5
T6

or 0 Vc / a
SGR Sensor [1] Note:
1 12 5 6 7 for MDGF module:
Neutral 3 24 V DC b Use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2.
MDGF

F external
sensor
b Use terminal 6 for MTZ3.

Available for circuit breaker and switch-disconnector.

Available for circuit breaker only.

Remote operation
DB421184.ai

Basic coils Diagnostic & communicating coils Charged

(+)
to-close

(+) (+) (+) (+) (+)

Ready-
Fault

AT BPF AT
BPF
BPO BPO
C12

C12
C13

252
254
182

184

B3
B2
C2

C2
C3
K2

A2

A2
A3
82

84

D2

D2

or
MCH
MN MX MX XF MN MX MX XF
SDE1 diag diag&com diag&com diag&com
SDE2 PF CH

Res or [2] or [2]

or

(-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-)

B1
181

K1

81

D1

C11

C1

A1

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

Note: M aximum length of the two wires cables between A2-A3 / C2-C3 / C12-C13: 5 m.
The maximum lengths of the wiring between the AC/DC power supply and voltage terminals A1-A3 / C1-C3 / C11-C13 /D1-D2 are given page D-18.
[1] Rectangular sensor or SGR sensor.
[2] Possibility to add a second MX/MX diag&com or a MN/MN diag voltage release.The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the
delivery of the circuit breaker. this is an after sale adaptation.
[3] F
 or 3 poles MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker in power system with neutral distributed, the neutral shall be connected to the VN terminal of MicroLogic X
and ENVT configured to "Yes" to ensure the quality of power measurement.

F-56
 www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

Indication contacts Chassis contacts

Db101409.eps

Available for circuit breaker and switch-disconnector.

Available for circuit breaker only.

Control unit terminal block Remote operation terminal block

Com : Fixed, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option) SDE2 [1]: fault-trip indication contact
Drawout, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as or
option) Res: remote reset

UC1 : Z1-Z4 zone selective interlocking SDE1 [1]: fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard)
F
MN /MN diag: undervoltage release standard or diagnostic
M1 = rectangular sensor (MicroLogic 7.0 X)
or
or MDGF module input
2ndMX/MX diag&com: opening voltage release standard
or diagnostic & communicating
UC2 : T1, T2 = neutral external sensors
M2, M3 = rectangular sensor (MicroLogic 7.0 X) MX/MX diag&com:  pening voltage release standard
o
or MDGF module input or diagnostic

UC3 : Voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral XF/XF diag&com: 

closing voltage release standard
with a 3P circuit breaker) or diagnostic & communicating

PF: ready-to-close contact

UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)
MCH: electric motor
M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) Note: when communicating MX com or XF com voltage releases are used, the third wire
or (C3,A3, C13) must be connected.
ESM : ERMS switch module [1] Available with MTZ2 HF and MTZ2 HH.

Indication contacts Chassis contacts

OF4 : ON/OFF indication contacts OF OF24 or ON/OFF indication contacts OF CD3 disconnected CE3 connected CT3 test position
OF3 EF24 or connected/closed contacts EF CD2 position CE2 position CT2 contacts
OF2 OF23 or CD1 contacts CE1 contacts CT1
OF1 EF23
OF22 or or or or
EF22 CE6 connected CT6 test position CE9 connected
OF21 or CE5 position CT5 contacts CE8 position
EF21 CE4 contacts CT4 CE7 contacts
OF14 or or
EF14
CD6 disconnected
OF13 or CD5 position
EF13 CD4 contacts
OF12 or
EF12
OF11 or
EF11

F-57
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

Electrical diagrams
MasterPacT MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

Terminal block marking

M2C /
CD3 CD2 CD1 Com UC1 UC2 SDE2 UC4 UC3 SDE1 CE3 CE2 CE1 MN MX XF PF MCH
ESM

M2 M3/T1/
F2+ T6 M1 T5 184 V3 484 84 D2 C2 A2 254 B2
834 824 814 334 324 314
F2 +
F1- ULP
[1] or Z3 Z4 AF3 T2 182 V2 VN 474 82 C3 A3 252 B3
832 822 812 332 322 312
F1-

831 821 811 Z1 Z2 AF1 AF2 181 V1 471 81 331 321 311 D1 C1 A1 251 B1
or or or or
CE6 CE5 CE4 Res CT6 CT5 CT4 2nd MX

364 354 344 K2 964 954 944 C12

362 352 342 962 952 942 C13

361 351 341 K1 961 951 941 C11

OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 CT3 CT2 CT1

244 234 224 214 144 134 124 114 44 34 24 14 934 924 914

242 232 222 212 142 132 122 112 42 32 22 12 932 922 912

241 231 221 211 141 131 121 111 41 31 21 11 931 921 911
or or or or or or or or or
EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 CE9 CE8 CE7

248 238 228 218 148 138 128 118 394 384 374

246 236 226 216 146 136 126 116 392 382 372

F 245 235 225 215 145 135 125 115 391 381 371
or
CD6 CD5 CE4

864 854 844

862 852 842

861 851 841

or
OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1
EIFE
224 214 144 134 124 114 44 34 24 14

222 212 142 132 122 112 42 32 22 12

Drawout device only.
221 211 141 131 121 111 41 31 21 11 SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.
or or or or or or
EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 interconnected connections
(only one wire per connection point).
[1] The connection of the +/- of the power supply either on
228 218 148 138 128 118
terminals F1/F2 of MicroLogic X or on the +/- terminals of the
ULP port must be strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may
226 216 146 136 126 116
damage the device.
225 215 145 135 125 115

F-58
www.se.com
Integrate in Switchboard
Electrical diagrams
24 V DC external MicroLogic power supply

b With MicroLogic, it is recommended to connect 24 V DC external power supply N L1 L2 L3

DB432607.eps
(AD module) to the MicroLogic control unit (F1- F2+) in order to help
v Keep available the display and the energy metering, even if Current < 20 % In.
v Use the display even if the circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact

AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
conditions of use, see the “electrical diagrams” part of this catalog)
v Display fault currents after tripping
v Modify settings when the circuit breaker is open (OFF position)
b The same 24 V DC external power supply can be used for the micrologic control
Q
unit and the communication devices (IFE, IFM, I/O, FDM).
b The same 24 V DC external power supply can be used for the MicroLogic control I
Micrologic X
unit and M2C/ESM U
b The 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) for the MicroLogic control unit
(F1- F2+) is not required for basic protections LSIG.

Note: in case of using the 24 V DC external MicroLogic power supply, maximum cable length
between 24 V DC (G1, G2) and the control unit (F1-, F2+) must not exceeed 10 meters.

F2+
F1‒
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
The internal voltage taps are connected to the bottom side of circuit breaker. An external
voltage taps are possible using the PTE option: G1 G2
b With the option, the internal voltage taps are disconnected and the voltage taps are
AD
connected to terminals VN, V1, V2, V3.
module
b The PTE option is required for voltages less than 220 V and greater than 690 V (in which
case a voltage transformer is compulsory). For three-pole devices, the system is supplied with G3 G4
the terminal VN connected only to the control unit.
b When the PTE option is implemented, the voltage measurement input must be protected 110-240 V AC
against short-circuits. Installed as close as possible to the busbars, this protection function 24-125 V DC
is ensured by a P25M circuit breaker (1 A rating) with an auxiliary contact (cat. no 21104 and
21117).
b This voltage measurement input is exclusively dedicated to the control unit and must never
be used to supply other circuits outside the switchboard.

Connection
The maximum length for each conductor supplying power to the control unit module
is 10 m.
Do not ground F2+, F1-, or power supply output:
b The positive terminal (F2+) on the control unit must not be connected to earth
ground
b The negative terminal (F1-) on the control unit must not be connected to earth
F
ground
b The output terminals (- and +) of the 24 V DC power supply must not be grounded.

Reduce electromagnetic interference:

b The input and output wires of the 24 V DC power supply must be physically
separated as much as possible
b The 24 V DC wires (output of the 24 V DC power supply) shall be twisted together
b The 24 V DC wires (output of the 24 V DC power supply) must cross all power
cables perpendicularly
b Power supply conductors must be cut to length. Do not loop excess conductor.

F-59
 Integrate in Switchboard www.se.com

F-60
www.se.com

Integrate in Special Applications

Source-changeover Systems

Presentation.............................................................................. G-2
Mechanical interlocking........................................................ G-3
Electrical interlocking IVE unit............................................ G-5
Controller installation............................................................. G-6
Associated controllers........................................................... G-7
BA controller............................................................................. G-8
UA controller............................................................................. G-9

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

G-1
 Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems www.se.com

Presentation

In installations requiring a high level of availability two redundant power supplies are
PB191613-50.eps

generally used. The main supply can at any time be replaced by an emergency
supply in case of power interruption. The replacement source can be an emergency
power generator set or another low voltage network.
In complex low voltage architectures, up to three independent power supplies may
be used to secure the installation. More than three independent sources can even
be used for specific applications.
Changeover systems are required to quickly and safely switch between the power
sources.
There are three ways to switch between the sources:
b Manually
b Automatically
b Remotely

Manual source-changeover system

or : Manual Transfer Switching Equipment
The simplest way to switch between the power sources. The closing and opening
operations of the circuit breakers or switches are performed by the operators.
The time required to switch between the sources is variable.
System
65587-117.eps

Two or three mechanically interlocked circuit breakers

or switch-disconnectors.
Applications
Small commercial buildings and small and medium industrial activities where the
need for continuity of service is significant but not a priority.

Automatic source-changeover system

or : Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
A controller is added to automatically control the switching operations. This can be
done using the standard BA, UA controllers and the associated IVE electrical
G interlocking unit. The solution is limited to two circuit breakers or two switch-
disconnectors.
The automatic switching sequence is initiated by detecting the loss of the power
supply. It can also be initiated by the operators.
System
Two mechanically interlocked circuit breakers or switch disconnectors, associated
with one BA or UA controller and the IVE electrical interlocking unit.
Applications
Large infrastructures.

G-2
www.se.com
Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems
Mechanical interlocking

Schneider Electric offers source change-over systems based on MasterPacT MTZ devices.
They are made of up to 3 circuit breakers or switch-disconnetors linked by an electrical interlocking system that may have
different configurations. Moreover, a mechanical interlocking system must be added to protect against electrical malfunctions
or incorrect manual operations. In addition, a controller can be used to automatically control the source transfer.
The following pages present the different solutions for mechanical and electrical interlocking and associated controllers.

For implementing the mechanical interlocking 2 different possibilities are offered:

PB113431.eps
b Interlocking with rods
b Interlocking with cables

Interlocking of two devices using connecting rods

The two devices must be installed one above the other.
For MasterPacT MTZ1 only associations between similar type devices are allowed (2 fixed or 2 drawout devices).
Mixed associations between MasterPacT MTZ1 and MasterPacT MTZ2 or MTZ3 devices of different types (fixed
or drawout) are not possible.
For MasterPacT MTZ2 and MTZ3, all mixed associations between fixed type and drawout type devices are possible.
Installation
This function requires:
b An adaptation fixture on the right side of each circuit breaker or switch-disconnector
b A set of connecting rods with no-slip adjustments
b A mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The adaptation fixtures, connecting rods, circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready
for assembly by the customer.
The maximum vertical distance between the fixing plates is 900 mm.
Interlocking of two
Interlocking of two or three devices using cables MasterPacT MTZ1
For cable interlocking, the circuit breakers can be installed either one above the other or side-by-side. or MTZ2 / MTZ3
All mixed associations between MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 fixed type and drawout type devices are possible. circuit breakers using
connecting rods
Interlocking between two MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 devices
This function requires:
b An adaptation fixture on the right side of each device
b A set of cables without slip adjustments
b A mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 2000 mm.
Interlocking between three MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 devices
This function requires:
b A specific adaptation fixture installed on the right side of each device
b Two sets of cables without slip adjustments
b A mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 1000 mm.
G
Installation
The adaptation fixtures, sets of cables and circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready
for assembly by the customer. PB113432.eps

Installation conditions for cable interlocking systems:

b Cable length: 2.5 m
b Cable bending radius: greater than 100 mm
b Maximum number of curves: 3.
Note: for cable length higher than 2.5 m please consult us before ordering the circuit breakers for a customised solution.

Choice criteria
In the applications where the continuity of service is critical(*) (Data Centers, airports, hospitals, marine, oil&gas,
process industry, …) the mechanical interlocking by rods and the drawout version devices is strongly recommended.
Mechanical interlocking by rods is preferred as less energy is consumed by friction, so it has less effect on the
circuit breaker closing energy.
In terms of breaker mounting type, the drawout version is preferred as :
b It provides mechanical isolation of the circuit breaker from possible external stress on the terminals by having a
flexible connection at the clusters level
b It allows simple and total access for periodic maintenance
b It allows quick replacement of the device if necessary.
When not possible, cable interlocking or fixed versions can be used, but the installation rules detailed in the 2
sections below must be strictly respected and mainly: Interlocking of two
b The busbars or the cables used for the power connections must apply no stress on the circuit breakers MasterPacT circuit
breakers using cables
terminals. Their weight must be supported by the switchboard frame.
[1] For more details please contact your local support.
b Please refer to the “Switchboard integration - Installation rules – Power connection” section in this catalog as
well as to the Data Bulletin “Installation of Fixed MasterPacT NW Circuit Breakers in Electrical Equipment –
Class 0613” available on www.se.com for more details.
G-3
 Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems www.se.com

Mechanical interlocking

Possible association between MasterPacT MTZ1,

108975.EPS

MTZ2, MTZ3
Key interlocking
Interlocking using keylocks is very simple and makes it possible to interlock two or
more devices that are physically distant or that have very different characteristics.
Interlocking system
Each device is equipped with an identical keylock and the key is captive on the
closed (ON) device. A single key is available for all devices. It is necessary to first
open (OFF position) the device with the key before the key can be withdrawn and
used to close another device.
A system of wall-mounted captive key boxes makes a large number of combinations
possible between many devices.

DB421179.ai

Mechanical interlocking using connecting rods

MasterPacT MTZ1:
2 MasterPacT MTZ1 fixed type or drawout type. Association between fixed type and
drawout type MTZ1 devices is not possible nor combinations between MTZ1 and
MTZ2 or MTZ3.
MasterPacT MTZ2 and MTZ3:
All mixed associations between fixed type and drawout type devices are possible.
DB419861.ai

G Mechanical interlocking by cables

All mixed associations between MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 fixed type and
drawout type devices are possible.
Note: 3 devices mechanical interlocking is applicable only to MTZ2 and MTZ3.

Vertical Horizontal
2 devices MTZ1 - MTZ2 - MTZ3
DB419862.ai

DB419864.ai
PB116219_66.eps

3 devices MTZ2 - MTZ3

DB419863.ai

DB419865.ai

G-4
 www.se.com
Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems
Electrical interlocking IVE unit

IVE electrical interlocking unit

PB119174.eps
Electrical interlocking between MasterPacT MTZ1,MTZ2, and MTZ3 circuit breakers
can be done using the IVE Electrical interlocking unit or using dedicated wiring.
The IVE unit is suitable for two circuit breakers or two switch-disconnectors only.
For three devices, dedicated wiring is required to perform the electrical interlocking.
Characteristics of the IVE unit
b External connection terminal block:
v Inputs: status of the SDE contacts on the “N” and “R” source circuit breakers
v Output: circuit breaker control signals
b Two connectors for the two “N” and “R” source circuit breakers:
v Inputs: - Status of the OF contacts on each circuit breaker (ON or OFF) - 1 normal source - 1 replacement source
Status of the SDE contacts on the “N” and “R” source circuit breakers
v Outputs: power supply for operating mechanisms

DB419718.ai
G Qn Qr
b Control voltage: 0 0
v 24 to 250 V DC UN 1 0
v 48 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz. UR
0 1
The IVE unit control voltage must be same as for the circuit breaker operating
mechanisms.
Necessary equipment for MasterPacT MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3, QN QR
each circuit breaker must be equipped with:
b A remote-operation system made up of:
v MCH gear motor
v MX or MN opening voltage release
v XF closing voltage release
v PF ready-to-close contact
v CDM mechanical operation counter 2 sources with coupler on busbars
b An available OF contact
Qs1 Qc Qs2
DB419719.ai

b One to three CE connected-position contacts (carriage switches) on drawout TR1 TR2

circuit breakers (depending on the installation). 0 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
DB419709.ai

0 1 1
QS1 QC QS2 1 0 0 [1]
0 0 1 [1]
[1] p
 ossible by forcing
operation G

OF4
44
OF3
34
32
OF2
24
22
OF1

21
14
12
CT3

11
934
932
CT2
924

931
CT1

922
921
914
912
911
2 normal sources - 1 replacement source
OF11 42 31
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
DB419720.ai

Qn1 Qn2 Qr
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1

TR1 TR2
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

G 0 0 0
1 1 0
CT1
914 SDE1
CT2
924 912
MC2
OF1
14
CT3
934
932
922
921
911
SDE2 UC4
UC3
OF2 12 931
24
OF3
34 22
21
11
UC2 /Res
OF4
44 32
31 UC1
COM
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1

0 0 1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

1 0 0
pact
MasterHA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp

PF MCH Ui 1250V
MN MX1 XF
V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
50kA/1s
MX2 Ue
Icw 105kA
peak

Icm 50/60Hz NEMA

AS
60947-2 UNE
SDE1 IEC CEI
BS
MC2 UTE
VDE 55°C

SDE2 UC4
UC3 Ith 4000A Ue
Ie
(A)

0 1 0
(V)
UC2 /Res 4000
UC1 1000
COM AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE

QN1 QN2 QR
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000
pact
MasterHA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Note: After either manual or fault tripping the manual acknowledgement of the circuit breaker
is required.

G-5
 Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems www.se.com

Controller installation

ACP control plate

PB100857_SE.eps

The control plate provides in a single unit:

b Protection for the BA or UA controller with two highly limiting P25M circuit
breakers (infinite breaking capacity) for power drawn from the AC source
b Control of circuit breaker ON and OFF functions via two relay contactors
b Connection of the circuit breakers to the BA or UA controller via a built-in terminal
block.

Control voltages
b 110 V 50/60 Hz.
b 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz.
b 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz and 440 V 60 Hz.
The same voltage must be used for the ACP control plate, the controller and the
circuit breaker operating mechanisms.
Installation
Connection between the ACP control plate and the IVE unit may use:
b Wiring done by the installer
b Prefabricated wiring (optional)

Installation of the BA and UA controllers

The BA and UA controllers may be installed in one of two manners:
b Directly mounted on the ACP control plate
b Mounted on the front panel of the switchboard
b If the length of the connection between the controller and the control plate (ACP)
is less than or equal to 1 m, the connecting cable ref. 29368 can be ordered as an
optional extra. Cables longer than 1 m, but not longer than 2 m will be the
responsibility of the installer.
DB419723.ai

Mounting on the ACP control plate

DB419724.ai

Mounting on the front panel of the switchboard

G-6
www.se.com
Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems
Associated controllers

By combining a remote-operated source-changeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller, it is

possible to automatically control source transfer following user-selected sequences. These controllers can be used
on source-changeover systems that include two circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.
For source-changeover systems that include three circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must be prepared
by the installer as a complement to diagrams provided in the “electrical diagrams” section of this catalog.

Controller BA UA
4-position switch

DB403809.eps
Automatic operation
Forced operation on “Normal” source
Forced operation on “Replacement” source
Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the “Normal” source and automatic transfer
Generator set startup control
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of generator set
Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits
Transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases
of the “Normal” source is absent
Test
By opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller
Indications
Circuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller:

DB403810.eps
on, off, fault trip
Automatic mode indicating contact
Other functions
Selection of type of “Normal” source
(single-phase or three-phase) [1]
Voluntary transfer to “Replacement” source
(for example, energy management commands)
During peak-tariff periods (energy management commands)
forced operation on “Normal” source if “Replacement” source
not operational
Additional contact (not part of controller)
Transfer to “Replacement” source only if contact is closed
(for example, used to test the frequency of UR).
Setting of maximum startup time for the replacement source
Power supply
Control voltages [2] 110 V 50/60 Hz

G
220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz
and 440 V 60 Hz
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
Phase failure 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un
IP degree of protection (EN 60529) and IK degree of protection against
external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)
Front IP40
Side IP30
Connectors IP20
Front IK07
Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
Position of the Auto/Stop
Output contacts
switch
Load shedding and
reconnection order
Generator set start order
AC DC
Utilisation category (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) AC-12 AC-13 AC-14 AC-15 DC-12 DC-13
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 5 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
[1] For example, 220 V single-phase or 220 V three-phase.
250 V - - - - 0.4 -
[2] The controller is powered by the ACP control plate.
380/415 V 5 - - - - -
The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate, the IVE
440 V 4 - - - - - unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this
660/690 V - - - - - - voltage is the same as the source voltage, then the “Normal”
and “Replacement” sources can be used directly for the
power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.

G-7
 Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems www.se.com

BA controller

The BA controller is used to create simple source-changeover systems that switch from one source to another
depending on the presence of voltage Un on the “Normal” source.
It is generally used to manage two permanent sources and can control ComPact NS, ComPact NSX and MasterPacT
MTZ circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.

Operating modes
DB403841.eps

A four-position switch can be used to select:

b Automatic operation
b Forced operation on the “Normal” source
b Forced operation on the “Replacement” source
b Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)

Setting the time delays

Time delays are set on the front of the controller.
t1. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has failed and the transmission
of the order to open the “Normal” source circuit breaker (adjustable from 0.1 to
30 seconds).
t2. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has returned and the
transmission of the order to open the “Replacement” source circuit breaker
(adjustable from 0.1 to 240 seconds).

Circuit breaker commands and status indications

The status of the circuit breakers is indicated on the front of the controller.
b ON, OFF, fault.
A built-in terminal block can be used to connect the following input/output signals:
b Inputs:
v Voluntary order to transfer to “Replacement” source (for example, for special
tariffs, etc.)
DB403838.eps

BA Controller
v Additional control contact (not part of the controller). Transfer to the
“Replacement” source takes place only if the contact is closed (for example,
used to test the frequency of Ur, etc.)
b Outputs:
v Indication of operation in automatic or stop mode given by changeover
contacts.

Test
G It is possible to test the operation of the BA controller by turning OFF (opening)
the P25M circuit breaker for the “Normal” source and thus simulating a failure of
voltage Un.

Front of the BA controller

G-8
www.se.com
Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems
UA controller

The UA controller is used to create a source-changeover system integrating the following automatic functions:
b Transfer from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage Un on the “Normal” source
b Startup of an engine generator set
b Shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits
b Transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases on the “Normal” source fails.
The UA controller can control ComPact NS, ComPact NSX and MasterPacT MTZ devices.

Operating modes

DB403842.eps
A four-position switch can be used to select:
b Automatic operation
b Forced operation on the “Normal” source
b Forced operation on the “Replacement” source
b Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off, then manual operation)

Setting the time delays

Time delays are set on the front of the controller.
t1. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has failed and the transmission
of the order to open the “Normal” source circuit breaker (adjustable from 0.1
to 30 seconds).
t2. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has returned and the
transmission of the order to open the “Replacement” source circuit breaker
(adjustable from 0.1 to 240 seconds).
t3. delay following opening of Qn with load shedding and before closing of Qr
(adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds).
t4. delay following opening of Qr with load reconnection and before closing of Qn
(adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds).
t5. delay for confirmation that UN is present before shutting down the engine
generator set (adjustable from 60 to 600 seconds).
t6. delay before startup of the engine generator set (120 or 180 seconds).

DB403837.eps
Commands and indications
UA Controller

Circuit breaker status indications on the front of the controller:

b ON, OFF, fault.
A built-in terminal block can be used to connect the following input/output signals:
b Inputs:
v Voluntary order to transfer to “Replacement” source (for example, for special
tariffs, etc.)
v Additional control contact (not part of the controller). Transfer to the
“Replacement” source takes place only if the contact is closed (for example,
used to test the frequency of Ur, etc.)
G
b Outputs:
v Control of an engine generator set (ON / OFF)
v Shedding of non-priority circuits
v Indication of operation in automatic mode given by changeover contacts.
Front of the UA controller
Distribution-system settings
Three switches are used to:
b Select the type of “Normal” source, whether single-phase or three-phase
(for example, 240 V single-phase or 240 V three-phase)
b Select whether to remain on the “Normal” source if the “Replacement” source is
not operational during operation on special tariffs
b Select the maximum permissible startup time for the engine generator set during
operation on special tariffs (120 or 180 seconds).

Test
A pushbutton on the front of the controller can be used to test the transfer from the
“Normal” source to the “Replacement” source, then to test the return to the “Normal”
source. The test lasts approximately three minutes.

G-9
 Integrate in Special Applications - Source-changeover Systems www.se.com

G-10
www.se.com

Services

Services overview....................................................................H-2
Associated services ...............................................................H-3
Life cycle services ..................................................................H-4
Digital services..........................................................................H-8

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

H-1
 Services www.se.com

Services overview

The ultimate in life cycle support for all your installations

Electrical distribution equipment lies at the heart of the industry business, powering the machines and key processes.
Circuit breakers with associated protection relays and control units are vital to help ensure the safety of people and
security of assets. When they fail unexpectedly, the risk of dramatic situations arises.
Implementing an effective services strategy for your electrical distribution installation is therefore crucial for your
business.
Experienced engineers and qualified field service representatives are committed to provide you with innovative
solutions, best-in-class customer service, and advanced technical support.
Schneider Electric Services helps you manage your Electrical Distribution equipment throughout its life cycle.

Life Cycle Services

DB421636.ai

Plan
What are my options? Get peace of mind thanks to
MasterPacT MTZ associated services
Install
How do I install and commission? when purchasing your circuit breaker
> On site assistance to commissioning & start up
Operate > 3/5 years warranty period
How do I operate and maintain?
> E-learning program
Optimize
How do I optimize?

Renew
How do I renew my solution?
Technicien_V.eps

Optimize your electrical distribution with

Schneider Electric Life Cycle services
> OnSite Asset Diagnostic
> OnSite Preventive maintenance
H > OnSite Repair
> ECOFIT™ Masterkit and Plug&Play
MasterPacT MTZ solution
2S7C4708.eps

Manage & maintain your installation using

digital services: permanent data
monitoring of your equipment
> Condition-based maintenance
> EcoStruxure Asset Advisor services

H-2
www.se.com
Services
Associated services

IMG_7962.eps
Peace of mind thanks to associated services
Assistance to commissioning and start up
Schneider Electric assistance and supervision of commissioning and start-up allows
you to ensure the first phase of the life cycle of your electrical installation is fully
implemented in compliance with relevant standards and Schneider Electric safety
procedures:
b check of product installation, perform environmental and visual inspection
b perform functional verification before operation
b setting of protection functions based on data provided by end user
b perform start-up assistance
b ensure operating & maintenance documentation is compliant
b Schneider Electric supervision of installation & commissioning site work report.

3/5 years warranty period

With the Schneider Electric 3/5 years warranty period, you can be certain that in the
case of an unexpected event, your product will be repaired or replaced quickly,
minimizing downtime.
Two options are offered to meet your business requirements and criticality of your
installation:
Service level

DB419913.ai
b 3-years warranty period
b 5-years warranty period including one visit for Onsite Asset Diagnostic in the fifth
year.
The Schneider Electric warranty includes: Customized warranty
b product replacement or repair
b on-site labor costs and travel costs for product exchange or repair, according to
Schneider Electric commercial conditions.
The warranty is applicable when the product is installed and operated following Standard
Schneider Electric product recommendations. warranty

Manufacturing 18 months 3 years 5 years

e-Learning program:
Get ready to operate & maintain your MasterPacT MTZ!
Learn how to make the most of your MasterPacT MTZ!
Content:
b friendly format synthesizing how to commission, operate and maintain your
MasterPacT MTZ.
"Get ready to
b trainee gets the key to understand the potential of MasterPacT MTZ as digital operate and
services enabler. maintain your "Arc flash
b Schneider Electric delivers a completion certificate at the end of the quiz. MasterPacT MTZ" prevention"
b training manuals are provided as well, with recommended maintenance e-Learning program
procedures.
e-Learning program
available: is available:
H

"Electrical Crisis
Management"
e-Learning program
is available:

H-3
 Services www.se.com

Life cycle services

Achieve the highest performance with Schneider Electric maintenance services throughout the life cycle of your
equipment.
Schneider Electric helps you to:
b Reduce unscheduled downtime by maintaining your installation in the right operating conditions
b Maximize lifetime of your equipment
b Increase operation efficiency with a high level of safety.

Schneider Electric offers four levels of maintenance:

b OnSite Repair
b OnSite Preventive Maintenance
b OnSite Condition Maintenance including OnSite Asset Diagnostic (ProDiag)
b Condition-based maintenance with permanent equipment monitoring (EcoStruxure Asset Advisor)

DB421180.ai
Maintenance
efficiency
Adopt the right maintenance Condition-based Maintenance
strategy according to Permanent equipment monitoring.
equipment criticality Maintenance based on expertise and asset usage profile

OnSite Condition Maintenance

OnSite preventive maintenance
enhanced with OnSite Asset Diagnostic (ProDiag)

OnSite Preventive Maintenance

Periodic maintenance based on
time or cycled intervals
OnSite Repair
Run to failure and then repair
Emegency-based

Equipment Criticality
Optimize your operating
costs using the appropriate
maintenance OnSite Repair
This is the Schneider Electric Services corrective maintenance based on on-site interventions to repair or
replace inoperable devices and restore the equipment with expected level of performance.

Recommended spare parts kit

Schneider Electric Services supply original spare parts for your MasterPacT MTZ. Recommended spare parts
kits:
b Commissioning
b 3-year operation
Functions Recommended for Recommended for
H Closing voltage release
Commissioning 3 years of operation

Opening voltage release

Auxiliary contacts ON / OFF
Fault indication
Connected / Disc. / Test
Ready to close
Motorization Gear motor
Terminal block
MicroLogic cover
Escutcheon transparent cover
Auxiliary terminals Terminal block
Jumpers

OnSite Preventive maintenance

This is the Schneider Electric Services preventive maintenance carried out in either of the following cases:
b At predetermined frequency in accordance with established time intervals but without previous condition
investigation.
b At customized frequency in accordance with product usage and with Schneider Electric Services
recommendations. This time-based maintenance is intended to reduce the probability of failure or the degradation of
the equipment. It is recommended for processes with low criticality and is performed during a scheduled shutdown.
In addition, to benefit from the full capability of MasterPacT MTZ new firmware, Schneider Electric Services provide
any upgrade of your complete system.
H-4
www.se.com
Services
Life cycle services

OnSite Asset Diagnostic

To provide maximum care for your electrical distribution equipment, your maintenance strategy should be completed
by OnSite Asset Diagnostic. Regular on-site diagnostics enables to identify symptoms of an undetected malfunction
or degradation before a fault occurs. The performance of the equipment is therefore maintained at its optimum level.

OnSite Condition maintenance

OnSite Condition Maintenance is the Manufacturer preventive maintenance
program.
It includes:
b functional checks, condition checks, cleansing, greasing
b inspection and testing,
b OnSite Asset Diagnostic (ProDiag)

OnSite Asset Diagnostic (ProDiag)

Schneider Electric proposes a comprehensive diagnostic program dedicated to low
voltage air circuit breakers:
b ProDiag Control Unit
b ProDiag Breaker
b ProDiag Clusters

ProDiag Control Unit

Diagnose circuit breaker tripping capability.

b How: checking configuration settings, tripping times data and alarms and events
history to determine pass or not technical specifications
b Method: proprietary diagnostic methodology (procedure with secondary injection,
advanced tools and expertise)
b Job type: Intrusive with shutdown.

ProDiag Breaker
Diagnose circuit breaker electro-kinematic condition.

b How: on site testing of device electro-kinematic core features under normal and
minimum voltage operating conditions to determine pass or not technical specifications.
b Method: proprietary diagnostic methodology replicating manufacturing quality
control testing (procedure, advanced tools and expertise).
b Job type: intrusive with shutdown.

ProDiag Clusters
H
Diagnose the wearing of connection clusters not detected during the traditional
preventive maintenance, resulting from an accelerated aging process caused by
draw-out/in operations, severe environmental conditions, electrical stress, harsh
exploitation, or uneven maintenance. ProDiag Control Unit - Isc

b How: crafted visual inspection of clusters surface condition, and its mechanical
contact pressure to determine if pass or not technical specifications.
b Method: proprietary diagnostic methodology (procedure, advanced tools and
expertise).
b Job type: intrusive with shutdown.

ProDiag Breaker data analysis

H-5
 Services www.se.com

Life cycle services

Plan for the future of your electrical distribution

2S7C4428.eps

installation with Advantage Service Plans

While you focus on your business, Schneider Electric takes care of your assets
present in your electrical distribution site. This plan improves equipment life time and
energy availability. Three levels, Advantage Plus, Advantage Prime, and Advantage
Ultra provide customizable best-in-class services according to both your needs and
constraints. For critical sites, Schneider Electric Advantage Service plan provides
scheduled maintenance and 24/7 support with an agreed response time.
b Advantage Service Plans are comprehensive service packages designed to
provide customized best-in-class services at a contractual cost effective price
b Any plan can be customized by adding options or upgrades, for a duration of one
to several years with an option including renewal
b Select the best and appropriate services included into your Advantage Service
Plans according to:
v Budget
v Criticality of the installation
v Safety
v Electrical architecture complexity
v Power interruptions risk prevention

b Advantage Service Plans provide the following benefits:

v improved safety , availability and life time (on-site preventive maintenance and
asset diagnostics)
v reactivity commitment (24/7 phone support, emergency on site intervention and
priority access to spare parts)
v cost reduction and budget control (reduced downtime and critical losses, control
over maintenance budget)
v acting as a trusted advisor (maintenance by manufacturer experts, world-class
maintenance practices and consistency across geographies)

Advantage Service Plans

Advantage Advantage Advantage
Plus Prime Ultra
OnSite preventive maintenance
OnSite Asset ProDiag offers
diagnostics
Corrective 24/7 technical support
maintenance Emergency on-site
intervention
Cost of parts Preferred Preferred
rates rates
H Labor & travel costs Preferred
rates
Additional myField Services
services web portal
Customer training Optional Optional Optional
MPS walkthrough Optional Optional Optional

H-6
www.se.com
Services
Life cycle services

Electrical distribution equipment modernization ECOFIT™ MasterPacT Plug&Play

with ECOFIT™ MasterPacT MTZ

DB446012.ai
Equipment aging increases operating costs: OF11
OF4
44
OF3

42
34
OF2

32
31
24
OF1

22
14

21
CT3

12
11
934
932
CT2
924

931
CT1

922
921
914
912
911

b Increase in maintenance frequency

OF12 114 41
124 112
OF13 122 111
134 121
OF14 132
OF24 144 131
214 142
OF22 212 141
224 211
OF23 222
OF24 234 221
244 232
242 231
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN- 474
UC4 471
V3
SDE2/Res V2
UC2M3/T1 184/K2 - V1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+

b Increase in corrective maintenance

CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

b Availability and cost of spare parts

Schneider Electric helps you to upgrade your equipment and your installation.
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Increase lifetime of your installation with a cost effective solution and benefit from the MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

latest product innovation.

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM
ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000

ECOFIT™ Masterkit and Plug&Play MasterPacT MTZ solution enables you to:
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM
ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV

b upgrade your equipment with limitation of power interruption time.

NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Aux
Power VPS Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE

MasterPacT M
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
A 1000
In 1000 AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

b optimize your maintenance service costs and limit your investments

SDE1
MC2
UC3

chassis
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
Reset
Test

UC1
COM
ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Aux
Power VPS Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE

b give a boost to the electrical switchboard for efficient operation and energy
UTE 55°C
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
A 1000
In 1000 AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

MasterPacT Test
Reset

management with the new MicroLogic X MTZ1

Aux

In 1000
Power

A
VPS

b maintain compliance with evolving industry standards and legislation. Test

Reset

b benefit 3-years warranty including parts, on-site labor costs and travel costs
Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

according to Schneider Electric commercial conditions. MasterPacT M

ECOFIT™ MasterPacT Plug&Play

A simple solution, easy to implement for a minimum shutdown time.
It allows you to upgrade your equipment by substituting an existing MasterPacT M for
a MasterPacT MTZ of the last generation. The MasterPacT MTZ is inserted in the
existing MasterPacT M chassis.
b Very short on-site servicing times
b Solution particularly adapted for critical sites where shutdown time is key
b Shutdown of the entire installation is not required.
b Ideal for switchboards with no rear access
b No modification of switchboard door required
b Solution tested and complying with IEC 60947-2 standard

ECOFIT™ Masterkit

PE90455.eps
With the Masterkit offer, you have absolutely everything you need to replace an old
MasterPacT M

ECOFIT™ MasterPacT M Masterkit brings all benefits and the enhanced features of
MasterPacT MTZ circuit breakers and accessories. The installation requires shut
down to access to the busbars.
b No modification of power circuit connections required.
b No modification of switchboard door required (up to 3200 A).
b Solution tested and complying with IEC 60947-2 standard.
H

H-7
 Services www.se.com

Digital services

Protect your electrical installation, reducing unscheduled downtime and optimizing

DB421458.ai

maintenance operations using Schneider Electric digital services.

Turn data into actionable information with Schneider Electric state of the art digital
services.
Through remote data monitoring of equipment, Schneider Electric digital services
proactively identify and address events inside equipment with advanced analysis
and manufacturer expertise.
Asset Connect
Gateway Asset Connect helps you to upgrade your customers’ electrical distribution
installation with smart sensors, transforming on communicating equipment into
connected assets. These upgrades open electrical installation to full spectrum of
advanced capabilities, such as preventive or predictive asset performance
management services.
Digital architecture indicates critical points to be monitored in MV/LV substation and
provides alarm to prevent major cause of electrical installation failure.
The raw data access point could be connected to:
b Raw data access point Local SCADA
b Substation Monitoring Device (SMD)
b Cloud enabler Asset Advisor.
Digital architecture and associated sensors could be installed in new products from
factory or installed in an existing installation.

EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor Services

EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor provides your customers with 24/7 awareness of their
electrical distribution system’s health. Through advanced digital capabilities and
PB119129.eps

data streaming, it allows your customers to monitor, identify and address potential
issues while maximizing reliability and extending equipment life.
EcoStruxure Asset Advisor combines a best-of-breed technological platform with our
expertise in maintenance and electrical equipment manufacturing.
Schneider Electric Services Engineers provides remote technical support thanks to
algorithms running on the data to mitigate the risk of electrical failure that will protect
your customers’ installations, people and critical processes.
It embeds Asset Performance Management, from alarm prioritization up to Asset
condition monitoring leading to Condition-based maintenance work orders.
Energy management.jpg

H With EcoStruxure Asset Advisor Services you leverage the possibilities of IoT
(Internet of Things) and digitization.
…and you benefit by:
b prioritizing capital expenditure
b optimizing operational expenditure
b benefiting from Schneider Electric technician expertise, by anticipating needs for
next on site interventions.

Power Quality Management

Also part of digital services, Energy Efficiency & Power Quality Management
Services optimize energy costs, asset utilization and facility operations. MasterPacT
MTZ embeds specific measurements in order to support Services features as:
b detection of abnormal consumptions and parameters
b event management and performance follow-up
b expert analyses and recommendations through monthly reporting
b benchmarking when multiple sites are managed
With Schneider Electric's expertise, you get practical data and recommendations
through periodic reporting that empowers you to take the right actions.

H-8
www.se.com

Order your Circuit Breaker

Order your MasterPacT MTZ through digital tools
Product selector..................................................................................I-2
MasterPacT MTZ Product Code........................................................I-4

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your MicroLogic X control unit......................................................... B-1
Customize your MicroLogic X with digital modules....................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories.......................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems............................... E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications Source-changeover systems...................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1

I-1
 Order your Circuit Breaker www.se.com

Order your MasterPacT MTZ through digital tools

Product selector

To simplify and expedite the ordering of MasterPacT MTZ, four new tools are introduced:
b Product selector: An online software tool embedded in Schneider website or in distributor´s website to help
selecting the right product with its accessories.
b Product Code: An alphanumeric code representing the selection of a MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker. It simplifies
the way to communicate the selection of a MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker during ordering, sharing information and
asking for help remotely.
b MySchneider: online ordering plateform of Schneider for partners, offering most of our products.

Product selector
Product Selector aims at providing a fast, secure and smart way of selecting
products. It includes the selection of the basic frame, control unit, accessories and
Digital Modules. Compared with the traditional way of filling up order forms or
specifying customer functions, it brings the following benefits:
b Easy access: no login, direct access on Schneider website or on distributor´s
website
b Reliable: compatibilities between core product and accessories are constantly
tested
b Wide coverage: more than 130 ranges from Schneider are available (MasterPacT,
ComPact, TeSys, Acti 9, Altivar…)

Yesterday, Today,
Ordering process of MasterPacT MTZ Ordering process of MasterPacT MTZ
with MyPact with Product Selector

new configuration repeat or modified Non MySchneider MySchneider

configuration partner partner [1]

Select base unit, Open existing Select base unit, Select base unit,
accessories and digital configuration [1] accessories and digital accessories and digital
modules modules modules

Save configuration Dowload the bill Dowload the bill

Fine-tuning
and place order of material of material

I Save configuration
and place order
Send it to distributors or to
Schneider CCC for ordering
Upload the file in
MySchneider and order

[1] Existing configuration can be [1] W

 ill be live in January 2019.
opened directly in the saved
configurations or by entering
the Product Code.

I-2
www.se.com
Order your Circuit Breaker
Order your MasterPacT MTZ through digital tools
Product selector

Go on the range page on www.se.com

MasterPacT MTZ

MasterPacT MTZ

Click on the Product Selector button and run your selection

MasterPacT MTZ

MasterPacT MTZ

MicroLogic X

I
Note: You are always encouraged to use Product Selector to select the characteristics of your product. If you have difficulties
accessing or using Product Selector, contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Centre or your Schneider Electric sales
representatives for more information about MTZ ordering.

I-3
 Order your Circuit Breaker www.se.com

Order your MasterPacT MTZ through digital tools

MasterPacT MTZ Product Code

MasterPacT MTZ Product Code is an alphanumeric code representing the complete selection of a MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker. It will be
automatically generated for each MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker after completing the selection through Product Selector. It will appear in the
invoice and delivery documents as well as the labelling on the MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker and the packaging.
MasterPacT MTZ Product Code brings the following benefits:
b Quick and unique identification of the initial selection of a circuit breaker can be achieved by reading the code on the physical products or
b other recordings
b Reordering of the same MasterPacT MTZ circuit breaker is simplified by communicating selection through product code
b Recording or sharing information about the initial selection of a circuit breaker is simplified
b Details of the coding rules can be accessed through CCC and there are some of the highlights:
b All options of accessories are coded.
b The minimum length of the code is 9 characters and the maximum length of the code is 33* characters depending on the choice of the
accessories.
b Capital letters, numbers and start sign [1] are used.
[1] The maximum length of the code may change due to future enrichment of the offer.

An example of MasterPacT MTZ product code

b MasterPacT type: MTZ2 b Type of installation: Drawout with chassis
b Rating: 1000A b Connection: Top Horizontal Bottom Horizontal
b Sensor rating: 800A b Type of communication: ULP + EIFE without I/O module
b Performance Level: H1 b Accessories for Design & Installation simplification and operation
b MicroLogic: 5.0 X efficiency: No
b VPS module: Yes b Accessories for People and Property Safety: No
b Number of poles: 4P
> Product Code: WADFEEADN**A

Yesterday When you want Today

to share information
with your colleagues
or Schneider Electric
CCC

Calling CCC and try to explain Sending a text message

all the customer functions through CCC app with the product code

Yesterday When you want to Today

know the selection of
a circuit breaker

I Engaging Schneider Electric

Services to conduct an analysis
Checking the product code
on the physical products

Yesterday When you want Today

to reorder
a circuit breaker

Fill up order form or calling Type in the product code

Schneider Electric CCC through Product Selector and send order

I-4
www.se.com
Order your Circuit Breaker

I-5
 Other documents

> MasterPacT MTZ

Catalog numbers and spare parts

COM-POWER-LVMKT215EN

> Complementary
technical information

LVPED318033EN

> Substitution guide MTZ

LVPED516027EN
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, rue Joseph Monier

CS 30323
92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
France

RCS Nanterre 954 503 439

Capital social 928 298 512 €
www.se.com

01/2025

© 2025 - Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

All trademarks are owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies.
Document reference: LVPED216026EN